Statics McGill King PDF

II
"
,"
ENGINEERING MECHANICS
Statics
Second Edition
David J. McGill and Wilton W. King

, Georgia Institute of Technology
j,i . , j"
,'I
"i
I
il
,
i~
'i
- -
---
I'
~I
PWS-KENT
Publishing Company
Editor: I. Donald Childress, IT.

Production Editor: Anne B. Fitzpatrick
Interior Designer: Al Burkhardt
Cover Designer: lulie Gecha
Cover Photo: Greg Pease
Illustrations: Georg Klatt, Design Graphic; Deborah Schneck
Manufacturing Coordinator: Ellen I. Glisker
Compositor: Polyglot Pte Ltd.
Cover Printer: Henry N. Sawyer Co., Inc.
Text Printer and Binder: R. R. Donnelley & Sons Company
@ 1989 by PWS.KENT Publishing Company; @ 1985 by PWS Publishers. All rights

reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced" stored in a retrieval system', or
transcribed, in any form or by any means, elect~onic, mechao.ical, photocopy!~ngJ
recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher,. P:WS-
KENT Publishing Company, 20 Park Plaza, Boston, Massachusetts 02116.
PW5-KENT Publishing Company is a division of Wadsworth, Inc.
Library of Congt:ess Cataloging.in-Publication Data
McGill, David I., 1939- .

Engineering mechanics, statics/David I. McGi!"l and Wilton W. King. -'- 2nd ~d.
p. em.
Includes index.
ISBN 0.534.91788.7
1. Mechanics, Applied. 2. Statics. I. King, Wilton W., 1937-
II. Title.
TA350.M385 1989 .88.3S049
620.1-dcI9 CIP
CIP data for Statics and Dynamics, combined edition, can be found on the back
endpapers.
Printed in the United States of America
89 90 91 92 93-10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
I
I
il
I
'To the memory of Robert W. Shreeves,
friend and colleague
,
,
ii'
I,
ii
I:
I'
Ii
-1-,
IiI:
il.
~I
,i
I'
~:
i!.
Preface
l
Statics is the first book in a two-volume set on basic mechanics. It is a text

for standard courses in statics as found in most colleges of engineering.
This text includes more material than is normally covered in such a
course because we have attempted to include most traditional special
applications from which schools and instructors make selections tol
augment the core subject matter.
In the writing of this text we have followed one basic guideline-to
write the book in the same way we teach the course. To this end, we have
II written many explanatory footnotes and included frequent questions'
'"
interspersed throughout the chapters. ITheanswers to these questions
are provided at the end of each chapter.) These questions are the same
kind as the ones we ask in class; to make the most of them, treat them as
serious homework as you read, and look up the answers only after you
have your own answer in mind, The questions are intended to encourage
thinking about tricky points and_to emphasize the basic principles of the
subject.
In addition to the text questions, a set of approximately one dozen
review questions and answers are included at the end of each chapter.'
These true-false questions are designed for both classroom discussion and
for student review. Homework problems of varying degrees of difficulty
appear at the end of every major section. There are nearly 1,200 of theslC
exercises, and the answers to the odd-numbered ones constitute
Appendix E in the back of the book.
There are a number of reasons Ibesides carelessness) why it may be
difficult to get the correct answer to a homework problem in statics or
dynamics on the first try. The problem may require an unusual amount of
vii
~_.,-
thinking and insight; it may contain tedious calculations; or it may
challenge the student's advanced mathematics skills. We have placed an
asterisk beside especially difficult problems falling into one or more of
these categories.
Statics is characterized by only two basic equations, but these
equations are applied in a wide variety of circumstances. Thus it is
imperative that students develop a feel for realistically modeling an
engineering situation. Consequently, we have included a large number of
actual engineering problems among the examples and exercises. Being
aware of the assumptions and accompanying limitations of the model and
of the solution method can be developed only by sweating over many
problems outside the classroom. Only in this way can students develop
the insight and creativity needed to solve engineering problems.
Some examples and problems are presented in SI (Systeme Inter-
national) metric units, whereas others use traditional United States
engineering system units. Whereas the United States is slowly and
painfully converting to SI units, our consulting activities make it clear
that much engineering work is still being performed using traditional
units. Most United States engineers still tend to think in pounds instead
of newtons and in feet instead of meters. We believe students will become
much better engineers, scientists, and scholars if they are thoroughly
familiar with both systems, especially during the next ten to fifteen
years.
In Chapter I we introduce engineering mechanics and its primitives,
and we set forth the basic laws of statics. This chapter also covers units
and dimensions as well as techniques of problem solving and the im-
portance of accuracy.
In Chapter 2 forces and moments are defined and covered in detail,
after which the equilibrium equations for the finite-sized body are pre-
sented. This approach prepares students for the second half of the chap-
ter, which deals with equipollence and with resultants of discrete and
distributed force systems.
The heart of the book is Chapter 3, in which we analyze equilibrium
problems. The chapter begins with the free-body diagram-crucial to
successful analysis of problems in statics and dynamics. We then
examine the equilibrium of a single body and expand that study to
interacting bodies and to parts of a structure.
In Chapter 4 we extend our study to structures of three common
types: trusses, beams, and cables. In preparation for later courses in
strength of materials or deformable bodies, we include a section on shear
and moment diagrams. The studies of Chapter 4 differ from most of those
in Chapter 3 in that the bodies are routinely "cut" Ion paper' in order to
determine their important internal force distributions.
Though friction forces may sometimes act on the bodies studied in
Chapter 3, the special nature of these forces was not elaborated on there.
This detailed study is done in Chapter 5, which deals exclusively with
Preface Ili
J
"r,
Coulomb lor dry friction). This chapter also includes fundamental
problems and applications of dry friction alo'ng with special applications
such as the friction on a flexible flat belt wrapped around a cylindrical
surface.
Chapters 6 and 7, although not statics per se, treat topics often
, covered in statics courses. Chapter 6 includes the topics of centroids lof
i
lines, areas, and volumes I and of centers of mass. Chapter 7 follows with 1
! study of inertia properties of areas-a necessary background for studie~
of the strength and deflection of beams in courses on the mechanics of
deformable solids. To this end we inclu'de a closing section on Mohr'~
circle for principal axes and moments of inertia of areas. This topic is also
i'" useful in studies of stress and strain as wel1'as in studies of moments, of
inertia of masses Ithe latter of which is covered in our dynamics volumel:
Finally, Chapter 8 includes two special topics in statics. The first is
the principal of virtual work, a very powerful method in mechanics and
an elegant alternative to the equations of equilibrium. The second is
"fluid statics," or the statics of submerged bodies subjected to hydrostaL
tic fluid pressure.
In this second edition, we wish to acknowledge the help of our friend
and colleague, Mike Bernard, who has given us many useful suggestions
;.!
while teaching from the first edition of the book. We also thank ou~
colleagues Ken Reed, Charles Ueng, James Wang, Wan-Lee Yin, Richard
Riff, Don Berghaus, George Rentzepis, John Papastavridis, Larry iacobs~
Manohar Kamat, and Benny Wilner for their com~ents about this book.
We also acknowledge the helpful remarks of Lawrence Malvern of the
University of Florida and Leroy Fuss of Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. .
We are grateful to Betty Mitchell for typing and to our reviewers this
time around: Don Carlson, University of Illinois at Champaign-Urbana~
John Ely, North Carolina State University; Vincent Lee, University of
Southern California; and Han-Chin Wu, University of Iowa.
,I
"
LI
I
I
I
Contents
............-
1 Introduction 1
1.1 Engineering Mechanics 2
1.2 The Primitives 3

Basic Laws 3
Units and Dimensions 5
1.5 Problem Solving and Accuracy of Solutions 9
Forces and Moments 11

I, 12
2..1 Forces and Lines of Action
2.2 Moment of a Force About a Point 27

2.3 Moment ora Force About a Line 37
2.4 The Couple 47

2.5 54
., Laws of Equilibrium: Relationship of Sums of Moments
2.6 Equipollence of Force Systems 57

2.7 The Force-and-Couple Resultant of a System of Forces 65
2.8 The Simplest Resultant of a Force System 73
2.9 Distributed Force Systems 95
xi
'I
i xii Contents
~3 AnalY,sis of Equilibrium Problems 116
3.1 Introduction I 17
3.2 The Free-Body Diagram 119
,
3.3 Fundamental Applications of the Equilibrium Equations 131
3.4 Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting Bodies or
Parts of a Structure 180
~4 Structural APplications 237
I TRUSSES 238
4.1 Ir;troduction 238

4.2 The Metnod of Joints lor Pinsl 244
4.3 Shortcuts and Rigidity/Determinacy Results 2S5
4.4 The Method of Sections 263

4.5 Space Trusses 28 I
II SYSTEMS CONTAINING MULTIFORCE MEMBERS 290
4.6 Axial and Shear Forces and Bending Moments 290

4.7 Beams/Shear and Moment Distributions 299
4.8 Differential Relationships Between qlx), VlxJ,and Mlxl in a Beam/
Shear and Bending Moment Diagrams 313
III CABLES 330
4.9 Parabolic and Catenary Cables 330

4.10 Cables Under Concentrated Loads 341
Friction 356
5.1 Laws, Coefficients, and Basic Applications of Coulomb Friction 357

5.2 Special Applications of Coulomb Friction 395
~6 Centroids and Mass Centers 420
6.1 Centroids of Lines, Areas, and Volumes/The Recurring Integral 421
6.2 The Method of Composite Parts 436
1
-..
;
Contents xiii
6.3 Center of Mass 450

6.4 The Theorems of Pappus 456
~7 Inertia Properties of Plane Areas

,
467
7.1 Moments of Inertia of a Plane Area 468
7.2 The Polar Moment of Inertia of a Plane Area 473
7.3 The Parallel-Axis Theorem lor Transfer Theorem! for Moments of
Inertia/The Radius of Gyration 476
7.4 The Method of Composite Areas 483
7.5 Products of Inertia of plane Areas 494
7.6 The Parallel-Axis Theorem for Products of Inertia 499
7.7 Moments and products of Inertia with Respect to Rotated Axes
Through a Point/Mohr's Circle 503
. ~ ~8 Special Topics
:1
516
8.1 The Principle of Virtual Work 517

8.2 Hydrostatic Pressure on Submerged Bodies 540
Appendix A Vectors 570
A.1 Vectors: Addition, Subtraction, and Multiplication by a Scalar 570

A.2 Unit Vectors and Orthogonal Components 571,
A.3 Scalar (Dotl Product 573
A.4 Vector (Cross! product 575
A.5 Scalar and Vector Triple Products 578
Appendix B Tables Relating to Units 584
Appendix C Moments and Products of Inertia of Areas 587
Appendix D Examples of Numerical Analysis/The Newton-Raphson

Method 592
Appendix E Answers to Odd-Numbered Problems 594
Index 604
'I,
Engineering Mechanics:
Statics
l::..._~ __
.
,.~, -",...,--.,-------------------------------------------~~---~ "
"
I
r
Introduction
.
,
~
I
l
.,,
.1'
I 1.1 Engineering Mechanics
1.2 The Primitives
I '
I 1.3 Basic Laws
1.4 Units and Dimensions
1.5 Problem Solving and Accuracy of Solutions
I,,
1
2 Chapter 1 Introduction
--.IlIIIIIII1.1 Engineering Mechanics

Two things that are basic to understanding the physical world and
universe in which we live are (al the motions of bodies and (bl their
mechanical interactions. Engineering mechanics provides the hasic .
principles by which these motions and interactions are described, related,
and predicted.
There are many diverse applications of mechanics, which begin , "I
in most undergraduate engineering curricula with studies of statics,
dynamics, mechanics of materials, and fluid mechanics'. Applications of
the principles learned in these studies have led to solutions of such
problems as:
1. The invention and continuing refinement of the bicycle, the auto-
mobile, the airplane, the rocket, and the machines for manufac- .
turing processes.
2. The description of the motions of the planets and of artificial
satellites.
3. The description of the flows of fluids that allow motion and flight to
occur.
4. The determination of the stresses (intensities of forces) produced in
machines and structures under load.
5. The control of undesirable vibrations that would otherwise cause
discomfort in vehicles and buildings.
In solving problems such as these, mathematical models are created and
analyzed. It will be important for students to learn to bridge the gap
between problems of the real world and the mathematical models used to
describe them. This, too, is part of mechanics-being able to visualize
the actual problem and then to come up with a realistic and workable
model of it. Proficiency will come only from the experience of comparing "
the predictions of mathematical models with '1bservations of the physical
world for large numbers of problems. The reader will find that there ani
not a great number of basic ideas and principles in mechanics, but they
provide powerful tools for engineering analysis if they are thoroughly
understood.
In the .first part of this introductory mechanics text, we shall be
considering bodies at rest in an inertial (or Newtonianj reference frame; a
body in this situation is said to be in equilibrium. Statics is the study of
the equilibrium interactions (forcesl of a body with its surroundings. In
another study, called dynamics, we explore .the relation between,mo,
tions and forces, especially in circumstances in which the body may be
idealized as rigid.
1.3 BasicLaws 3
~1.2 The Primitives
There are several concepts that are primitives in the study of mechanics.
Space. We shall be using ordinary Euclidei'n three-dimensional geome,
try to describe the positions of points on the bodies in which we
are interested, and, by extension, ihe regions occupied by these
bodies. The coordinate axes used in locating the points will be
locked into a reference frame, which is itself no more or less
than a rigid body lone for which the distance between any tWO
points is constant).
Time. Time will be measured in the usual way. It is, of course, the
measure used to identify the chronology of events. Time will
not really enter the picture in statics; it becomes important
when the bodies are no longer at rest, but are instead moving in
the reference frame.
Force. Force is the action of one body upon another, most easily
visualized as a push or pull. A force acting on a body tends to
accelerate it in the direction of the force.
Mass. The resistance of a body to motion is measured by its mass and
by the distribution of that mass. Mass per unit volume, called
density, is a fundamental material property. Mass is a factor in
the gravitational attraction of one body to another. [t is this
manifestation of mass that we shall enCOUnterin statics.
~1.3 Basic Laws
When Isaac Newton first set down the basic laws or principles upon
which mechanics has come to be based, he wrote them for a particle. This
is a piece of material suffiCiently small that we need not distinguish its
material points as to locations (or velocities or accelerations). Therefore,
we could actually consider the Earth and Moon as particles for; sorne
applications sUch as the analysis of celestial orbits (as Newton didl. "
Newton published a treatise called ThePrincipia in 1687, in which
certain principles governing the motion of a particle were developed.
These have come to be known as Newton's Laws of Motion, and are
commonly expressed today as follows:
1. [n the absence of external forces, a particle has constant velocity
(which means it either remains at rest or travels in a straight line at
constant speedl.
2. or
If a force acts on a particle, it will be accelerated in the direction
the force, with an acceleration magnitude proportional to that of the
force.
3. The two forces exerted on a pair of particles by each other are equal
in magnitude, opposite in direction, and collinear along the line
joining the two particles.
We must recognize that the laws will not apply when velocities
approach the speed of light, when relativistic effects become important ..
Neither will Newton's Laws apply at a spatial scale appropriate to
individual atoms. It is also important to understand that what we ate
really doing is hypothesizing the existence of certain special frames of
reference in which the laws are valid. These frames are called New-
tonian, or inertial. This poses a chicken-and-egg problem where one tries
to reason which comes first-the inertial frame or the three laws. It,
is true that the laws hold only in inertial frames, but also that inertial
frames are those in which the laws hold, so that neither is of any value
without the other. To establish that a frame is inertial requires numerous
comparisons of the predictions of the laws of motion with experimental 'I
observations. Such comparisons have failed to provide any contradiction
of the assertion that a frame containing the mass center of the solar
system and having fixed orientation relative to the "fixed" stars is
inertial. For this reason many writers refer to this frame of reference as
"fixed" or "absolute." While the earth, which moves and turns relative
to this standard, is not an inertial frame, it closely enough approximates
one for the analysis of most earth-bound engineering problems.
An important extension of Newton's Laws was made in the' 18th
century by the Swiss mathematician Leonhard Euler. The extension was.
the postulation of two vector laws of motion for the finite-sized body.
These laws IEuler's Laws), again valid only in inertial frames, are
expressible as:
1. The resultant of the external forces on a body is at all times equal to
the time derivative of its momentum.
2. The resultant moment of these external forces about a fixed point is '
equal to the time derivative of the body's moment of momentum'
about that point.
Euler's Laws allow us to study the motions lor the special case in .
which the motions '(anish! of bodies, whether or not they are particles. ,
The first law yields the motion of the mass center, and the second leads to
the orientational, or rotational, motion of a rigid body. It can be shown'
that an "action-reaction" principle lequivalent to Newton's Third,LawJ
follows from these two laws of Euler.
Another contribution by Isaac Newton which is of monumental
importance in mechanics is his Law of Gravitation, which expresses the
gravitational attraction between two particles in terms of their masses
1m, and fi,) and the distance II)between them. The magnitude IF) of the
force on either panicle is given by
Gmtml
F = ,
I
,r
ii.
f
"
'f
1k Unitsand Dimensions 5'
"
I where G is the universal gravitation constant. For a small body Ip~rticlel
"I being attracted by the earth, the force is given approximately by 'an
1 equation of the same form,
f F=--
r2
GMm
J where now M is the mass of the earth, m is the mass of the particle, and i
the distance from the particle to the center of the earth. If the particle is'
l
,I
nearthe earth's surface, r is approximately the radius, r" 'ofthe earth and
to good approximation .
"{
"
l F = (~nm = mg
j
I The symbol g is called the strength of the gravitational field or the'
'I gravitational acceleration, since this is the free-fall acceleration ofa body
:,f near the surface of the earth. Although g varies slightly from place to
place on the earth, we shall, unless othe~ise noted, u'se the nominal
i
I values of 32.2lb/slug (or fUsec2j and 9.81 Nlkg lor m/s2). The force,
,I I
r
mg, that the earth exerts on the body is called the weight of the body:
~1.4
'~
.I
I
"
c
Units and Dimensions
" The numerical value assigned to a physical entity expresses the rela-
tionship of that entity to certain standards of measurement called units'.
There is currently an international set of standards called the Intet-
, , national System 151) of Units. This is a descendant of the MKS met-
ric system. In the 51 system the unit of time is the second lsi, the unit
.)
of length is the meterlmj, and the unit of mass is the kilogram Ikg).These
.', independent lor basic} units are defined by physical entities or phenom-
"
ena: the. second is defined by the period of a radiation occurring in

atomic physics, and the meter is defined by the wavelength of a differen't
.-:, radiation. One kilogram is defined to be the mass of a certain piece qf
material that is stored in France. Any other 51 units we shall need'ar~
derived from these three basic units. The unit of force, the newton IN), is
:l'
derived by way of Newton's Second Law, so that, for example, one
newton is the force required to give a mass of one kilogram an accel-
eration of one meter per second per second, or I N = I kg . m/s2.
Until very recently almost all engineers in the United States have
used a different system Isometimes called the British gravitational orU.S.
systemj in which the basic units are the second (seclfor time, the foot Iftl
for length, and the pound lib) fodorce. The pound is the weight, at ,a
standard gravitational condition Ilocation) of a certain body of materiil
that is stored in the United States. In this system the unit of mass is ,
derived and is the slug, one slug being the mass that is accelerated one
L, _
;..,
i
. 6 Chapter1 Introduction
foot per second per second by a force of one pound, or I slug = I Ib-
sec'lft. For the foreseeable future, United States engineers will find it
desirable to be as comfortable as possible with both the U.S. and 51
systems; lor that reason we have used both sets of units in examples and
problems throughout this book.
We next give a brief discussion of unit conversion. The conversion
of units is very quickly and efficiently accomplished by multiplying by
equivalent fractions until the desired units are achieved. For example,
suppose we wish to know how many newton' meters IN . m) of torque
are equivalent to lib-It; since we know there to be 3.281 ft per m and
4.448 N per Ib,
1m )(4.448 N) .
I lb.ft = I-lli'k ( 3.281k 111:5' = 1.356 N . m
For a second example, let us find how many slugs of mass there are in a
kilogram:
I kg = I oN. s' ( I Ib )( Lm- )

.m- 4.448# 3.281 ft j C',
Ib-sec'
= 0.06852 ~f-t - or 0.06852 slug
Inversely, I slug = 14.59 kg. A table of units and conversion lactors may
be found in Appendix B.
It is a source of some confusion that sometimes there is used a unit of
mass called the pound, or pound mass, which is the mass whose weight is
one pound of lorce at standard gravitational conditions. Also, the term
kilogram has sometimes been used for a unit of loree, particularly in
Europe. Grocery shoppers in the U.S. are exposed to this confusion by the
fact that packages are marked as to weight (or is it mass?) both in pounds
and in kilograms. Throughout this book, without exception, the pound is
a unit of force and the kilogram is a unit of mass.
The reader is no doubt already aware 01 the care that must be
exercised in numerical calculations using different units. For example, if
two lengths are to be summed in which one length is 2 feet and the other
is 6 inches, the simple sum of the measures, 2 + '6 = 8, does not provide
a measure of the desired length. It is also true that we may not add or
equate the numerical measures 01 different types of entities; thus it
makes no sense to attempt to add a mass to a length. These are said to
have different dimensions, a dimension being the name assigned to the
kind of measurement standard involved, as contrasted with the choice of
a particular measurement standard lunitl. In science and engineering we
attempt to develop equations expressing the relationships among various
physical entities in a physical phenomenon. We express these equations
in symbolic form so that they are valid regardless of the particular choice
of system 01 units; nonetheless, they must be dimensionally consistent.
I 1.4 Units and Dimensions 7
To aid in verification of dimensional consistency, we assign some

common symbols for basic dimensions: L for length, M for mass, F for
force, and T for time. Just as there are derived units of measure, there are
derived dimensions; thus the dimension of velocity or speed is LIT and
the dimension of acceleration is LIT2 In SI units, force is derived from L,
M, and T; we have, dimensionally, F = MLIT2 In U.S. units, mass is
derived from L, F, and T; hence, dimensionally, M = FT21 L. Some
things are dimensionless. An example of this is the radian measure of an
angle. Since the measure is defined by the ratio of two lengths, the
numerical value is thus independent of the choice of unit of length.'
Arguments of transcendental functions must always be dimensionless.
To check an expression for dimensional consistency, we replace
each symbol for a physical quantity by the symbol lor symbolsl for its.
dimension. We replace any dimensionless quantity by unity. The die
mension symbols in each separate term of an equation must combine to
yield the same dimension for each term: The following examples'
illustrate this process:
I. The distance, d, of a runner from the finish line of a race has been
derived to be (for an interval of constant acceleration)
d = do - vot - 2'I at 2
where t is time, do is the distance at t = 0, Vo is the speed at t = 0, and
a is the constant acceleration. Substituting the dimension symbols in
each term
L ( L 2
L =L - T TI - T2 IT I
where the equality sign and the minus signs serve only the purpose of
identifying the terms under consideration. Since each term has the
dimension of length ILlthe equation is dimensionally consistent.
2. A square plate is supported by a pair of ropes; suppose that a
student deduces that the force, P, exerted by one rope is
"
where I is the length of a side of the plate, m is the mass of the plate, and.
g is the acceleration of gravity. If, as is intended here, every length
appearing in the problem is a multiple (or fractionl of f, then a student
must immediately conclude that the analysis is in error since the
dimension of 21 is L and the dimension of 3/2 is L2; thus they c~nnot
be added.
A second student analyzing the problem concludes that
L...... _
This student also must conclude that the analysis is in error since the
dimension of P is F while the dimension of mglis FL.
A third student analyzing this problem concludes that
I
P = -mg
2 . ,
This solution may be in error, but at least it satisfies the requirement of

dimensional consistency.
3. Analyzing the dynamics of a rotating plate with edge lengths a '
and b, a student finds the angular speed, w (the dimension,is liT, and
typical units are rad/secl, at a certain instant to be '
which cannot be true since the denominator is dimensionally inconsis-

tent (adding an L to an L2).
A second student obtains
w = Sg/(a + bl
Noting that g, the acceleration of gravity, has dimension LIT2, we test
the dimensional consistency of the result by writing
I , LIT2 I
T L T2
which demonstrates that this result is not dimensionally consistent..
A third student obtains
w = S.jg/(a + bl
which is dimensionally consistent since the dimension of.j g/(a + b) is
.jIlT2 = liT
4. A student's analysis of vibrations of an airplane wing yields the
displacement, v (its dimension is LI, of a certain point to be
v = Ae-a' sin pt
where t is time. For this equation to be dimensionally consistent, (at) and
(ptl must be dimensionless; therefore, a and p must each have the
dimension liT Moreover, the dimension of A must be length (LI.
These examples illustrate a compelling reason for expressing the
solutions to problems in terms of symbols so that any system of units can
be used. When that is done it is relatively easy to check the dimensional
consistency of the proposed expressions. With a solution in terms of
symbols, we can also examine limiting cases of the parameters to check
the solution itself. Sometimes we can even Undertake to optimize a
solution quantity with respect to one or more of the parameter"
"
1,5 ProblemSolvingand Accuracyof Solutions 9
.......
1 .5 Problem Solving and Accuracy of Solutions
In Chapter 2 we shall undertake a study of the three vectors of prime
importance in statics: forces, moments, and position vectors. Then these
vectors will be used to develop the concept of the resultant ..ofa
force/couple system. We shall then be ready in Chapter 3 to solve some
equilibrium problems. At that time we shall give a detailed discussion
of problem solving, emphasizing one of the most useful concepts in
mechanics-the free-body diagram. Until we reach that point in our
study, however, it is important that the student/reader do the following
with the problems in the first two chapters:
1. Read the problem carefully, digest the physical meaning, and list the
I'givens" and the "requireds."
2. Sketch any diagrams that might be helpful.
3. Carry out the calculations, using only as many digits as the least
accurate number in the given data'
4. Look over your answers. See if they make sense, and draw and state
all the conclusions you can from them.
In the examples, unless stated otherwise, we shall retain three
significant digits lunless one or more digits are lost through additions or
subtractions; for example, 90.2 - 90. I = 0.11. If, say, a length lis given
in the data to be 2 ft, it will be assumed throughout the example that I is
actually 2.00 ft.
In the next chapter lindeed, throughout most of the rest of the bookl,
we shall be using vectors to represeht the three entities commonly known
as force, moment, and position. In Appendix A we offer a review of .
vectors, and we encourage all student readers to glance through. this
appendix at this time and to study any unfamiliar topics.
PRO B L EMS / Chapter 1
.:~
!
., 't 1.1 Describe a physical problem in which we already 1.3 Explain why velocity and energy aTe riot primitives in
':1 know the configuration llocati0I1J of a body at rest, and are the study of mechanics.
interested in knowing the forces that keep it there.
1.4 A dyne is one gram . centimeter/s2. How many dynes
1.2 Describe a physical problem in which we know at least are there in one pound?
one of the forces acting on a body at rest and ate interested
1.5 How many kilometers are there in one mile?
,in knowing its configuration.
,
"-I; .
*For instance, if go =. 32.2 ft/sec2 or 9.81 m/s2 is used in a calculation, it is ridiculous

to give an answer to four si1!.nificantdigits. .
.10 , Chapter 1 Introduction
1.6 What is the weight. in new~ons of a 2500-pound pressible as Gm1m2/r2. Roughly calculate the value of
automobile? G using your own weight and mass, and the fact that for the
earth, (al radius '" 3960 miles, and (bl average specific
1,7 The Btu [British thermal unit) is a unit of energy used gravity = 5.51. (The specific gravity of a material is the
in thermodynamic c~lculations. There are .778 ft-Ib in one ratio of its density to that of warer.1
Btu.;How many joules are there iojone Btu? (One joule =
IN. rn of energy.1 . . 1.12 If the measure of a quantity is known to three
significant figures, what is the maximum percentage of I).
1.8 Determine which of the terms in the following ~
uncertainty? '
equation is dimensionally inconsis~ent with all the others:
, 1.13 A rectangular parallelepiped has sides of lengths I
IDV2 mI21
f
!
mgcos 8 ~ N = -- + -,-, 2.00 ffi, 3.00 m, and 4.00 m. Another has sides 2.02 m, ,~
r t' 3.03 m, and 4.04 m. Find the difference in their volumes.
,-
To how many significant figures is the difference known~
-~
where m = mass, g = gravitational acceleration, N =

force, v' = velocity,.! = radius, an:d t = time. 1.14 Each edge of a cube is increased in length by 0.002%. k
1.9 With the same symbols as in the .preceding problem, is
What is the per~ent increase in volume of the ~ube? Notice "A,
.~:
the number of significant figures required to calculate the
the equation v = .j2i; dimension~lly cOf!.sistent?
ii"
change in volume if it is done by calculating a numerical

;.;
1.1 0 S~ppose that a certain (fictitiQus) quantity has dim en. value for the new volume and; then subtracting the old. ;r
sian L2M31T4, and that one quix: = 1 m2 kg3/S4. The .Repeat the problem for an increase of 2 x lO~6 %. 'f.ry 1
corresponding unit in U.S. units is k quax. How many quix to find a way to avoid this -;'smal1 difference of large
in aquJx~ numbers" problem.
1.11 Determine the units of the universal gravitation.

constant G, using the fact that ~he gravity force is ex- * Asterisks identify the more difficult problems.
'.
"j
:j
.'1
Forces and Moments
','
2.1 Forces and Lines of Action
2.2 Moment of a Force About a Point

2.3 Moment of a Force About a Line
2.4 The Couple
2.5 Laws of Equilibrium: Relationship of Sums of Moments

2.6 Equipollence of Force Systems
2.7 The Force-and-Couple Resultant of a System of Forces
2.8 The Simplest Resultant of a Force System
2.9 Distributed Force Systems
11
12 Chapter 2 Forces and Moments
~2.1 Forces and Lines of Action

A force is a mechanical action exerted by one physical body on another.
Very simply, but also very specifically, it is what we perceive as a "push"
or a "pull." A vector' is the mathematical entity by which a force is
represented. Perhaps this seems almost self-evident because we imagine
pushes and pulls to have the qualities of magnitude and direction that are
characteristic of vectors. However, some things in the physical world
have magnitude and direction but can't be represented by vectors because
they don't conform to the parallelogram law of addition. Forces do con-
form to the parallelogram law of addition. Experiments in mechanics
consistently confirm that the effect of two forces simultaneously applied
land having a common point of application) is the same as the effect that
arises from a single force related to the first two by the parallelogram law.
Suppose, for example, that two cables are exerting fqrces on the crate
(100 Ib)
shown in Figure 2.1. Each of the forces can be represented graphically
by an "arrow" -that is, a directed line segment whose length is pro-
(901b) portional to the magnitude of the force. The sum of the 100-lb and
F,
90-lb forces may then be constructed graphically by the parallelogram
law as shown in Figure 2.2, where the magnitude of that sum is seen to
be 170 lb. Equivalent head-to-tail representations of the sum of the forces
Figure 2.1 are also shown in the figure.
F,
I
I
I
I
3 I
____.JJ
F,
Figure 2.2
Thus, if F, is the 90-lb force, F2 the 100-lb force, and F3 the 170-lb
sum, we can write algebraically
F3 = F2 + F, = F, + F2
INote that we use bold type to denote vectors.) It is important to point out
that this addition of the vectors representing the two forces doesn't
depend in any way upon the forces having a common point of application;
only the magnitudes and directions come into play.
We have mentioned the point of application of a force on a body.
Usually, in fact, we perceive that the mechanical action is distributed
.See Appendix A for a more formal treatment of vector algebra.

r 2.1 Forces and Lines of Action 13
over a surface or volume. The details of this point of view will be

~f examined later in the chapter. For the time being, however, we shall
suppose that the action of a force is sufficiently localized that it makes
~. Line of action of F
o sense to characterize its place of application by a single point on the body.

The line of action of a force is very simply the line in space that passes
through the point of application and has the same direction as the force.
!~'Z"
Force F "\.
This relationship is shown in Figure 2.3. We shall see that the line of
action of a force plays a central role in mechanics.
In our first example, we make use of the fact that forces add ac-
cording to the parallelogram law of vector addition.
Point of application of F
Figure 2.3 Line of action of a force.
I
~
I
I E x A M p L E 2.1~
Find the magnitudes of forces F1 and F2 having the directions shown so that their
sum is the force F, whose magnitude is 10 lb. All three forces lie in the plane of the
paper.
SOLUTION
The head-to-tail version of the parallelogram law of addition is shown in the

sketch.
One way to solve this problem is by the Law of Sines; that is, using the
triangle in the illustration,
sin 45 sin 30 sin 105

10 IF,I IFti
where IF,Iand IF,I den~te the magnitudes of forces F, and F,. Thus
1010.51
IF,I = 0.707 = 7.071b
10
IF,I = 0.707 10.9661 = 13.7 Ib
An alternative approach is to observe that:
1. The horizontal projection of IF21 must be equal t~ the horizontal projection

of 10j that is,
IF,I cos 45' = 10sin 30'

10 sin 30
I
1010.51
IF,I = -- = 7.071b
0.707
(Continued)
! ..... '
2. 1Ft! is the sum of the vertical projections of 10 and IF21i that is,
IFd = 10 cos 30 + IF,I cos 45
10(0.8661 + (7071(0.7071
= 8.66 + 5
~ 13.71b i\..
This second approach is closely associated with the concept of orthogonal

components of a force, which will be discussed after tl).is example.
A third approachthat couldbe used forthis problem is graphic.That is, we
could use a scale, a straightedge, and a protractor to draw the "force triangle"
shown. The student is encouraged to do this and then to think about the effects of
measurement errors on the accuracy of a solution by this method.
Unit vectors of preassigned directions provide the mechanism by

which forces are usually expressed. Suppose we let x, y, and z b~ mutually
perpendicular axes, or reference directions, and we let 1, and k be I,
dimensionless unit vectors' parallel, respectively", to those directions (see
Figure 2.41. The parallelogram law allows us to decompose a force F into
three mutually perpendicular parts written F3, FJ, and F,k so that, as
suggested by Figure 2.4,
F = F3 + FyI + F,k (2.11
F3, FyJ, and F,k are called orthogonal lor rectangularl vector com-
ponents of F, and F" Fy, and F, are called the corresponding scalar com-
ponents.! Referring to Figure 2.4, we see that the magnitude, IFI, of F is
)
y
Figure 2.4
"'Inthis book a caret, or "hat," over a bold lower-case letter signifies that the vector is
a unit vector. All unit vectors that we use are dimensionless_ Throughout the book, the unit
.vectors (i, J, k] are always parallel, respectively, to the assigried directions of (x, y. zl.
tSometimes in this book we refer to "components" without an adjective; in such
instances it should be clear from the context which components, scalar. or vector, are-
intended.
14
2.1 Forces and Lines of Action 15
, , given by
(2.2)
.J
where F; + F: is itself the magnitude of the component of F in the xy
plane. (Thus the components of a force need not be associated with
coordinate directions.) We can speak of the component in a plane, or
normal to a plane, or along a skewed line, and so on.
Sometimes we shall need to write' a force as the product of its
magnitude IFI and a unit vector e las was shown in Figure 2.41 in its
i
direction:
!.
"
I.'
,
I
F = IFle (2.31
~I
I
I
Both Equations 12.II and 12.31are very important in the study of statics. It
is also important to realize that the scalar components of e are the cosines
I. of the angles lor direction cosinesl that F makes with the positive x, y, and
'~. z axes:
d.,
F = IFlle) + ey) + e,k)
= IFllicos e )1
x + Icos e y)) + Icos e.lk]
A comment about notation as it relates to figures is in order here.

Sometimes the figures show an arrow labeled with a bold letter denoting a'
vector. The purpose of this is to display a vector pictorially, usually to
depict some general relationship. At other times the figures shpw an
arrow labeled with a scalar. In these instances we are communicating that
the vector in question is expressed by the scalar multiplying a unit vector
in the direction of the arrOW. The examples that follow illustrate the use
of this "code."
IFI- ION E x A M p L E 2.2~

A force F of magnitude 10 newtons IN) is depicted in the figure. Express the vector
in component form using the reference directions X, y, and z.
SOLUTION
i
)
ex ~ 900
+ 30 0
= 120
0
x
er ~ 30 0
ei = 90
(Continued)
j,
C[.:, _.
:
Therefore,
cos Ox = cos 120 0

= -0.5
cos Oy = cos 30 0
= 0.866
cos ez = cos 90 0
= 0
and so
,
,
Fx = 10(-0.51 = -5 N ~ ,
Fy = 10(0.8661 = 8.66 N
F, = 10101 = 0 ,.
J,
,
The force is therefore expressible as:
F = F,l + Fy' + F,k

= -51 + 8.66,N . ,
The same result may be obtained by decomposing F as shown in the sketch.

Thus we see that, because a unit vector to the left is (-II and a unit vector upward
is j,
10 cos 300 F ~ 1O(0.5J1-1) + 10(0.8661,
= -51 + 8.661 N
Consequently, by picking off the coefficients of I, j, and i,

),
Fx = -5 N
10 cos 600 x
Fy = 8.66 N
F, = 0 N
are the scalar components.
z E x A M p L E 2.3~
Find the components of the force of 100 lb having as its line of action the diagonal
B of the-rectangular solid as shown.
y
SOLU;rION
A vector in the direction of the force is the vector from A to B*:
7 It
rAB ~ - 61 + 7, + 2k It
(Continued)
16
rr The unit vector parallel to
-61 + 7j + 2k
lAB is (IAB/lrABIJ,
~
or eAB:'
~ ~
i <AB ~
J6 2
+ 72
+ 2 2
~ -0.636i + 0.742;
The reader should note that eAB has unit magnitude and is dimensionless. Now
+ 0.212k
I
writing the force as a vector in the form of its magnitude times the unit vector in'
its direction, we have
F = 1001-0.6361 + 0.742j + 0.212kllb
F = -63.61 + 74.2j + 21.2k Ib
and so the scalar components of F = FJ + F)'; + FJ~.are

~
Fx ~ -63.61b
I
F, ~ 74.21b
F, ~ 21.21b
~:~
" z E x A M p L E 2.4~
A force F has the components shown in the figure lin newtons). Find lal the
magnitude of the force and (hI the angles that the force makes with the XI y, and
z axes.
SOLUTION
300
We have
y
F ~ 2001 + 300j + 600k N
x
'0 that by Equation 12.2),the magnitude of F is
IFI = J2002 + 3002 + 6002 ~ 700 N
Equation (2.3) then enables us to express F as its magnitude multiplied by the unit
vector in its direction:
2001 + 300j
F = 700 ( ----7-00----
+ 600k)
~ 700
(1.
'7 + '7; + '7
i
3~ 6~)
k, N
(Continued)
*To get a vector from point A to point Brwe merely start at A and write down "what
we have to do" to get to Bi thus, in this case, we travel - 61 to get to the origin plus 7j to get
to C, plus 2k to move finally up to B.
17
" ,..,
so that by Equation j2.4j, the angles between F and the coordinate axes are
e, = COS-I G) ~ 73.4 0
ey = COS-I G) ~ 64.6 0
e, ~ COS-I G) = 31.0 0
as shown in the figure.
.,'
E x A M p L E 2.5 l1li.....- I
r,.
i
I
Two forces P and Q with respective magnitudes 100 and 200 N are applied to the l'
upper comer of the crate. The sum of the two forces is a horizontal force to the
right of magnitude 250 N. Find the angles that P and Q each make with their
sum-that is, with the horizontal line through A.
SOLUTION
We 'areseeking the angles () and 4J in the figure. We 'aregiven that
P +Q = 2501N
so that, with
P ~ I OOlcos e1 + sin ejl

and
Q ~ 200lcos </>1- sin </>11
we have, equating like components,
1: 100 cos e + 200 cos </>~ 250 III

j: 100 sin e- 200 sin </>~ a 121
Equation 121gives
sin e = 2 sin </> 131

.,,
so that
cos 0 ~ .) 1 - 4 sin'</> 141
Substituting cos 0 from Equation (41into Equation (II, we obtain
100.)1 - 4 sin'.</> = -200 cos </>+ 250

(Continued)
18
I t"!'
, .l:'
Ii!
or
JI - 4 sin'</> -2 cos </>+ 2.50
Squaring both sides,
1- 4 sin'</> ~ 4 cos'</> ~ lOcos</> + 6.25
- 4(1 - cos' </>1~ 4 cos'</> - 10 cos </>+ 6.25
IOcos</>~9.2S
</> = 22.3
"
I.
i Substituting into Equation 131,
sin 0 = 2 sin </>= 0.759
o~ 49.40
These results are shown in the illustration.
,.i
y E x A M p L E 2.6~
Express the force of Example 2.2, F = - si + 8.66, N, as the sum of one force
making equal angles with x, y, and z and a second force whose direction is in the
xz plane.
"
'I
"j SOLUTION
:
I The first force, FJ J may be expressed as
I
I'
~i
III where e is a unit vector in the preassigned direction.
I:
Iii
To find el, we write a vector in the direction making equal angles with XJ Y,
and z, such as I + J + k, and then divide it by its magnitude
,
i+,+k
e,
JI'+12+I'
1_ 1_ I-
e, = -; + -j +-k
J3 J3 J3
Now the scalar FI may be positive or negative, but, since e1 is a unit vector, the
absolute value of PI is-the magnitude, [Ftl, of Fl.
(Continued)
19
The only thing we know about the second force is that it has no component'
in the y direction, Therefore, without any loss of generality we may express:F2 as
F2 = Phi + F2zk
Now, setting the sum of F1 and F2 equal to F:
FI + F2 = -51 + 8.66j
Therefore
FIIO.5771 + 0.577j + 0.577kl + F2) + F2,k = -51 + 8.66j

.
Equating the respective coefficients of 1, j, and k, we have

i: 0.577 FI + F2x = -5
j: 0.577 FI = 8.66
k: 0.577 FI + F" =0
from which
FI ~ 8.66/0.577 = 15.0 N
F2, = -0.577 FI = -8.66 N
Fh ~ -5 - 0.577 FI ~ -5 - 8.66 ~ -13.7 N

: '
Therefore, the required forces are
FI = 8.661 + 8.66j + 8.66k N
F, ~ -13.71 - 8.66k N
Throughout this book, we have inserted questions for the reader to

think about. The answers are at the end of each chapter. The first
question follows.
As the reader is perhaps aware, the dot product lor scalar product' of
two vectors can be used to find the component of one of them in the
direction of the other. The dot product of two vectors F and Q is defined
by
Q
F .Q = IFIIQI cos 0 = Q .F
where 0 is the angle between F and Q in their plane. Thus if F represents a
force and we wish to find its component Isee Figure 2.5' in the direction of
Figure 2.5 Q, we just dot F with the unit vector ii in the direction of Q, which is
20
'~f
'I:! 2.1 Forces and Lines of Action 21
~
'f~'
"il
"
li = Q/IQL and obtain
F . li = IFIlIj cos 0 12.41
which is the desired projection, Therefore the vector component of F in
the direction of Q is IF . lilli, Note that the line of action of F is unim-
portant in this application'
We now develop a useful expression for the dot product of two
vectors when they are expressed in component form. We have:
F . Q= IF) + F3 + FJI . IQ) + Qy, + QJI

= FxQxlI . II
+ FxQ,lI ." + FxQ,II . kl
+ FyQxli . i I + FyQyIJ ." + FyQ,IJ . kl
+ F,Qxlk . II + F,Qylk . ,I + F,Q,lk . kl
= FxQx + F,Q, + F,Q,
This result follows from Equation 12.4). which gives

i'i=,.,=k'k= 1
and
I,,=,'k=I'k=O
We shall now use the dot product in some examples to find com-
ponents of forces.
,
~Ir-- --------------------------------------""-'
y E x A M p L E
.
!I ,
Given the forces
and
x
Fz ~ I- 2, + 5k N
find the component of F) + F2 in the direction of the line through the points
z
whose rectangular coordinates are (0, 6, 51and (4, 0, 21m.
SOLUTION
F, + Fz ~ 12 + III + 13 - 21, + 1-4 + 51k

~ 31 +, + kN
(Continued)
*We simply mentally move F lalways keeping it parallel to itself) until its tail lies on
the line of vector Q, and then 6nd its component as above.
We next construct the directed line segment (vector whose dimension is length)"
from point A to point B.
rAB = (4 - 011 + (0 - 61) + (2 - 51k = 41 ~ 6) - 3k m
A unit vector eAB in the direction of the line is then

_ r 41 - 6) - 3k I _ _ -
eAB = - AB = -;======= = --(4i~ 6j - 3kl
IrABI ,/(41' + 161' + (31' J6l
= 0.5121 - 0.768) - 0.384k
Therefore the scalar component of F1 + F2 associated with the direction of eAB is

(F, + F,I' eAB = 3(0.5121 + (IJI-0.7681 + I1-0.3841 = 0.384 N
The vector component along the line AB is

0.384 eAB = 0.38410.5121 - 0.768) - 0.384kl
= 0.1971 - 0.295) - 0.147kN

Had we begun the analysis by forming
~ fBA "'-
eBA = - = -CAB
IrBAI
we would have found the scalar component, (F, +' F2J . eBA to be - 0.384 N, I
but the vector component along AB is of course the same, because
E x A M p L E 2.8~
A force, F, has a magnitude of 8 newtons and a line of action through the points A
and B with coordinates (0,6,51 m and (-4,0,21 m, respectively; F is in the
y
/:N
A, (0,6,5) I
I
C. (0,3, -4)
I
I I
/ I
I I
I I
I
B,. I
(-4,0,2)
Dr(4,1,2)
I
x
/ I
I
z
(Continued]
22
. ~-------------.
,I
:'.( direction from A toward B. Find the component of F along the line joining points C
I and D, with coordinates (0, 3, - 41m and (4, I, 21m.
,
.1!11---------~------------------------1
.~ SOLUTION
Let lAB and reD be directed line segments from A and B and from C to D,
respectively. Then
rAB ~ (- 4 - 011 + (0 - 61j + (2 - 5Jk
~-41-6j-3km
rCD~ (4 - 0)1 + (I - 3Jj + 12 - 1-411k
JI.1 ~ 41 - 2j + 6k m
Unit vectors in these directions are
.... lAB 1 ":" ~ ....

eAB ~ - = --(-41 - 6,- 3kl
IrABI J6l .
~ -0.5121 - 0.768j - 0.384k
and
II
.... leD I ~ -:-" ....
'I
l-.! eCD~ -- = --(41 - 2, + 6kl
"1 Irevl JS6
1 il ,
:1 ~ 0.5351 - 0.267) + 0.802k
. I~
I:
I"' Since F is in the direction of lAB' we can express it as the product of its given
II'
~I magnitude and the unit vector in that direction.
I'
~
F = 8eA" = 8(-0.5121 - 0.768j - 0.384kl
= -4.101 - 6.14) - 307kN

,
. , The scalar component of F along the line CD is then given by the scalar (dot)
product of F with the unit vector in the desired direction.
FCD~ F. eCD~ 1-4.101 - 6.14) - 3.07kl'105351 - 0.267j + 0.802k)
= (-410110.535) + 1-61411-0.2671 + 1-3.07110.802)
~ -3.02N
The vector component, FeD' is then
= -3.02[05351 - 0.267) + 0.802kl

~ - 0.1621 + 0.806j - 2.42k N
Thus the projection of F onto the line joining points C and D has a magnitu~e of I
3.02 N with the sense of a directed line from D to C.
23
We can also use the dot product to obtain the angle between a force
and a line, as in the following example. !l
J.;
',I.
1
E x A M p L E
A force has the components (22,7.3, -161 lb. Find the angle between this
force and the line directed from point A at II, 2, 51 inches toward point.R at
(-2,7, -121 inches.
SOLUTION
A vector along the given line is the position vector lAB:
rAB = 1-2 - IIi + (7 - 21) + (-12 - 51k
= -31 + 5) - 17kIn.
The dot product of a unit vector along F with another along the line AB will
yield the cosine at the angle e we are seeking, because
F JAB
-'- = (1/Il/cosO
IFI IrABI
Thus
o = cos _I [(221 + 7.3) -

---'--'--'---. 16k) (-3i + 5) -
-----,-""'--- 17k)] = 6 1.50
28.2 18.0
.
PRO B L EMS / Section 2.1
2.1 Which force has the largest magnitude' 2.5 The orthogonal components of a certain force are
F, = 2i + 3) + 6k N 40 N in the positive x direction

50 N in the positive y direction
F, = 9) N
60 N in the negative z direction
F, = 3i - 7) + .fik N
a. What is the magnitude of the force?
2.2 If FI = 5i +
6) Ib and F, ~ 2i - 3) - 4k Ib, find F, b. What are its direction cosines?
so that the sum of the three forces is zero.
" . ,I
2.6 A force has a magnitude of 100 lb and direction cosi:nes ,
2.3 Prove that the ~sumof the magnitudes of two forces F, 1 = 0.7, m = -0.2, n = ? relative to an xyz frame of
and' F2 is greater than or equal to the magnitude of their reference. Determine the orthogonal components of :the
sum. force.
2.4 Show that if at h, and care nonvanishing scalars, and if 2.7 What is the unit vector in the direction 9f the force
aF, + bF, + cF, = 0, then the three forces FI, F" and F, 2000i - 3000) + 6000k Ihi
have lines of action in parallel planes.
r
.; 2.1 Forces and Lines of Action 25
I
"I
e
2.8 Find a force along = 0.81 - 0.6j and another force 2.24 Resolve the 1000.lb force into parts Inonorthogonal
nonaalto e that add up to theforce F = 51 - tOj + 3k N. componentsl along the directions II and 12 shown in Fig-
~ ure P2.24 .
.~ 2.9 Determine the component of the force in Prob-
lem 2.6 along' a line having the direction cosines I,
III 1-0.3,0.1,0.9487}.
2.10 Obtain the. dot product of the two vectors F ~

101 + 6j - 3k lb and B = 61 -'- 2j ft. 1000 Ib
.;2.11 Given the vectors A = 21 - 4jIb, B = 3j - 48k lb,

and c= sj Idimensionless}, detenaine CIA . C} + B.
I,
2.12 Prove that :IA . BJ' is never greater than i1AI'IIIBI'I.
Figure P2.24
2.13 Find a unit vector in the xy plane that is perpen-

dicular to the force 31 - 4j + 12k N.
2.25 Resolve the force F into a pan perpendicular to AB
2.14 Find the direction cosines of the force F = 301 +
and a part parallel to BG.ISee Figure P2.2S.J
40j - 120k Ib, and use them to detenaine the angles the
, I force makes with the coordinate axes (x, y, zl.
2.15 For what value of Fy are the vectors F1 = 31 +

Fyj + 18k Nand F, ~ 71 - 2j + 3k N orthogonal?
2.16 A force is given by F ~ 21 + 3j + 6k N. Find its c

magnitude and the angles it forms with the coordinate
axes.
2.17 Given the forces F, = 61 + loj + 16k lb, F, =
21 - 3j lb, and F, = a third force in the xy plane at an
inclination of 45 to both the. negative y and positive x B"
axes. The magnitude of F, is 25 lb. Find lal F, + F, + F, Figure P2.25
amllbl F, -,2F, + 3F,.
2.18 If F, = 21 + 4j kN (kilonewton), F, = 1 - 2k kN,

F, = I + j - 7k kN, and F4 ~ 21 - 9j + 3k kN, deter. 2.26 What are the orthogonal components of the 100.N
mine scalars Q, b, and c such that F4 = aFt + bF2 + cF). force shown in Figure P2.26? What are the direction
cosines associated with this force?
2.19 Find the component of the force F = 21 + 4j -
6k lb along the line through the origin making equal acute z
angles with the coordinate axes.
A
2.20 Find the angle between the forces F, ~ 21 +j - ,,
=81 + 9l - 4k N'. ,
k Nand F; ,,
Find the dot products of the following three pairs of , 15m
I
vectors: , I
: 1.<:
2.21 A = 21 - 7j + k Nand B = I + 2j - 3k m. 1115
0):.'/-__ .
2.22 P ~ I - 2j - 17k Idimensionlessl and Q ~ 41 + , 2m Y
sj - k (dimensionlessl. 4m
2.23 M = -0.21 + oAj + k lb and N = 0.11 + 0.8j- x

0.2k, Figure P2~26
2.27 Express the force in Figure 1'2.27Ia) as a magnitude A

times a unit vector and (bj in terms of its components. ~\'O
30.
z 5 in.
A ~
C 5 in. B
I
-t--_
q,L
2t1b
_
3 ft Figure P2.30
/ 2ft Y R
6 ft B
x
Figure P2.27
250N
2.28 The x component of the force P in Figure P2.28 is
140 N to the left. Find P.
,:
-Q
x
Figure P2.31
Figure P2.28
z
2.29 Show that the component of the downward force W
in Figure P2.29 that is:
y
a. perpendicular to the plane is W cos 0 (toward the
plane! and
b. parallel to the plane is W sin e
(down the plane!. You
wiIl use this result many times in the study of Figure P2.32
engineering mechanics.
tively: What is the force F, and what are its direction "
cosines?
2.33 Resolve the 170-lb force, F, in Figure P2.33 into three

parts-one of which is parallel to OQ, another parallel to
OP, and the third parallel to the y axis. Are these the
components of F in these directions?
Figure P2.29 2.34 Rework Example 2.5 if lal the sum of P and Q is to be
again a horizontal force to the right but this time with a
2.30 Resolve the 200-lb force shown in Figure P2.30 into magnitude of 200 lb. Show that there is no solution if this
parts parallel to AB and Be. magnitude is (bl 50 lb or Ic) 400 lb.
2.31 Resolve the 2S0-N force shown in Figure P2.31 into 2.35 Find two 80-lb forces whose sum is the force 401 lb.
parts acting along the members PR and QR.
2.36 Given that F, ~ 1, Fz ~ J. F, = 3i - 41 + Sk, F. =
" x and z components 'of the force F in Fig-
2.32 The 61 - 41 lb, find a vector that is simultaneously in the
ure P2.32 are known to be 100 Nand -30 N, respec- plane of F, and Fz and in the plane of F, and F.
Qo 2.40 The vertical component of each of the six f~rces

in Figure P2.40 is I N. Which force has the smallest
z
magnitude?
12
4
~-
F _0
)1
F,
4 3
1~3
3
I 2
2 ),fF:
2
3
6 F,
Figure P2.33 ~ l~
~'
2.37 Find a.unit vector perpendicular to each of the forces F.
F, = I + 2j + 3k Nand Fz = 81 - 9j - 12k N. . F,
Figure P2.40
2.38 Determine a unit vector in the plane of the forces
I+ jib and j + k lb and simultaneously perpendicular to
theforee I + j + k lb. .
,
2~39The x-component of each of the four forces in Fig-

ure P2.39 is 10 lb. Which of the forces has the largest
magnitude?
F,
, 5/ ~F, 17~ "?yF.

~o. 12 ~o - 24
I ' F3
Figure P2.39
~2.2 Moment of a Force About a Point

The moment of a force is a measure of the tendency of the force to tum a
body to which the force is applied. The moment of a force about a point
lor with respect to a point I is defined to be a vector whose magnitude is
the product of lal the magnitude of the force and (bl the perpendicular
distance between the point and the line of action of the force. The vector
is perpendicular to the plane defined by the point and the line of action of
the force.
. ".. :j. -~-.:
Question 2.2 Is there a. case when the :plane of P and F is nof

defined? If so, whatis the mbineiu? '$' ",
, , ,... '>. ','
, -
~. .
p F The direction is assigned by the "right-hand rule": If the fingers of the

right-hand curve in the direction of the perceived sense of the turning
effect, the thumb will point in the direction of the moment. Thus, if we
have the situation shown in Figure 2.6 and if we let Mp stand for the
moment of F about P, then
Mp = IFldit 12.5)
Figure 2.6
The page is the plane of rand F, and it is a unit vector pointing out of
the page toward the reader because we envision the turning effect to be
counterclockwise in Figure 2.6.
Another way of representing Mp follows from the fact that, if r is the
directed line segment from P to any point on the line of action of F, then
d = Irl sin 0 as shown in Figure 2.6. Thus
Mp = (IFllrl sin Olit
This result can be expressed in terms of another kind of product of
two vectors. The cross lor vector) product of two vectors, such as rand F,
is defined by
r x F = IIrllFI sin Olii

where it is the unit vector determined by the right-hand rule as shown in
Figure 2.7, that is, the right thumb points in the direction of it land hence
r x FI if the fingers are turned from r into F* Thus
Mp = r x F 12.61
Note from Figure 2.7 that we shall depict moment vectors by using
double-headed arrows.
If we express rand F in component form, then
r x F = Ir) + Iyl + I.kl x IF) + F,j + F,kl

Figure 2.7 = IxFxli x I) + l.Fyli x Ii + IxF,I'i x kl
= lyFxll x II + lyFyl1 x Ii + lyF,11 x kl
= I,Fxlk x II + I,Fylk x II + I,F,(k x k) :1'
But by the definition of the cross product
i x i = II iJ sin 0 it = 0
and similarly
IxJ=kxk=O
If we specify i, I, and k to constitute a right-handed system las will be the
case throughout this bookl
*Through the smaller { < 180) of the two angles between rand F in their plane.
i i
1x I = (ilill sin 90 k 0
= k
jxk=1
kx1 =1
and similarly
I x 1 -k
k x I = -1
1 x k = -I
Therefore
r x F = rxFy(kl + rxF,I- II
+ r,.Fxl- kl + ryF,111
+ r,F.(11 + r,Fy(-11
= (ryF, - r,Fyl1 + Ir,Fx - rxF,11
+ (rxFy - ryFxlk
The reader can easily verify that this can be put in the form of a
determinant
1 I k
r x F= rx ry r,
Fx Fy F,
The cross-product method of finding Mp is particularly useful in a
situation in which the plane containing P and the line of action of F is not
a natural reference plane for the problem under investigation. In such a
circumstance the determination of d and Ii by nonvector methods of
analytic geometry becomes a difficult task. Equation {2.61 effectively
reduces this task to a single straightforward operation .
. ,. '~'_:_.;:'.::::".
",,' " ",-:-('-::, ,'it.' , ',' ~".'- '.' , ' '/; ,,-t, ,,'
Questlo.":2.3 Whyddesr x F yield ..lhesameresult for M,,"
regardless 6twhich point onthe line ol""iion of F is intersected by
l . . 'i=' -",'.' .
r.
I"I---~'-
.'"
.---~.~-.""-
",::",,,.,
...
---.,.,...--."'~"""/"""~'-~".-.-
Questio.l2.4 . Does'itmatter
. ," -;,'
whethefMp is comput~d as r x F
' " ,
or F x r1 . . .
. .
We now proceed to prove a very important theorem concerning tne

moments of forces. Suppose that we have the two .forces of Figure 2.8
again acting on the crate at point A, and suppose we are interested in the
"
Figure 2.8
moment about the lower right-hand comer, P, of the sum, F, of FI and F2

Then
Mp = r x F
= r x IFI + F2)
and by the distributive property of the cross product,
, ,
Mp = r x FI + r X F2 = IFdd1nl + IF21d2n2
where dl and d2 are shown in Figure 2.9 and where nl and n2 are directed
into the paper. Thus we see that the moment of F about P is equal to the
sum of the moments of FI and F2 about P. By extension we can say in
general that for any number of forces acting at a common point A,
Mp = r X F
= r X (FI + F2 + ... + F.)

(2.7)
= r x FI + r X F2 + ... + r x F.
Mp = IFlldlnl + IF21d2n2 + ... + IF.ld.n.
Therefore the moment about a point P of the sum of n forces acting at a
point A is the sum of the moments of the separate forces (more briefly,
"the moment of the sum is the sum of the moments"). This statement,
which perhaps seems obvious, is often known as Varignon's Theorem. It
Figure 2.9
is of practical value especially when we can decompose a force like F into

parts whose perpendicular distances from P are easily determined .
. , ':,' . ,". . _"., ".1' ." .

Que~tion 2.5 Does the development of Equation (2.71 n:qUlTe
-.,- .
tlpt F),F2,. : ., F:allJie in the s~me plane?' .
'.,.~'.. ,.'tj:'L>:"'-""Y ,'8,:'\)";'/',- ,':,".(. ';j::',~,,<, .~t
f-'i:;'
~. ~~
In the example to follow, we will use each of the above approaches

(Equations 12.5), 12.61, and 12.71J to calculate the moment of a force about
a point.
y E x A M p L E 2.10~
B(0,12) Calculate the moment of the lO-N force with respect to point 0, the origin of the
,.,
rectangular coordinate system shown. Use the approaches suggested by Equa-
tions 12.51, 12.61. and 12.71.
12m "~ION
,,
,,
" C(i6, 0)
o 16m
SOLUTION
y To use Equation 12.51, we need the perpendicular distance d between 0 and the
line of action of the force. It is calculated below to be 9.6 m using the similar
(0,12) (shadedI triangles.
16 5 48
- ~- = d = -.= 9.6 m
d 3 5
Therefore, Equation (2.51 yields
(16,0)
Ma = IFldil = (IOIl9.611-kl = -96k N . m or 96 <=> N .m
I
x We emphasize again that this approach is of little value in three-dimensional

situations in which the perpendicular distance d is not easily calculated.
To use Equation 12.61, we note that the force is F ~ 81 - 6J N and the
directed line segment from a to point A on the line of action of F is rOA =
41 + 9J m. So, by Equation (2.61.
Ma = faA X F = (41 + 9JI X 181 - 6il
= 1411-6111 X JI + (911811JX II
=_-24k + 72(-kl = -96kN' m (as abovel
(Continued)
'. -
y
In arriving at this result, we have recalled that the cross-product of a vector
with itself is zero, i.e.,
A 8N ,
I xI x ) k x k ~ o.
I
=) =
~'""" ','
6N ______" ~rI To use Equation (2.7),we shall decompose the fotce F into the 8-N and 6-N fortes
9m at A as shown in the figure. We then revert to ~he "force times perpendicular.
distance" definition to calculate separately the moments of these component
1 1_4m_1 x
forces with respect to 0 . For the 8-N force we have
M~ = 8(911-kl = -72kN'
and for the 6-N force we have

m
M o = 6(411-k) ~ -24k N . m
Therefore the sum is Mo = - 96k N . m, the same re'sult we obtained in the 6!"st
I
two parts of the answer. Note how the unit vector is attached using the right-hand
!
: o o
rule. Also, it is important to observe the correspondence of M and M with the
two terms in the cross-product calculation above. We have obtained the result
without the formality of taking the cross product.
Before leaving this example, note that because point B is also on the line of
y action of F, we could alternatively compute Mo by using rOB instead of rOA.
Mo = rOB X F ~ 12) x (81 - 6)1

iJ 8N
"" -: = 12(811)x II
) 6N',
,
I
----_':>..1" = 961-kl = -96kN' m
12m , "" The equivalent informal calculation follows froin decomposing F into 8-N
""
j ""
""
and 6-N components with lines of action intersecting at B. In this case the 6-N
force produces no moment about 0 since its l~ne of action passes through 0, and
"- C
x the 8-N force produces a moment of 8(1211-k) so that Ifor the fourth time'l
Mo = 0 + 1-96kl = -96kN' m
This illustrates the fact that it miuters not where F is decomposed on its line of
action in order to obtain a moment. We suggest that the reader carry out the
computation of Mo by using the fact that C is also on the line of action of F. The
result should of course be the same, - 96k N . m.
- ,
"
,
.,"
In the following example, the plane of rand F is skewed with respect

to the xy, yz, and xz planes, and we shall use the cross product to
advantage since finding the value of d needed in Equation 12.51would
actually require the same vector operation, the cross product.
"'This is the practical importance of Varignon's Theorem.
32
-:C.ll,. 'r 'I~----~~~~""------------ "" _
I ~r
'Jfr-----------------....
!~
Ii! E x AMP L E
2
111111l......-
-........
.![1,
A position vector from point P to point Q on the line of action of a force F is given
J:!I:
by
i~il
"II'
The force F is
l'f
"I F = I - 2J + 51<Ib
Find the moment of F about point P.
1:1
ilt----------------S-O-L-U-Y-.-O-N--------------------t
,'il Mp ~ rpQ x F = (21 + 3J - 41<) x (I - 2J + 51<)

~I
'I ~ 2(1111 x II + 21-2111 x JI + 2(5111 xl<I + 3(II1J x I)
,I + 31-211J x J) + 31511J xl<I + (-4111111<x II
~il + 1-411-2111< x JI + (-4115111<x 1<1
i'i ~ (21101+ 1-4111<1+ 11011-11 + (311-1<1 + 1-6110)
iii + (151111+ (-4I1JI + 8[-11 + (-201101
l;il ~ ~ ~
t," = 7i - 14j - 7k Ib,ft
I Alternatively, we could use the determinant method of computing the cross
"I product: '
,
i j I<
Mp = IpQ X F = 2 3 -4
1 -2 5
=1
I-~-:1 -J
I~-:1 +1< :1.1 2 -~I
= 1(15 - 8) - J(IO + 41 + 1- 4 - 31
= 71 - 14J - 71<lMt las beiOtel
E X A M P L E 2. 12 .........
A force, F = 31 - 5} + k lb, has a line of action through point A with co-
ordinates 10, 3, 4) ft. (aJFind the moment of F about point B whose coordinates
are (4, 1,21 ft, (bl Find the distance from point B to the line of action of F,
(Continued)
33
y
SOLUTION
(al The moment about B is given by
and
fBA ~ 10 - 411 + 13 - Ilj + 14 - 2jk
~-4I+2j+2kft
Thus l:
I
MB ~ (-41 + 2j + 2kl x (31 - 5j + kl
~ (-411-5Ik + (-411111-Ji + 1211311-kl + 21111
+ 2131j + 21-511-11
= 121 + lOj + 14k Ib-It

, !
Ibl The distance from B to the line of action of F is given by
d = IMBI
IFI
IMBI = ,)1121' + IIOJ' + 1141'
= v'44O = 21.0 Ib-ft
IFI =J131' + lSI' + III'
~ J35 = 5921b
Therefore
21.0 -
d ~ -- = 3.55 ft
5.92
34
2.41 A force F with magnitude 1000 Ib is exerted on the 2.45 In Figure P2.45, find the moment of the 50-Ib force
tooth of the gear shown in Figure P2.4t by a tooth of about point P having the coordinates lx, y, zl = 12, 3, 51ft.
another gear that is not shown. The force makes a 20 angle
with the normal to the radius drawn to the tooth from
point 0, as shown in the small figure. Find the moment of F
about O.
2.42 Determine the moment of the 60-1b force in Fig-

ure P2.42 with respect to corner C using
a. i x F;
b. Varignon's Theorem after resolving the force atA into
its components.
2.43 Find the moment about point A due to the applied

forces. ISee Figure P2.43.J
2.44 Find Isee Figure P2.441:

a. The sum of the forces
b. ,The sum of their moments about point B.
Figure P2.42 Figure P2.41
Figure P2.44
y
2{13 N B
x
'-../ ,
a.2m
0.3 m
50tb y
x
50lb
z
340tb
Figure P2.45
IOlt---1-6ft--
Figure P2.43 x
2.46 Find the moment of the weight Wabout the base A of 2.48 The force of 140 Ib acts at A with a line of action
the mast in Figure P2.46 if the intersection of the deck directed toward B. 15ee Figure PZAB,I Find the moment of
plane Ixyl with the plane of the, mast, boom, and cable the force about a and the shortest distance from 0 to the
forms angles with x and yof 30 and 60, respectively. The line of action of the force.
length of the boom is 30 'It.
c z
'i
9 It i I
I,I 1 i
,
I
I
, 2 It
~It
x 31t~
~B
Figure P2.48
y
1
Figure P2.46
2.49 Find the moment about the origin due to the force
1
1~
1;,
'ii
F = - 30i + 40k lb, which acts at the point lx, y, zl = \,
.f
(ZO, 10, 01 ft.
~
'~tl
i
2.50 A force of magnitude P Ib has a line of action through
~i
I
2.47 ]0 raising the heavy mast 'm in Figure P2.47, the I
AI and is to act on the rod, as shown. Find in Figure P2.50 1
tension T in the cable is supplying a moment about a of
magnitude 5000 N . ffi. Find the tension in the cable.
e
the angle for which the moment of the force about B is a ':1'
I
maximum.
A
I--Sft-j
c
'B
A
Figure P2.47
Figure P2.50
Asterisks identify the more difficult problems.
I I
2.3 Moment of a Force About a Line 37
~2.3 Moment 0' a Force About a Line

In statics we are often interested in knowing the moment of a force about
a line rather than about a point. As suggested by Figure 2. 10, we shall
define the moment of a force F about a line I to be the projection along I
of the moment of F about any point P lying on I. The moment M, is
thus defined to be
M, = IMp' iilii 12.81
f or
I
I
M, = IIr x Fj . iilii
where ii is the unit vector in the direction of I.
(2.91
r
I; Mp= r X F
, .
j r
Ii
I.
i.
!
.. Figure 2.10
Question.2.6 .How would the caltuldted M, be different if-Ii

'. had been chosen:,~sthe !ef~rence u~it vector inst~ad'. ofiiin
Equation 2.91 . .,., .. ,
p '~.'~
Our definition of M,lEquation 2.81 suggests that the same value is

obtained regardless of the location of P on the line I. In fact we can prove,
if A and B are points on Iisee Figure 2. I II, that
I 1MB' iilii = 1M. iijii

To do this, we use the fact that if Q is any point on the line of action of F,
oj then
But
Figure 2.11
~
38 Chapter 2 Forces and Moments ,1
l'
'j;
.J'
so that ~
'.'1'
MA = rAB X F + rBQ x F .f
Thus
,,
IMA iilii = [(rAB X FI . iiJii + [(rBQX FI . iiJii
i,~.
But rAB X F is perpendicular to I, that is, to ii, so that
,
.'
,
(MA iilii = 0 + [(rBQ x FI . iilii .'
.' ,''l.
Ii':
(2.101 ,~
1
(MA iilii = (MB iilii ~ J
.;'
'~
and thus M, is independent of the point on I which is chosen for the
computation.
We now provide a physical interpretation of M, as the turning effect,
about I, of the pan of F that is perpendicular to t. To do that we first
Line t
identify, as in Figure 2.12, the plane defined by the line of action of F and
-:---
u
p any line intersecting it and parallel to t. .Let d be the distance between
Figure 2.12 this pJane and I, as shown in Figure 2.12.
i'kxt we construct a plane perpendicular to t. We shall let P be its
intersection with I and Q its intersection with the line of action oLF.
Furthermore, at Q we decompose F into components FII and F~,
respectively parallel and perpendicular to I as shown.
Taking the moment of F about point p, we obtain
Mp = rpQ x F = rpQ x (FII + F~I

(2.111
= rpQ X FII + rpQ X F~
Our last step is to substitute Mp from Equation 12.111into Equation 12:81

for M,:
M, = IMp' iilii
12.12)
= IlrpQ X FII + rpQ x F~I . iilii
Because rpQ x FII is perpendicular to FII and thus also to I and ii, the
dot product IrpQ x Fill' ii is zero. This means that, as expected, the
component of F parallel to line I produces no moment about t.
Since rpQ and F~ are each perpendicular to I, then rpQ x F~ is in the
direction of I, or, in other words, proportional to ii. Referring to Fig-
ure 2.13, we see that
(2.131
Finally, the moment M, of a force F about a line I can be summa-

p rized by Figure 2.14. Only the component F~ of F that is normal to I
Figure 2.13 View along tlii is into the
has a turning. effect about t. The moment M, has for its magnitude the
paper). product of I F~ I and the distance d between F~ and t. The direction of M,
2.3 Moment of a Force About a Line 39
Line of action of F ~
Figure 2.14
is given by the right thumb when the fingers of the right hand curl
about f in the direction of the turning effect of FL about I.
, .', ",1<",\.('. .' "/-J0.:f,." 'il',N':,:, ',.,' ::~;~,->,,?.-_~:

Quest;,," 2.7 . CoUid the niagDit\ide .Of,the'D.{oment"tif a force "~
a
about line ever be greater than the magi;itudeofthe marnell!' of ..
the force ",bouta~YPoint on th~}ihe? '::., " .
We are now ready for some examples of the computation of mo-

ments about lines,
E x A M p L E 2.13~
y Referring to Example 2,8, find the moment of the 8-newton force about the
J line CD,
I
I
Ct(O,3, -4)
SOLUTION
I
I To obtain Mev we need the moment with respect to some point on the line such
I
J as C or D, Using C,
I
Dr(4, 1,1) x Me = ICA X F
J
I ~ 13j + 9kl X 1-410i - 6,14j - 3,07kl
I
~ 46, Ii -: 36,9j + 12.3k N . m
(Continued)
and, since CCD= 0.535i - 0.267T + 0.8Olk, we obtain,
MCD = (Me' CCVleCD
= 1146.1110.5351+ 1-36.911-0.2671 + 112.3110.802JlccD

~ 44.4cCD N . m
The same result may be obtained by first computing Mv instead of Me:
Mn = rnA. X F
~ 1-41 + 5) + 3kl X (-4.101 - 6.14) -3.07kl
= 3.071 - 24.6T + 45.1k N . m
so dlat
= 113.07110.5351+ 1-24.611-0.2671 + (45.1110.802JlccD
= 44.4cCD N . m- las beforel
Th~reader may wish to reproduce this result for practice using
or lor bothl
E x A M p L E
At the instant shown in the figure, the wrench lies in a horizontal (xyj plane. Two
20-1b forces are applied to a ratchet wrench, down at A and up at B, in an effort to
loosen the bolt IJ. Find the sum of the moments of the two forces about the axis lxj
of the bolt.
SOLUTION
For the force at A
t = {[(
8 +5~
,fi i
8 - 5 ~)
+ ,fi j x
~]
1- 20kl
~}~
.i i
~ 260 ~ 60~) ~]~

[( -1--1 11
,fi ,fi
-60~
~ G i Ib-in.
. ...;2
(Continued)
40
:,
I
And for the force at B
~
Ii.
.Il
iI 8 - 8 _) - ] _}_
il = {[( i + .j2
.j2 j x 120k) i i
~
; :1
-160~
= [( --
.j2.j2
J + -160~)
1
~J~
1 1 = --
160~
.j2
'.
1 Ib-m .
The net effect of the two forces toward loosening the holt is then
160 - 60 _ _
M. = .j2 i = 70.7i Ib-in.
The two noncollinear forces in this example, being equal in magnitude hut
opposite in direction, fonn what is called a couple.;.We shall study the properties
of a couple in the next section of this chapter.
In finding the moment of a force F about a point P, the formal use of

the cross product is not always necessary. To see an alternative approach
that uses what we have learned about moments with respect to lines, we
express the moment, Mp, of F about P in component form. Let Q again be
y
some point on the line of action of F as shown in Figure 2. 15, and note
F,
that we have positioned the axes x, y, and z to intersect at P. Expressing
both TpQ and F in component form as
rpQ = 1) + r,1 + lzk

F,
F = F) + Fy) + F,k
x
then
r,
Mp = TpQ X F
r,
= Ir.i + r3 + r,k) x IF) + Fy) + F,kl (2.141
= (ryF. - r,Fyli + (r,F. - r.F,I) + (i.Fy - ryF.lk

Since the x component of this vector is Mp i, then from the
foregoing analysis and discussion we recognize IryF, - r,Fyli as the
moment of F about the x axis through P. Similarly, the other components
of Mp are the moments of F about the y and z axes. The term ryF,l is
clearly the moment of F,k about the x axis since ry lor, more precisely, i!s
magnitudel is the distance from the x axis to the line of action of F,k.
Likewise, -r,Fyi is the moment of Fy) about the x axis. Obviously the
, force F) produces no moment about the x axis, since its line of action is
.ij'
H parallel to this axis.

'j.
41
;."1
t.L.-
Thus, we see from Equation 12.141 that the moment about a point
may be constructed by finding the moments about three mutually
perpendicular axes through the point, and each of these may be computed
by decomposing the force into components parallel to the axes and
summing the moments of the individual components about these axes.
The above process allows us to utilize the fundamental concept of
"magnitude' of force times perpendicular distance," and hence even in
three dimensions we can avoid, if we wish, the formal Ivector productl
calculation. When we do this we must, of course, attach the correct unit ,
"
j
vector (including the proper sign) with the help of the right-hand rule. We !:
are not necessarily advocating the evasion of vector products here, but
.~
rather we are calling attention to the more physical interpretation that
can be given to the terms in Equation 12.141. The following example
illustrates these ideas.
E x A M p L E 2.15~
find the moment of the force F in the figure about point 0, using the ideas!
expressed by Equation 12.14). ,,'
SOLUTION
, The force F has the components
-4
F ~ --;======260 = -SO Ib
x .j3'+4'+12'
Yo F, = 2.
13
260 ~ 60 Ib
12
F, = - 260 = 240 Ib
13
y
We shall obtain MQ by adding the separate moments of the components of F at A
about axes (xQ' YQ' zQ) through Q.
x The component F3, or - 801 lb, of F at A produces moments about
lines through Q parallel to Y and to z. These are SO(IOllb-ft about axis zQ :pd
B011211b-ftabout YQ' as shown in the figure. Thus the contribution of Fxi to
MQ is 960, - SOOkIb-ft. The reader should note how the unit vector is attached
by using the right-hand rule. If the fingers curl in the direction of the turning
effect about an axis through Q, the thumb will aim in the dir~ction of the mo-
ment and the unit vector in this direction is then written down.
(Continued)
I
I
I
II
!
Q
~
Q -~
9601b-ft Yo
~
A
L~q=y~
V- lOft
12ft
BOlb
12ft
!
BOO Ib-ft
Xo
10 ft
A
60lb
Next, the component FyJ, or 6~jlb, of F at A produces a moment about xQ but

not about YQ or zQ'
~_",::"ci-u-~~---s-,~-i~": h:.;.... -"9", --------:;.~

n2.a--}N., :.oo-tyQ..o":' r-z -? .....,--- ....1
Q
[_ -'-, ,. ."-' at \,' t ..~,.. .
The contribution is seen in the figure to be 6011211b-ft about axis xQ Therefore,

the contribution of Fy; to MQ is noi l~-ft. _
Finally, the third component F,k, or 240k lb, of F at A also produces a
moment about just one of the axes IXQJ YQ' zQJthrough point Q, and this axis is
again xQ _ The moment contribution is seen in the figure to be 240( 10) lb-ft about
xQ, and so F,k adds - 2400i lb.ft to MQ _ The total moment of F about Q is then
MQ ~ (960; - SOOk) + (noil + (-2400illb.ft
~ - 16Soi + 960; - SOOk lb.ft
The reader is encouraged to check this answer by finding and adding the moments
about Q of F Fy' and Fz placed at B instead of A and also by computing either
X1
QA x For IQB X F. Comparing the two approaches, you will probably observe
f
some loss ?f physical feeling for the moment when using the cross product.
43
44 Chapter 2 Forces and Momenls
PRO B L EMS I Section 2.3
.2.51 Find lin Figure P2.511: 2.53 In Figure P2,53 find the moment of the two forces
.r !. . 1
~.The sum of theforces about:

b. The sum of their moments about point Q a. The point lx, y, z) = II, 2, 3) ft
c. The moment of the forces about the y axis Ithrough Q, b. The line defined by x ~ 1 ft and z = 3 ft.
so use part b!).
t2 ft
8M Ib
64M Ib 'J
x
Figure P2.53 !
x
Figure P2.51
2.54 All coordinates in Figure P2.54 are given in inches.
Find the moment of the 340-lb force with respect to:
a. Point A
2.52 A bent bar is rigidly attached to a wall at the point
b. LineAR
10,0,01: A force with magnitude IFI = 71b acts at its free
end with a line of action passing through the origin, as Also find:
shown i'1 Figure P2.52. Find: c. The perpendicular dist.1nce from A to -the line of
a. The moment ofF about point':P action of the force.
b. The moment about the line I, passing through P with
a slope of 5/12 in the yz plane as shown.
y
\
" (3, 8, 0)
F
3401b
----
_ A(O,8,9)
z ---..- )
x
\
I :~ \
I '(15,0,9)
I \
I z
I 61t~ \
I Figure P2.54
2 It
..J~ ~
" / y
/' 3ft 2.55 Find the moment of the force in Problem 2.49 about
<?,; the line that passes through pointsy = 12 ft on the y axis
Figure P2.52 and z = 5 ft on the z axis.
-- 2.3 Moment of:a Force About a Line 45
'2.56 Find the moment of the fprce in Figure P2.56 about 2.59 Find the moment of the 21-lb force F in Figure P2.59
point C. Then find the' moment about the line that passes about line AB by laJusing IrA~ x FI . UA8' and (bl resolving
through C and: F into its components at P and finding the moments of each
about the line with the help: of the right-hand rule.
a. ,"Point A
b.Point B 2.60 Find the moment of the force in Figure P2.60 with
c.~Point D. respect to:
'J
2.57 In Figure P2.57 determine the moment of the 2BO-lb a. Line Be
force F with respect to: b. Point A
c. Line BA .
<Point A
. b;",Line OA 2.61 Find lin Figure P2.6Ij:
c'-'Point B
a. The direction cosines associated with the 39.lb force
d. Line BR.
b. The 39.1b force expressed in terms of the unit vectors
.2.58 A particle located at riJp'= -I + 3j - Bk m is A '" ,.. "<-
i, j, and k
acted upon by the two.forces
i . c. The moment of the 39-lh force about point A
F,=-2I+3;-kN and F,=71+;-kN d. The moment of the 39-lb force about a line from A
taB
. Find' the moment of these forces about the z axis. e. The moment of the 39-lb force about a line from A
taD.
z
z
3ft B P
3ft
4m
y
'D 6ft
x
z
.x Figure P2.59
B 4m
B Y
A I
Flgu~e ,P2.56 I
I
z Figure P2.60 I
h---
C // a y
8 in.:; A 5 in. x
z
I 6 in. 12ft ,391b

B
9 in .
a y
\ 10 in.
280%\
x
7 in.
'/- l3in.
/'/ x
R
Figure ;P2.57 Figure P2.61
I
I
46 Chapter 2 Forces and Mo'ments .I
"
.~
,
~ ,
2.62 F~ndthe moment of the 2000;-Nforce in Figure P2.62 2.64 Recompute the moment MCD in Example 2.13, using' ~, 'i
oJ
[alabout the otigin 0, and (bl about the diagonal line AB. both suggestions at the end of that example. ), ,
<
:1 \
2.63 The force F in Figure P2.63:acts along the line CA 2.65 In Example 2.15, find the moment of F aboudine PQ f ~
'.~ .and:hasa magnitude of 520 N. using: " I .[1'
the unit vector ii that ha" 5 the direction CA'~

a. W,.:rite a. [lrpA x FI . kjk l c'
-useit to form the vector force F. b. [(rPB x FI . kJk (" !;!

i~
b. Calculate the .moments about B of the three compo- c. [(rQA x FI . ~]~ "Ie
n~nts of F acting at C by multiplying these forces by d. [(rQB x FI . klk.
,(.I
their perpendicular distances :from B. Assign the cor- I '>r
The answer should each time be - 800k lb-ft, which was J,
H~'ctunit vector to each using:the,
right-hand rule and the z component of MQ in Example 2.1 5. -t
add to form MB.
c. Calculate the moment of F ab6ut Busing rBC x F, and 2.66 Find the moment of the 200-N force F about the line
GE in Figure P2.66.
1l'
, "
'OJ.
,:"
compare it with MB from part b. J,

d. Calculate the moment of F ab6ut Busing lBA. x F, and
2.67 Determine the moment of'the 180-lb force in Fig- I,
note that the result is still the same because A also lies ~
on the line of action: of F. ure P2.67 about the line AG.
I
*: ;!
,; "1,
.~
B ,
E
z
4bcm
50-em
F
A
y 13m
x
Figure P2.62
c
Figure P2.66
6ft
x
2.4 The Couple 47'
2.68 The force F of magnitude 10 lb in Figure P2.68 acts z

through P in the direction of the unit vector F = 0.8i +e
0.6J. Determine: A
a. The moment of F about the origin a Figure P2.69 3ft
b. The moment of F about the z axis
0
c. The direction cosines of the line through 0 about
which F has the largest moment, and the value of this 6ft
", B
2ft Y
moment. x IFI ~ 21lb
2.70 Find the moment of the force in Figure P2.70 about

z
P(5, 5, 2) ft a. the point Aj
b. the line defined by
~ F x-I y-I 2-0
o --=
2
~--
2 -4
y
x
Figure P2.68
2.69 Find the moment of the 21.1bforce in Figure P2.69

about the origin by lal using lOA x F, (bl using lOB X F, and y
Ic) resolving F into its components at B and finding the
moment of each using the right-hand rule.
x
Figure P2.70
~2.4 The Couple

A pair of forces, equal in magnitude hut having opposite directions and'
different (hut, of course, parallel I lines of action, constitutes a couple~
The pair of forces exerts no net thrust on a hody, hut there is a turning'
effect. Hence the moment of the couple ahout a point is of great
importance. Referring to Figure 2.16, we let A and Rhe points on the lines
of action of a couple of forces -F and F, respectively~ By the moment of
the couple we mean the sum of the moments of the two forces. Thus the
Figure 2.16
48 Chapter2 Forces and MO~
i
:1 'l.
I
,
~
.[
',I
<,,
i
>
i i~:
Figure 2.17
I ;Ii
moment Mp about point P is
Mp = rPB X F + rpA x I-FI I
'1
= IrpB - rpAI x F = rAB X F
We see from Equation 12.151that it makes no difference where A and Blie

12.15)
}
.~
,
on the respective lines of action, since the cross product produces a vector n ,- J
whose magnitude is that of F multiplied by the distance between the lines
of action of the two forces. Moreover, recalling the direction associated :,
.~
":1'; . ,
-~:1
with the cross product, we see that Mp is perpendicular to the plane

defined by the lines of action of the two forces and in the diiection with
,~
~. .1: ,,
which we would associate, by the right-hand rule, the sense of turning of' '1
the two forces. In Figure 2.17 the fingers show the turning effect of F and' ~1
.1
- F in their plane while the thumb points in the direction of the laxis of ." \1
turning of the) couple. i"
In Equation 12.151,all reference to point P has been lost; therefore, ~',
~ "'1!
Mp does not depend in any way upon the location of point P. Thus, the I '1
moment of a couple about every point is the same. Consequently, the ;1.
moment of each of the three couples depicted in Figure 2.18 is 20 N . m :~.

\
counterclockwise or, in vector terms, directed out of the page.
~t
I
SN
:~
!- 1 Y
/( 4N
ION ,~.
4m
4N ~
ION
SN
Figure 2.18
The next three examples illustrate how to obtain the moment of a

couple.
!i
E x A M p L E
A mechanic applies two forces, each one of magnitude 20 lb, as 'shown, to ,3 lug
wrench in the process of changing a tire. Find the moment of the couple
comprised of the equal-magnitude, oppositely directed forces.
y
IFI- 201b
SOLUTION
The moment of the couple is calculated as the sum of the moments of F and -F
about any point. Let us .use point Q (at the mechanic's left handl:
C = roo x (-FI + rop x F
lb y ~ 0 + lsi x 20,
21_ 1 ) T: ~ 300k lb-in.
Alternatively, using point 0,

I_----I~in.--x---~I C ~ -7.si x (-20Ji + 7.si x 20,
~ + lsOk + ls0k
~. 300k Ib-in. (as beforeJ
Regardless of the point chosen, C, as we have proved, always will be the same
vector. We could also simply multiply either force times the perpendicular dis.
tance between them, obtaining:
C ~ 20l1sIk = 300k Ib-in.
where we attach the unit vector k in accordance with the direction in which the
forces are perceived to tum about an axis normal to their plane.
The reader should note that the two 20.lb forces in Example 2.14 in the last
section also formed a couple. In that example, however jdue to the 45 anglel,
only pan of the couple was useful in loosening the bolt.
49
E x A M p L E 2.17~
The two forces shown have magnitudes of 50 N and are oppositely directed. Find
the moment of the couple that they constitute.
A y
SOLUTION
As in the previous example, we compute the moment of the couple by adding the
moments of the two forces. We can add them about any point, and we choose the
origin:
c ~r OA x F + rOB x 1- FJ
= (lOA - lOBI x F
_ _ _
~ 14; - 12i + 2; II x 50
(-41 + 3k)
5
~ 1-21 + 21J x 501-0.B, + 0.6kl

~ 5011.21 + 1.2, + 1.6kJ
~ 601 + 60, + BOk N . m
As a check, let us form the moment of the couple, C, by adding the moments
of F and -F about A:
C = fAA X F + JAB X I-F)
~ 0
_ -
+ 12i - 2j J x 50
(4 - 3k)
5
= ',olBk + 6j + 0 + 611
~ 601 + 60, + BOk N . m las before)
50
I i
J
E x A M p L E 2.18~
One of the two forces that constitute a couple is F = 3i - 4, + Sk lb, having a
,l line of action that passes through the point A at jO, 6, 5) ft. The other force has a
line of action that passes through point B at j-4, 0, 2) ft. Find the moment of the
couple and the distance between the lines of action of the forces.
SOLUTION
:~;
The moment, C, of the couple is
'"
,
C = fBA. X F
because A is on the line of action of F and B is on t.he line of action of the com-
panion force - F. The position vector fBA. is computed as
r8A ~ 10 - 1-4111 + (6 - 011 + 15 - 21k

~ 41 + 61 + 3k ft
Therefore
c ~ 141 + 61 + 3kl x 131 - 41 + Ski

~ 4(-4Ik + 41511-11 + 6(311-kl + 61511 + 3(311 + 31-411-1J
= 421 - III - 34k lb-ft
The distance between the lines of action is
l
'. d ~ is
IFI
,)(4212 + (1112 + (3412
,)1312 + (4J2 + 15)2
= 7.80 ft
In the remainder of Chapter 2, we shall extend our study to include

systems of forces and couples, in preparation for solving equilibrium
problems in Chapters 3, 4, and 5. We shall first present the equations
of equilibrium of a body, which will help us both motivationally' and
practically. Motivationally, the equilibrium equations show the im-
portance of mastering force and moment relationships. Practically, the
equilibrium equations will be used in our definition of equipollent force
systems. Only after these ideas are mastered will we be fully prepared to
solve some problems involving the equilibrium of bodies.
51
52 Chapter 2 Forces and 'Moments
. "Write the vector expressions Jor the moments of the 2.75 Friction is causing a set of uniformly distributed
..rL couples
.in the following three problems (the forces are in tangential forces of intensity 300 Ib/in. to act on the
the planes labeled in Figutes P2. 71-P2. 731. circular ring of radius 16 in. shown in Figure P2.75.
Determine the moment of these forces about the center, q
2.71 2.72 of the ring. What is the moment about A?
z 2.76 Determine the moment of the couple in Figure P2.76

40N 40N
aboutlaJ point 0, IbJpoint A, (clthe y axis, and IdJthe line in
the yz plane defined by z = 4 It.
y 2.77 Find the moment of the couple .bout line AB in
~ BOOlb Figure P2. 77. The lines of action of the forces are both in
the yz plane.
x
/3~
BOOIb
Figure P2.71
Figure P2.72
2.73 Figure P2.75 .A
211
y
Figure P2.76
x
Figure P2.73
2.74 The radius of each of the two pulleys in Figute P2. 74

x
is 1 ft. Determine the resultant moment of the two pulley Each force has magnitude 265 Ib
tension forces about (al point A and (hI any other point.
z
60j + BOk Ib
Figure P2.77
"'~ -6Oj - BOk Ib

(4, -1,2) It
-
y
--.4- ~ __ -!!:..3,0)ft
3ft 2ft
.,/ B--
Figure P2.74 x
"'--~~j.
2.4 The Couple 53
2.78 Write the moment of the couple formed by the two 2.82
3D-Ibforces shown in Figure Pl. 78. What is the moment of
the couple ahout the point lx, y, z) = ii, 5, - 81' Each force = 37 N
z
A
3in.
o
y
30Ib
8 in. B
Pentagon, side 2 m
Figure P2.82
x 6 in.
30 Ib Figure P2.78
2.83
7 in.
Hexagon, side 2 ft
2.79 Show that the direction of the couple result of
Example 2.17 is correct by obtaining a unit vector normal
to the plane ADE and comparing it with the unit vector
A
ole.
2.80 After the couple was defined and analyzed, it was

found to have (1' the same mo~ent about every point, and
12) no net thrust (or lorce). Show that the set 01 three Each farce = Sib
forces shown in Figure P2.80 possesses these same two
Figure P2.83
propenies.
2.84 Sixteen forces of 141b each at 22.5 spacing on a 6-ft

diameter circle. See Figure P2.84.
Figure P2.80
In each of the following five problems, show that the

system of forces has no net thrust (or forcel. In Section 2.5
we shall see that whenever this happens, the moment of
the forces about all points is the same. Find the moment
about A and B in each problem and observe that they are
equal.
2.81
B Figure P2.84
BIb
61b
Bib
I
3ft
A
61b j 2.85 The conditions are the same as the preceding prob-
lem, except the loading is distributed around the circle
I 7ft Figure P2.81 with a constant intensity of 141b/ft.
1".,
2.86 ForceF in FigureP2.86 has magnitude F ~ ISlb, and 2.87 The two 260-N forceslie in the inclined plane AEDC
j
I
couple M has magnitude 4J4i lb-in. and is normal to
plane ACD. Find the moment of the system of F and M
shown in Figure P2.87. Find the moment of the couple,
which they constitute, about the indicated line I in the
j
..~
with respect to point D. Then determine the moment of
the,system about line CD.
xy plane.
!
:
i,,
z E
j
A
.I
1"
x
~2.5 Laws of Equilibrium: Relationship of

Sums of Moments
The purposes of this brief section are la) to provide motivation for the
topics covered in the remainder of the chapter, and Iblto establish a useful
relationship having to do with the moments that a system of forces
produce about different points in space. In particular, we need to clearly
identify those characteristics of a force system that are essential to the
analysis of problems in statics. In our view, the easiest way to do this isby
displaying the equations of equilibrium.
When none of the particles making up a body is accelerating relative
to an inertial frame of reference, Euler's laws ISection 1.31 are reduced
to the statements II I that the sum of the external forces vanishes, and
12)that the sum of their moments about any point also vanishes_ A body
that is stationary in an inertial frame clearly falls into this category.
Letting the uppercase Greek letter sigma I:EI indicate the process of
summation, the two laws, called the equilibrium equations, are written
symbolically as
:EF=O 12_16)
:EMp = 0 12.17)
where P denotes the point with respect to which the moments .are
2.5 Laws of Equilibrium: Relationship of Sums of Moments 55
calculated.' It is important for the reader to observe that the only

characteristics of a force that enter into these equations are (a)the vector
describing the force, and (bl the line of action of the force. Note that the
specific point of application (on the line of action I is not important ..
1.:.-....--Q-.-\'e-s-t-io-il-.-2.-1-0--W-h-Y-n-;-~-? --.-,;-.:-!-(~-'-H"JI-.-'----- ..-.:-..-,-.-."I

We shall not actually use the equilibrium Equations (2.16) and (2. I 71
until Chapter 3, where we begin to analyze problems that are at the core
of statics. But it is important to recognize the operations we shall have to
perform on a system of forces t i namelYI we must sum the forces and we l
must sum the moments of the forces. These very same operations are
required in dynamics, where we analyze the motion of an accelerating
body. Of immediate importance to us is the fact that, for a given system
of forces, the sums of moments with respect to two different points are
related in a particularly simple way. To establish this relationship, let the
body IFigure 2.191 be acted upon by a number INFIof forces and a number
(f\{;1 of couples. Let Fi be the joh force, for which the point of application is
Ai Iwhich actually could be any point on the line of action of Fi). Also, let
Cj be the moment of the i'" couple. Recall from Section 2.4 that the
moment of a couple about every point is thdsame. To distinguish, in
figures such as Figure 2.19, couples from single forces we use double-
headed arrows, or sometimes curved arrows indicating sense of turning l
to denote moments of couples.
Q
Figure 2.19
*Somewhat surprisingly the word "equilibrium," having a connotation of balance,

does not have a universally accepted technical definition in the literature of mechanics.
Some writers associate it with a force system, one that satisfies Equations {2. 16) and 12.17);
other writers give it the kinematic definition of stationarity of the body in an inertial frame.
StilI other writers define it by "stationarity" of the body in some, not necessarily inertial,
frame of reference. The important point, as we study statics, is that the equilibrium
equations are necessary conditions for a body to be stationary in an inertial frame of
reference. In this text, whenever we refer to a "body in equilibrium" the readershould take
that to mean that the body is stationary in an inertial frame.
tWe use the phrases "system of forces" and "force system" to denote any collection
of forces and/or couples of interest to us.
56 Chapter2 Forces and Moments J j
1
il;' ;\:
Letting LMQ denote the sum of the moments about Q of all the forces' ~ '.
j
and couples in the system, we have "

,
i:
I~.
Ne
j ,
F, + j=I1 Cj (2.181
il!
J,
.,' iil
But i
I'
j
, ! ,I
-\l'
} ","
so that, making the substitution in Equation 12.181
t , "~: "
!,, '.:.
X F, +
Ne
I Cj
,.~
I
j=l
~
'. i)i:
LMp 12.19) t' ;~

Equation 12.191is very important because it tells us that the sum of,.
the moments about one point is completely determined by the sum of the:
,f , ~ "1:1
1
forces, the sum of the moments about a second point, and the relative ~ l
locations of the two points. We shall use Equation 12.191,a number of j'
times in the remainder of this chapter. ~

~ ~.
1
f :~
"
~
l
j
I,!
I '!
t i~
!
]
",
P rR 0 B L EM 5 / Section 2.5 ~ "
i'l
;~
1
2.~8A body IJ is subjected to five forces acting at points of a. Find:EF and LMp, where P is the origin. ,.'!
an' inertial reference frame giv~n in the following table. b. Show that IJ is not in equilibrium.
c. Add forces at (1,0, 01m and (4, 0, 01ill that would 1:
allow B to be in equilibrium. '

:Position Vector
I to Point of 2.89 Find the moments of the five forces in the preceding
Force (N) :Application (m)
problem about the point Q at (x, y, zl ~ (1,,2,31 m. Then'
I. 21 + 3) - 5k I-I + J illustrate Equation (2.19) by 6btaining the same answer for"
LMQ by using LF and LMp (fromthe precedingproblemlin
2. 71 - 2k ;-k this equation; ,
3. 71 - 2k .1 - j
4. -1 - 3; +5k ,I-k
5. -141 + 4k 2; - k
.. 'j
~:,-
~2.6 Equipollence of Force Systems

Two different systems of forces are said to be equipollent (meaning "of
equal power"l if they make the same contributions to the equations of
equilibrium, (2.161 and 12.171. They will also make the same COIl-
tributions to the corresponding equations of motion for a body that is not
in equilibrium. Equipollence, then, is a special kind of equivalence in
which two force systems exert the same net :push lor pulll on a body and
also exert the same net turning action Imomentl.'
In general, a body will not respond in the same way to a force system
81 as it will to an equipollent force system 82, the exception being a rigid
body whose responses to two such systems will be indistinguishable. It is
important to realize, however, that we are not restricting our discussion
to rigid bodies. A simple example of equipollent forces is shown in Fig-
ure 2.20 where we can compare the processes of pushing and towinga,n
automobile.
The effects of the two SOO-lbforces on the bumpers of the auto-
mobile are of course quite different. However, if the forces have the
same line of action, they are equipollent because the equations of equi-
librium lor motionl relating the external forces acting on the automobile
would not distinguish between them.
It follows from the definition that the two conditions for equipol-
lence of systems 81 and 82 are:
1. Force Condition: (~Fll= (HI, 12.201

2. Moment Condition: I~Mpll = (~M;')2 12.21)
Qllestion 2.12 Could a system consisting of a single force,.b~

.equipollent to' a sys'tem consisting only:of a couple?
. . ..... ", "i' . .... .....
- ~SOOlb
Figure 2.20
*Some authors use "statically equivalent," or "rigid-body equivalent," or :simply

"equivalent" to describe this relationship. We are using the less familiar word equipollent
in order to emphasize that the relationship is restricted neither to statics nor to rigid bodies,
and also to call attention to the special nature of the equivalence.
58 Chapter2 Forcesand Moments
It is important to note that satisfaction of the force condition and

satisfaction of the moment condition at a single point P guarantees the
satisfaction of the moment condition at every point. To show that this is
the case, we let Q be any point and recall the important result [Equation
(2.19)]:
ILMQI, = rQP x IHI, + ILMpj,

Then by the equipollence of 51 and 5" we replace (LFj, by (LF)I and
ILMpl, by ILMp)1 and get
ILMQI, = rQP x (HII x (LMpll

= (LMQi 1 (by Equation 12. 191 again)
Thus to determine whether two systems are equipollent, we need
only to compare LF, and then LM at anyone point.
Question 2.13 Given three force systems 51' 5" and 53' with 5~
equipollent to both 52 and 5),9'"termine whether 52 and 53 are
,~<{cessarily~q~ipollel1t. ,','il. ':"
-:~",~
We now illustrate the equipollence of force systems with the fol.

lowing examples. I
1
I
E x A M p L E 2.19~ 1
I
Let the system in the figure, consisting only of the 250.lb force at A, be called 31 !!
Determine a force system 32 that is equipollent to 31 and that consists of a vertical
. ,,
force acting at B, and a pair of horizontal forces acting at D and E. , ,1
1
.1
'j
)"
SOLUTION
Since the original system 31 contains no horizontal forces the two horizontal
l
forces at D and E must be equal in magnitude and opposite in direction; that is, -:!
they have to form a couple. But I"etus proceed as if we had not realized this, and
sketch the sought system 52 shown in the illustration. Our force condition,
(Cominued)
F, which is necessary for equipollence of 51 and 52' gives
FD D 10ft (HI, = (H\,
B
250, = FDi + FEi + F.,
10ft
Thus, from the i coefficients, we find that the forces at D and E are equal in
F, 6 It magnitude and opposite in direction:
A
E ;
FD = -FE; III
System 51
The r coefficients give
250 = F. (21
To find the value of FDI we next ensure that our moment condition is also
satisfiedj we choose point A as our moment center (any point could be used!1
ILMAI, = (LMA\,
0= F8141k+ FDIIOJl-kl
j
,.
But F8 = 250 Ib from Equation 121:
250141
FD = -- = 100Ib
10
Thus the final system 52 appears as shown in the illustration.
fSOlb
As a check, we note that the moment condition is also satisfied at, say, B:
D
lOOlb B ILM811 = ILM8\,
250110 - 6J1-kl = 10011OJI-kl
or
lOOlb
, E - IOOOk= - IOOOkIb-It
, .
E x A M p L E 2.20~
Find a pair of venical forces, F1 at A and F2 at B, that together form a force system
52 equipollent to the pair of O.2-lb forces acting on the spacecraft in the figure.
SOLUTION
If we call the original force system in the figure S1' then using condition I-that
is, the force condition-we have
IHI, = IH\,
-0.2i + 0.2i ~ FI + F,
0= F, + F,
(Continued)
59
so that FI = - Fz. If Fz = FzJ, the system Sz shown in the illustration results.
Next, we use condition 2, or the moment condition, with point C selected as
the moment center:
."!
ILMcI, ';' ILMcl,

81021k + 810.21k ~ F,ISlk + F,ISlk
3.2
System 52 F, ~ - = 0.32 lb
10
The reader has probably noticed that the original 0.2-lb forces form a couple;
therefore, the two forces in S2 must do the same, as we have found. Note that if
the forces had been drawn as shown in the figure, then the moment condition
would have yielded ,
810.21k + 810.2)k = FdSII-kJ + FIISII-kl
FI = -0.32Ib
which of course corresponds to the same pair of forces as the F2's in the first sketch
of system S2'
Note also that if we had not required the forces atA and Bto be vertical, then
there would have been lots of correct answers, examples of which are shown
below:
064/~lb
I.
The readeris encouraged to demonstrate that each of these systems is equipollent

to 51.
In the final example in this section, we shall investigate a series of

different force systems and determine which of them are equipollent.
60
I
,
,
!j
E x A M p L E 2.21.
Consider a triangular plate under the six loading conditions shown in the
illustration (SIunits throughout). Determine which of the loadings, or force sys-
tems, are equipollent.
"I
5N 5
(I) (2) (3)
5
'1,
7 ,. ~
13
(4) (5) (6)
SOLUTION
Since we must computeI:F and I:Mp for each .system and then compare these
results, it will be useful to construct a table. We select the common moment
center P to be the lower left-hand corner of the plate because forces pass through
this point in each case, and thus their r x F is zero, making our calc~lation,s
easier. The resulting table follows.
(Continued)
6t
'~ 1
Force System LF[NI ~M, IN' rnl i
I sI- s) 30k i
2 -sI- s) 30k :~ .j'.
3 -51 + 5) 31k
~
4
5
6
51 + 5)
0
51 + 5)
-14k
l.79k
-14k ,
.....
f....
,.
:;
Notes on the entries of the six systems above are now listed. " .~
(1 I Here, the value of :EF is just the sum of the two forces, 51 and - sl The
moment about P is due to the 60k N . m couple plus the moment of the hori-
i
zontal force, IpQ )( 51 = (31 + 6,) x 51 = - 30k N m. Note that'the latter is
merely 5 newtons times its perpendicular distance 16ml from P, with the -:I{
attached since the force turns clockwise around P.
(2)Both forces pass through P, leaving only the couple to contribute to I:Mp.
Remember t~at couples have the same moment about all points! Note that .
although the moment condition is satisfied in comparing systems 1 and 2/ the
force condition is not, and it takes both for equipollence!
'\'
(3)In the vertical direction, the force is the combination of 7 N up and 2 N
down, or 5, N. Rotationally, the 7-N force and 5-N force each .have moments I
~
around P, their "lever arms" being 3 m and 2 m, respectively.
(4)In this case, the sum of the forces is calculated as
~(1 j5+ 2)) - _ + _ _ _ _ J
~F ~ 8v 5 3i 2j - 13j = lSi ~ SjJ N f~
.'\
i
){
The sum of moments is computed vectorially as follows: ~
i&'
~Mp ~ (31 + 6jl x 1311+ 31 x 2) - 38k ~ ~ 14k N m !)i
Alternatively, using forces times lever arms and attaching the unit. vector w~th f'J
correct sign, ".,
~
~Mp also ~ [3(61 + 2(31 - 38Jk = ~ 14k N . m ;:
fl
(51In this one, we have just a pure couple, since.the two forces cancel each .j ,
other making LF = o. The magnitude of the couple (whose unit vector and. '\
direction is seen to be + k) is given by either force times the distance d between ~
them:
1 I
i
'!"
Note that by inspection of the table through force system (5), there are no ~
equipollent loadings thus far.
(61 The sum of forces is H ~ (4 - 6 + 71i + 5) = 51 + 5) N. And I
~Mp ~ 2) x 1-611 + 6) x 71 + 31 x 5) + Ik ~ (12 - 42 + 15 + Ilk ~
-14k N . m, where we have used 2, and 6, m for the position"vectors to points
I,
on the lines of action of the 6- and 7-N horizontal forces, respectively. I,
We see that(~FI4 ~ I~FJ6and [~Mpl4 = [~MpI6' so that, in conclusion, the
only equipollent systems among the six are numbers 4 and 6. I
I1
62 .1
i
PRO B L E M SI Section 2.6
',2.90 By filling in the chart'JFigure P2.90(bIL determine 2.91 Replace the 2S0-1b force in Figure P2.91 by an equi.
rjwhich of the six beam loadings in Figure P2.90(a) are equipollent system consisting of a force at Q and a couple.
pollent. Then show that both systems have the same moment
about point B.
lOON 400 N
A t.."...
:~!:.rna ,lOON
A I.~m_~
.. ,'(,"
...
lBOON.m
lOON t
~:_"=:-~':::'~lo\T'~",1i
,
lOON
(a) (b) (e)
tOO N 200 N 200 N
d 2.5m
100 N -~.~====,l
-Coo ... ~.
+ tYOON.
9
~
m
J
l
. Ii
G
~C,
.2.5m.
_.
300N.m
A 400Nl
(d) (e) (f)
Figure P2.90(a)
2.92 Find a force at E and an accompanying couple that

C,se F, M" together form a system equipollent to the one shown in
(,) Figure P2.92.
(b)
(e)
(d) 4in. p
(e)
B
(f)
Figure P2.90(b) System 51

Figure P2.91
x
Figure P2.92
2.93 Replace the 2000.1b force in Figure P2.93 by an equi.

pollent system consisting of a horizontal force through A,
a vertical force along line eB, and a couple.
A 2.94 Find (and illustrate with a sketchj a pair of forces
2ft Figure P2.93 which (a) is equipollent t'o the couple in the figure, and
, ~
.:i
Chapter 2 Forces ana Moments
(blhas one force equal to sol N through the point (x, y)

.IIO, 20) cm./See Figure P2.94.1
" I
'2.95 Repeat the preceding p'roblem with condition (bl JOO N JOON
,_ ,.ch~nged to a force of IBOJN through lx, yJ = 130,40) em,
,
2.~6 Continue Example 2.21: by determining which of
~
' , ,I
the force systems are equipollent to any of the loadings of
,-_wcm~l 'f].
',the. same plate :;;hownin Figu~e P2.96. How many differ- o x Figure P2.94
ent comparisons of two systems at a time have now been
made?
z
il.f
r
5N
5N 4N 2b
M,
SN
I y
3N Figure P2.97
(7) (8) (9) (10)

'Figure P2.96 .f
, x
:2.97 In Figure P2,97 the magnitude ,of the moments of
.co~ples MI, M2, M'3 are each = Mo = constant. The
forces act in planes ABC, ACP, and BODC, respectively, x
so that the moments of the couples are normal to these
.planes. Find a single .couple that is equipollent to these
x
;thr~e couples.
Figure P2.98
:2.98 A bending moment of 10,000 lh-ft acts on a large
piate bolted to the ground with eight equally spaced bolts
as shown in Figure P2.98. Determine an equipollent sys.
"te~ of eight vertical forces, ea~h acting at one of the bolts
;and having a magnitude propo~ional to the distance of the
:bolt from line If.
2.99 In the preceding problem, re-determine the eight

:forces if the bolt pattern is aligned with the moment vec.
tor:as.shown in Figure P2.99.
2.100 A body is acted on by two forces: one with compo.

;nents JIO, 20, 30) N at a point having coordinates (3,2, II
:meters and the other with components (30,20, 10) N at a
poilU (1,2,31 m. Find the equipollent system consisting of
,af~rce at the point (I, I, II m ~nd a couple, Figure P2.99
-'... -
2.7 The Force-and-Couple Resultant of a System of Forces 65
2.101 The couple lies in the shaded plane, and there are 2.102 Find the force and couple at the origin equipollent
tWO other applied forces as shown in Figure P2.1 0 I. Find to the five forces and the couple shown in Figure P2.102.
the equipollent system consisting of a force at the origin a Then repeat the problem considering the two vertical.
~nd a couple. 30-N forces as a couple, and the two ,horizontal 40-N
, forces as another couple. That is} repeat the problem with:
the system treated as one force and three couples. Com-
z pare the results.
2.103 A couple of moment C lies in the shaded plane ABC

and has a magnitude of .jl31b-ft and a direction indicated
by the right-hand rule. (See Figure P2.103_1 A lorce F 01
magnitude 2.jl3 lb also acts as shown. Find the equi-
pollent system consisting of a force at point C and a couple.
B
y
Figure P2.101
z
y
x
c
Figure P2.103
x
Figure P2.102
~2.7 The Force-and-Couple

a System of Forces
The definition of equipollent
Resultant of
force systems correctly suggests that we

may replace any system, no matter how complicated, by a force and a
couple at any point P (see Figure 2_2 iI.
I
J
'].
!
"1":
-{:
.~
f
.~~
~1
5:
'\<
j
1!
t,
Sy~tem 51 System 52 !
Figure 2.21
ff
!
We have already seen that for the system S2 to be equipollent to S, }
we need only to ensure that:

1
~
~.
1. F" the force at Pin 52' is the sum of all the forces acting in system S,. J
2. M,p, the moment of the couple in S2' is the sum of all the moments
of the couples in S, plus the sum of the moments about P of all the
1
forces in S,. Note that, in system S2' F,produces no moment about P. I-
i
The force~ouple pair, F, and M,p is called a resultant- of the system 1
St. For simplicity we are using the phrase "forceand couple at point P" to Ir
describe the resultant, but it is important to realize that there is no reason ,
I
to assign a location-point subscript to the couple since the moment of a
couple about every point is the same. While the force F, does not depend
upon the choice of reference point P, the couple M,p depends upon the
i
j
j
choice of the line of action of F,. Thus, by "force .and couple at P" we
mean the resultant lof S,I when the line of action of F, is chosen to pass
through point P.
We consider now a number of examples of replacement of a system
I
of forces and/or couples by an equipollent system of a force and a couple
(that is, a resultant) at a preselected point. 1
I
I
i
\
,I
E x A M p L E 2.22~ t~
,:
't
Determine the resultant, at the pin P, of the two belt tensions shown. The pulley
~ON ~
has a radius R = 0.6 ffi.
SOLUTION
Using the force condition, the force part of the resultant is calculated as follows:
(HI, ~ (H),
. :
(Continued)
200(cos 30)1 - 1200 + 200(sin 3011, = F,
or
F, ~ 1731 - 300, N
Next, the moment condition tells us that the couple part of the resultant
at P vanishes this time:
I~Mpl,= I~Mpj,
200(0.6)k + 20010.6J1-kl = 0 = M,p
The diagram shows what has happened in going from the original system (Sd to
the resultant at P (5,1.
. "n
~ ~>
Equipollent Equipollent
.I
1.73T ~ 346 N
E x A M p L E 2.23 ......
Determine the resultant at point A of the four forces shown in the figure.
(Continued)
*Hence the subscript "r," for resultant, on each member of the pair.
67
SOLUTION
Since the forces are seen to form a pair of couples, the force F,.of the resultant at
A is zero. The moment of the couple is
51 ~ ~ ..
M,. = L M. = SOl411kl+ 20121k = 240k lb-ft
The resultant is shown in the illustration.
. . I' . .
.". Questlon.2.1S;: '_Wha~is theresultant at B! Ai' C'? _ .' ~
; "if'" ",'
~""< -n_ " :i:;iJ.'f;" ". ;"," .,
!j" i
E x A M p L E 2.24~.
Replace the force and couple system in the figure by an equipollent force and
couple at O.
7N
I
i
SN.m 3.
Force System 51
SOLUTION
j
The resultant force is
F, = 14 + WOJli + [-7 - ~IIOJlj lOi - ISjN
The resultant moment about 0 in 51 is I

, , (iJ2+ j) , , , ,I
M,o = ~3k - Sk~ + 2
moments of
couples
x 1- 7jJ +
moments of forces
2i x 16i - 8j
I
I

= [ -2 -
14],
J2 - 16 k = -27.9k N .
, m
The equipollent system is shown in the illustration,
68
z E x A M p L E 2.25~
Find the force at the origin and couple that are equipollent to the system in the
figure.
SOLUTION
y
The force is
F, = ~F = SO (5~ S~)+ (5~ 4k)

~ J 50 - ~ Ib
= (42.4 - 39.0)1 + 67.Sj + 31.2k Ib
= 3.41 + 67.Sj + 31.2k lb
And the moment of the couple is
E x A M p L E 2.26~
In the figure a man exens a force of 30 Ib in the x direction to tum the elbow onto
l
the threaded pipe. Determine the force and couple resultant at the origin 0, where
the pipe is screwed into another elbow above a tank.
SOLUTION
The force is simply F, = 30i lb. The moment at a is
M,o = ros x 30i
= 121- 3Sj - k) x 301 = -30j + 114k lb-I,

(Continued)
69
z
I It
~ Before moving to another example, we note that the force and moment are
O.S It undesirable concerning stress and deflection {and maybe leaks!! in the pipes. This
/ can be avoided by the wise use of a second pipe wrench (see the illustration'_ Now,
we see that for the two forces, F, = o. Furthermore, the z component of M,.o is
~.
>. 0- eliminated. The couple at a formed by the two 30-1bforces is simply 30H(-JJ,
.. "'. '. ~J, '
which, if H is, say, 2 in., amounts to only -5j lb-ft. This illustrates the advantage
~
,I ,,'
that may accrue from using two forces to produce a desired moment, which here
is 24k lb-ft on the elbow.
z E x A M p L E 2.27~
For the system shown in the figure, find the force and couple resultant at la) the
origin and (bl point A.
, I~
SOLUTION I ,
Y The force resultant is the same at all points, and is
F, = loei ~ 4k) + 1O( -3\+ 4,)
= (6i - Ski + (-6i + SJJ

J
= B, - Bk N
Obtaining the resultant moment at the origin, and noting that 0.31 m is a vector 1
from 0 to a point on the line of action of both forces,
1
M,o = 0.31 x 16i - Bkl + 0.3i x 1-61 + B,I + 81 l
= B1 + 2.4) + 2.4k N - m II
(Continued) j
;
'1
1
70
Thus at the origin, the original system is equipollent to
F, = 8) - 8k N
1 M,o ~ 81 + 2.4) + 2.4k N . m

r
At point A, the moment is simply the couple of si N m, since both forces
pass through A. Therefore, at A the system equipollent to the given one is
F, ~ 8) - 8k N and M,A = SiN. m
IThe force never changes

from point to point!)
We should note in the preceding example that the two systems at A and 0
are of course not only each equipollent to the given system, but also to each other.
To show this, note thauheir forces are each S; - Sk N, and that the moment of
.~'
the system at A, about 0, is
i
'I,
+ lOA X F,
<.'
couple at A moment about 0 of

(same moment the force at A
everywhere!)
~ 81 + 0.31 X (8) - 8kl
~ 81 + 2.4) + 2.4k N . m
This is indeed what we had previously obtained for M,o.
I
I
i
I,
PRO B L E M 51 Section 2.7
~.104 Four truss members :carrying the indicated forces

have their center lines all ~ntersecting at point P of the
I !
l
shaded gusset plate shown in Figure P2.104. Find the
r~sultant of the four forces at P.
Q2.10SDetermine the forc~ and couple at a that con-

stitute the resultant there of the three forces, the 40 lb-ft
5001b 12001b
twisting couple, and the two,bending couples acting on the
end of the cantilever beam ~hown in Figure P2.l 05. Figure P2.104
r
71
i
i
72 Chapter 2 Forces an~ Moments
Figure P2.105 z
1.0 m
Y
0.5 m
O.4m
~1 I.2m
SOON
A
~
Y
.2.106 For the system showri: in Figure P2:106, find the

re,sultant at point B. Figure P2.109
t
z 2.109 Determine the resultant at A of the forces applied
to the bar shown in Figure P2.l 09. Then, find the moment
at the origin and demonstrat.e that MrA = 1\1.,.0 + I,W X F,..
2.110 The resultant of the three.force system shown in.

Figure P2.ll 0 is a single force of 300 lb pointing up along
2{131b
2 ft
e
the y axis. Find the force F, and the angle it forms with the
x axis.
x
Y ,.-ii
Figure P2.106
F
2.107
,
8. Repeat the preceding problem for A instead of B.
Figure P2.110
b. Demonstrate that MrA ~ Mrs + lAB X Fr, which is, 1000 Ib '!,',r'
of course, generally true.
2.;108 Find the magnitude of ~he couple C (whose axis is in

~
r
the xy planel and its orientation angle 8, for which the three
2.111 Find the resultant of the three concurrent forces at
, couples have a zero resultant:(see Figure P2.108).
point C within the equilaterial triangle in 'Figure P2.1ll.
120 N . m A
J
~
Y,
x
Figure P2.111
SON. m
C
Figure P2.10a;
2.112 Referring to the preceding problem, find the force 2.114 Check the answer to Example 2.25 by computing:
l
and couple at vertex A that are equipollent to the given LMc and then computing rM
o + leo x I:F and compar-
. system (that is, find the tes~ltant atAI. ing. The two should agree Isee Equation (2.1911.
I '
2.113 In Figure P2.113, couple C lies in plane aBC, and 2.115 The 30-kN load is eccentrically applied to the
i column as shown in Figure P2.115. Determine the force
-! has magnitude 2j34lb-ft. Eind:
and couple at C that are together equipollent to the 30.kN
a. the moment of F1 abou~ OJ
1" b. the moment oJ Fl about 0;
load.
c. the moment of C abou~ 0; 2.116 Determine the resultant of the four forces and the'
(. d. the moment of the resultant (of F1, Fl, and Cl ahout two couples that act on the shaft shown ~nFigure P2.116,
line OC; . expressed as a force and couple at the origin.
e. the moment of the resultant (of F1, F" and CI about
" line OE. I
z
, ~i.-t. Adding the answers to: 3, b, and c, then subtracting
. I 30kN
.' I , those of d and e, gives a vector normal to plane EOG .
I
Without any calculations, explain why this must be
! so.
F,
Figure P2.115
y
4ft G
.X
Figure P2.113
" 80lb
)<;~
:he yzplane
3f~ . . I
100lb 200 Ib ftq( y

Figure P2.116
~2.8 The Simplest Resultant of a Force System

In Examples 2.19 and 2.22, we constructed a force and couple that were
equipollent to a single force. There are situations in which this procedure
is desirable. Often, however, our motivation is to produce the simplest
74 Chapter2 Forcesan~ Moments
~ ~
s, s,
Figure 2.22
resultant-that is, where possible, simply a force or simply a couple .

Thus, in the examples mentioned above, the original force itself is
already the simplest resultant.
In this section we are going to think about the possibility of reducing
an arbitrary force system to an equipollent one consisting only of a force:' ".
Figure 2.22 depicts three systems: an "original system" St, an equipol-
lent system S2 consisting of a force and couple at some point P; and the "
possibility of still another equipollent system S3' which is a "force alone"
at some point Q.
If the system S3 is to exist, then the force in S3 obviously must be the ,"
same, F" as that in 52 which is
.,
The real question about the existence of S3 is whether or not a point Q
may be found so that M,Q = O.If Sz and S3 are'to be equipollent, then the
moments about some point, say, PI in the systems must be the same:
moment moment moment

about P about P about P
in 5, in 51 in 53
If there is to be no couple in S3' then

ILMplt = M,p = 0 + rpQ x F, 12.221
But this equation can be satisfied lor is meaningfull only if M,p is
orthogonal, or perpendicular, to F, because a cross product is al.ways
perpendicular to each of the vectors making up the product:'When that is
the case, Equation (2.221can be solved for vectors rpQ identifying points
,
,
*Some authors use the term "resultant" to denote what we are calling "simplest
resultant." Our choice of language is motivated by what the student will:encounter in the
analysis of stresses in deformable solids. There, the most useful form of resultant is often a
force-couple pair with a preassigned reference point, an,d, even if further reduction to a
single force is possible, it is not usefuL
on the line of action of a single force F,. We note that if F, = 0 with

M,p "" 0, then M,Q = M,p and the resultant is a couple, period! And
that if F, "" 0 with M,p = 0, then we already have the location of the
force-alone resultant-its line of action passes through P.
We next explore three special force systems for which a single-force
i,
1- _-
-------- -- 'i.'
#'
resultant exists.
Special Force Systems That Are

F, ~,
X Equipollent to a Single Force
~,
X
~, ConcurrentPorce Systems. A concurrent force system is one for which all
of the lines of action intersect at a single poim. If we call that point A as in
Figure 2.23, then M,A = 0 because none of the forces produces a momem
about A. Thus the resultam is F, = LF with its line of action passing
Figure 2.23 through A.
E x A M p L E
Find the single-force resultant, or "force-alone" resultant, of the system of forces

shown in the figure.
F, = 2,N
F, ~ i+ 2, + Sk N
F] = -4, + lk N
F4 ~ 6iN
SOLUTION
Because the four forces are concurrent at OJ there is a single force resultant that is
simply their sum F" acting at Q (or at any point on the line of F, through OJ:
F, ~ F, + F, + F] + F 4
= 2, + Ii + 2, + Ski + 1-4, + lkJ + 6i

~li+12kN
:
~~.,-,-'
76 Chapter 2 Forces and. Moments
Coplanar Force Systems. In this system, all of the forces have lines of
'A~A action that lie in a plane (say xyj, while all the vectors representing
1:,0\}
moments of couples are normal to this plane (see Figure 2..2.4). '
In this case, if we sketch the equipollent system at P (that is, the
'resultant at Pj in the xy plane (see Figure 2..2.5),we will necessarily have
x F, = F,) + F,J
Figure 2.24 M,p = M,pk
Now if we let P be the origin for rectangular coordin'ates and let x, y,

and z be coordinates of a point through which the line of action of a
Figure 2.25 "force-alone" resultant would pass, then by Equation (2..2.2.),
(xi + y; + zk) X IF,) + F,y;j = M,pk
"~
or
- zF,yi + zF,xi + IxF,y - yF,,)k = M,pk
From either the i- or i-coefficients of this equation,
we see that z = O. I'
That is, as we would have anticipated, the line of action of the force-alone
resultant lies in the xy plane (the plane of the forces in the original
systemj. But also
~_~=~ {2..~
which provides the equation of the line of action of the force-alone

resultant. This result is depicted in Figure 2..2.6.
----- IF,I
F, .,.."'" I
p
M,e/F,. ""........ I
, '1----7
F,~ x
d~ IM"I
IF,I
~.
Figure 2.26 ~~
~ I
, '
.,
Before proceeding to examples of coplanar systems, we illustrate a "
slightly different view of this process of finding the line of action of the
force-alone resultant. Since M,p and F, are perpendicular, we let M,p be a
pair of forces F, and -F, as shown in the second frame of Figure 2..2.7,
where we let the - F, part of this pair have a line of action through
2.8 The SimplestResultantof a ForceSystem 77
~~..t".:~~~~
..
t
~ ~
,I
,f . Figure 2.27
reference point P. Now the "canceling" of the F, and - F, pair through P

leaves the third frame of the figure as the final result. Clearly this
. ~. reasoning may be used any time M,p and F, are perpendicular.. This
illustrates the fact that as long as F, # 0, we are guaranteed a force-alone
resultant for a coplanar force system.
"l ..
E x A M p L E
In Example 2.24, the original system of forces and couple was shown to be
equipollent to the single force and couple at 0 shown in the figure. Now, funher
reduce this coplanar system to a single force.
SOLUTION
We have M~o.1 F~.Therefore, the equation
lOA X F~= M~o
will identify all points A on the line of action of the single force, F~,in an
equipollent system consisting only of this force. Thus,
IxI + YJI x (101 - 15JI ~ 27.9k

from which
-15x - lOy = -27.9
or
y ~ - 1.5x + 2.79 m
Realizing that we know F~,all that additionally is required to establish the
line of action is the location of a single point on the line. Thus, we could 'have
(Continued)
*This is true whether or not the original system, to which F~and M~p are equipollent,
is coplanar!
simply sought a specific point such as the intersection of the line with the x axis.
Setting y = '0 and letting x = a at that intersection, we can write
or
a1 x (101 - 15il -27.9k N . m
Thus
15a = 27.9
a = 1.86 m
y The same result is obtained w"ith less formality, and perhaps in a manner
\
\ that facilitates physical insight by referring to the figure where F,. has been
\ decomposed into horizontal and vertical parts. Since the horizontal part 110 Nl
\
\ has a line of action through 0, it produces no moment about O. The clockwise
3l 2 \
moment liSa) of the vertical part must then be equal tathe clockwise 27.9 N . ffi.
Thus
\ 15a = 27.9
\ ION
0 , )
, x a = 1.86 m las beforel
_a ,
,
, Additional confirmation of these results is provided by the sketch that
.,, follows, where the 27.9-N . m couple is specified to be composed of a pair of
15 N '18.0 N 18.0-N forces. The equation of the line of action of F,.is obtained as follows:
slope = that of F, ~ - 1.5
y intercept = H, where by similar triangles (using the figure belowl
d 1.55
H H
or
\:
H = 2.79 m
y y
d = IM,ai = 27.9 = 1.55 m

IF,I 18.0
(Continued)
78
Thus
y = - 1. 5x + 2_79 m
and so if y = 0,
I X=--
2.79
I 1.5
= 1.86 m
which is the "a" obtained before.
E x A M p L E
Find the single force that is equipollent to the system shown.
4N
SOLUTION
The resultant force is
F, = 41 + 13 - I + II, = 41 + 3, N
)
x INote that the I-N forces form a couple and thus have no resultant force.) At the
origin 0, the resultant moment is
M,Q = 51 x 1- IIi + !Ok + 4, x 41
couples moment of the 4-N

force about a
-llkN'm
In a case such as this where it is easy to identify the perpendicular distances

from a to the lines of action of the various forces, the moments can be calculated
with less formality by using the "force times perpendicular distance" method in
conjunction with the right-hand rule. With this approach
M,o = I1511-kl + !Ok + 41411-kJ
-
-llkN'm or II+'N'm
I
I
(Continued)
79
The equipollent system at 0 thus appears as follows:
,. I
,
11 N. m
o x
The force-alone resultant must then be positioned so that it. produces a

clockwise Il-N . m moment about point O.
y By decomposing this force into horizontal and venical parts where the line
of action of Fr intersects the y axis, we can easily determine that intersection by
4b = 11 N . m
b~ 1~ =2.75m
b Alternatively we could use the more formal vector algebra approach to

I
I x
determine the force-alone resultant and thereby obtain the equation of the line of
action of the force, at the possible expense of a bit of physical understanding:
where A is any point on the line of action of the force. Therefore,
(xi + YIJ x (4i + 311 = - II k

"
or 1
I.
3x - 4y = -ll
.~;t~~,.'. 0 ,". " -, .' :.~ . ',' .:.... -1- . , .. '\ '(",' ," ,'i' .'~'i
,~<;Quesiion '2~20 '-Why hasn1ta zk been incluqedas part of thevectQf,roA

H .. "'~bciveL... "".' . ": "do;"" ,~, ,
'"." ,'" , " ~L.'. ,-, _,
Thus
y = ~x + 141 m
or
Y ~ O.75x + 2.75 m
80
.ij . 2.8 The Simplest Resultant of a Force System 81
Parallel Force Systems. In this system all of the lines of action of the
various forces are parallel; we can let the common direction of these
forces be z (Figure 2.281.
An intermediate equipollent system of one force and one couple at
the origin has
F,= LF; = 1:F;k = F,k
where F, could be negative here, together with
! Figure 2.28 M,o = 1:lIx;i + yJI x F;kJ

in which (x;, y;llocate the point where F;pierces the xyplane. Performing
I the cross product,
M,o = 1:IF;I-xJ + y,ill
and we see that M,o 1- F,. This means that the simplest resultant is a
single force F,,' with no accompanying couple. To find where this
resultant acts, we once again use Equation (2.221:
(xi + yJ + zkl x F,k = M,o = 1:[F,ly;l - xJIl
:J ; where lx, y, zl are the coordinates of a point on the line of action of F,.
Matching the coefficients oft, J, and k,we obtain
,'; ,
1:(F;y;)
icoefficients: y=--
F,
1:IF,x,) 12.24)
J coefficients: x=---
F,
k coefficients: 0 = 0 (means z can have any valuel

Thus the line parallel to the z axis with x and y given by Equations
(2.241 is the line of action. At any point on this line, a system equipollent
to the original one of Figure 2.28 is given quite simply by Figure 2.29.
:~:'.
f,
:j
~
'~ Figure 2.29
"
:~
*Unless, of course; F, = 0 in. which case the simplest resultant is the couple M.a-
i
.1
i
E x A M p L E
Find the single-force resultant for the system of parallel forces acting on the plate
in the figure.
SON
4
----",.
y(m)
/x(m)
SOLUTION
Let us call the given system 5. and the system we are seeking, 52' The force in 52
J
is found to be
51 _ _ _
F, = LF = - 30k - 40k + SOk

= -20kN
If we letx and y be the coordinates locating the intersection of the line of action of
the force-alone resultant with the surface of the plate, then
(xl + YII x F, ~ M,o
or
(xl + YII x (-20kl = 21 x SOk + [I + 3,1

x [-40kl + [21 + ,I x (-30k)
or
20x, - 20yI = 1001 + (40, - 12011 + (60, - 301)
Thus, collecting like terms,
1: -20y = 100 - 120 - 30 = -50
Y = 2.5 m
and
J: 20x = 40 + 60 = 100
x=5m
(Continued) ..
" .'
'82
z These, of course, are the x and y coordinates of every point on the line of
action of the force F" since in this case the line of action parallels the z axis.
SO N
J
It is important to realize that the i and parts of M,a are the moments about
30N the x and y axes, respectively. This fact may be used to locate the line of action of
the force-alone resultant without recourse to the formalities of the vector algebra.
y
I The force-alone resultant must produce the same moments about these axes as do
','/--v:
"
i x
-y-
20NI/
x l~o N
the forces in the original system. And since all of the forces are perpendicular to
the axes in question, the "force times perpendicular distance" method easily may
be used to calculate the moment. Referring to the figure, then,
- 20y = - 30111 + 50(21 - 40(31 = - 50
y = 2.5 m
and
20x = 30121 + 40111 = 100
x=5m las beforel
so Ib
60lb E x A M p L E 2.32~
{;
Determine the force.alone resultant for the system of six parallel forces acting on
40lb the beam as shown in the figure.
~j
30Ib
~:.
"
z 20lb
[j SOLUTION
r:, 10 Ib
The required resultant is comprised of a single force computed as
;1
:; I
a ------;..
F, = H ~ 1-10 - 20 - 30 - 40 - 50 - 60lk
"l:.l--J-I-l-Ib;- 1ft 1ft 1ft 1ft 1ft 1ft

x
= -210k Ib
Its location is given by the value of x for which the moment of F, about, say, a is
II a
the same as the moment
-210x
of the six forces about 0:
~ -10(11 - 20121 -30131 - 40141 - 50(51 - 60(61
910
x=--
210 lb 210
~ 4,33 It
\ The y coordinate of the force-alone resultant vanishes this time because all
I the forces lie in the xz plane.

In this example, we have a set of forces, finite in number, that happen to
I
i
!
increase proportionately. In Section 2.9 we shall consider what happens when a
loading becomes continuously distributed across a line or an area, instead of
acting at a few discrete points as above.
83
The Simplest Resultant of a Force.and.Couple System:

A Collinear Force and Couple ("Screwdriver""
We close this section with two examples. In the first, force and couple
resultants, F, and M,p, are perpendicular. Thus, even though the original
system was neither concurrent, coplanar, nor parallel, a force-alone
resultant can be found.
In the second example F, and M,p are not perpendicular, so a force-
alone resultant does not exist. However, this example will show that we
can reduce such a system to a force and a parallel couple. Since this is the
mechanical action required to advance a screw with a screwdriver lsee
Figure 2.301, we call this simplest resultant the "equipollent screw-
driver" for the system. As the reader will see, the reduction is
accomplished by applying Equation 12.221 to that part of M,p that is
perpendicular to F,.
~I
~,
Figure 2.30
E x A M p L E 2.33~
Reduce the system of Example 2.27 to a force-alone resultant, if possible.
z SOLUTION
At the origin, we have in the previous example already reduced the system to
F, = s) - 8k Nand M,o = 81 + 2.41 + 2.4k N . m
Hence
ION/ M,o . F, = 181 + 2.41 + 2.4kl . 18, - 8kl
I
I
/ --ION y = 2.418) + 2.41- 81 ~ 0
)<s x
l
8N.
03m
m
This zero result means that the resultant moment at
pendicular to the resultant force.
a is in fact per.
(Continued)
*This material has been included for completeness, hut nothing essential to the study
of statics is missed if this.part.of the section is omitted. ~.
Therefore, a force-alone resultant can be found in this example. We proceed
then toward determining its line of action. If A is a point on the line, then we
may write
rOA = xi + y, + zk
and then from
rOA x F, = M,o
we get
(xl + y, + zkl x IS, - Ski = sl + 2.4, + 2.4k

1- Sy - Szli + (Sxl,+ (Sxlk= sl + 2.4, + 2.4k
so that
i coefficients: - 8y - 8z = 8 111
J coefficients: 8x = 2.4 121
k coefficients: 8x = 2.4 131
Equations 12)and (31 each give the result that x = 0.3; this means that the
line lies in the plane parallel to yz at this value of x. In this plane, its equation is
given by (II:
y+z=-I
z E x A M p L E
The three forces in the figure each have a magnitude of 10 lb. Find the screwdriver
equipollent to this system.
SOLUTION
y
The force resultant is
x
Already, then, we know that la) the force of the "screwdriver" is IO.J3lb and
Ib) the orientation of its line in space is given by the unit vector (i + J + kl/
J3, which means in this case that the axis of the screwdriver makes equal
angles (each ~ cos-'II//31 = 54.7"1 with the coordinate axes.
(Continued)
85
At the origin, an equipollent system to the three given forces is F;
I
accompanied by the resultant couple there:
M,o = 3k x lOi + 161 + 211x 10k

= 20i - 30j Ib-ft
The "parallel component" of M~o(the part parallel to F~Iis
M,oll = M,o' Cil) ~ (20i - 30jl . C +1+ k)
20-30 -10
J3 - J3 Ib-ft
Therefore,
- 10 F, - 10 (i + j + k) - 10 ~ -
M,oll = J3 TF;T = J3 J3 ~ -.-3-(1 + , + kllb-ft
This moment, M~OIl' is the couple of the screwdriver. Note that this time it
is opposite in direction to F~,as if a wood screw were being unscrewed instead of
advanced.
The "perpendicular component" of M~ois the part of M,o normal to F,:
- - [- 10 _
= 20i - 30j - -3-(i + _j + k)
- ]
= 731- J + 130klb-ft
Finally, if A is any point on the line of action of the screwdriver, located by
rOA = xl + YJ + zk
then the condition
gives the equation of the axis of the equipollent screwdriver:
Ixi + yj + zkl x (lOi + IOj + 10k) = ","i - ',OJ + .!jk

from which we obtain
1coefficients: lay - 10z = 73 III

Jcoefficients: 10z - lax =- 121
k coefficients: lOx - lOy = 13 (31
Note that by adding Equations III and 121,and multiplying the result by - I, we
obtain Equation 13). This means that only two of the equations are independent
and necessary to define the axis of the screwdriver. A pair of equati~ns such as (II
(Continued)
86
..
z
and (21 constitute the general form of a line in three-dimensional space. Before
leaving this example, let us find two points on the line, and sketch the final
answer:
Il) y - z ~!
131 x - y ~!
Point 1: If z = 0, y = t IfY=1, x=J

Point 2: If y = 0, x =! If y = 0, Z = 7
3
;;'-;,""","'c, ,<"~,~' '~~+:J, .

~"',~fi.-" '. ,-~'. ~ . ,,~ .'~' '. ',::--:+ ",;r :; ",_~"
',Question 2':21' AIe 'the <direction':numbers. of the screwdriver '.,
,~xis, obtained fro~ the coordinat~sof P?itits 1 and)- in EXam' ,
:,')le2. ~4Ii inagre;~men t~ith dir~.ction!:nuinpers_obt~in~difE2rn ':
-'-'Fr\t~elf?'::_. . ',r.; .. - '~~,o. ~h -,.,. ."'~\' ~.'
';"''>-~ ", ;.' .. i.. "'~.,' -A ,;"",,'
2.117 Five members of a truss are exerting the indicated

lo'ads on the pin at pOintaas '~hown in Figure P2.l 17. Find
the single-force resultant of the five forces. 350N
)
Figure P2.117 x
87
88 Chapter2 Forcesand Moments
2.118 Find the force-alone re.sultant of the five forces

shown in Figure P2.l1S. Locate the intersection of the line
13k
of action of the resultant with line Be.
2.119 The forces have vertic:~l lines of action and act

through a horizontal unit grid as shown in Figure P2.119.
Find and locate the single force that is equipollent to the 2k
given force system.
Figure P2.118 6 It
Find the force-alone resultants of the concurrent force
systems shown in Figures P2.120-P2.12S. j 8k
z
1
6ft
ION
4N
1m
A _I
~
y
./lI6N 8N
x Figure P2.119
2.121 2.122 y 2.123

, 130N
I
34lilb 200lb ,
,
,
I
,
12 ft ,\
//
//
?);'-L /
\
\
I
--1-
I
.
- .....
/' -\ \ \ I
..... 60N \ \\ I
-'~. \\\1) I 3f y
x 4ft ~\/ t
Figure P2.121 Figure P2.122 SON A

Figure P2.123
2.124

y
12
'-':\Find the simplest resultant for each of the coplanar force 2.130
. :systems shown in Figures P2.126-P2.131. Give the equa-
t'ion of the line of action in each case, and determine 120lb 30 in.
where it crosses the x axis.
Figure P2.130
2.126 y
Sib
s,fi ft
2.131 y Sib 81b
Figure P2.126
x
-
31b x
3 in.
Find the simplest resultant for each of the parallel force

Figure P2.131
. 2.127
systems shown in Figures P,2.132-P2. 136. Locate the Hne
'Wind A .,
Resultant of wind forces of action of each in the coordinate system given.
6L\ ' 2.132
Figure P2.132
I
6 It
20lb
I
lSlb
j 2Stb
~Figure P2.127
2.128
0- ..
'.
-~I i
2ft
30lb
_6ft_I_7ft __
I
3ft
Lilt
2.134 z
10m
12N
Figure P2.128
2.133
ZI
SOlb
40lb
n. 60lb
10m 80lb
3ft/
3m I
pON
2ft y 4m
)
y
x
x Sft
4ft
/'x
Figure P2.133
70lb
21b
21b
~~//// Forces in centers
8 in. ,. ,. of segments
///
o / IS in. ~ 2m
4 Ib x
21b 20N
,90 Chapter 2 Forces and Moments
2.135 2.139 Replace the two forces acting on the bar in 'Fig-
ure P2.139 by a single force. Give its magnitude, direction,
and line of action.
2.140 Find the force P so that the force-alone resultant of

the two forces acts through the center of the bar in Fig-
-
ure P2.140,
(xy is plane 'of triangle; 801b P
Ei
Figure P2.135 forces are normal to it.)
.' 15 in. : 15 in.

2.136 Figure P2.139 . ., F;gure P2.140
y ....-'
501b
....--
501b
x 2.141 Three forces of magnitude P, 2p, and 3P act on a

I ft block as shown in Figure P2. 141.
1.121'lb -
d I It a. Find an equipollent system consisting of a force and a
2)'lb _ couple at point A.
1ft b. Give the relation between il, b, and G so that the
3')' lb
system may be reduced to a single force.
I ft
4~lb ----I c. Can the system be reduced to a single couple? Why or
1ft why noU
5~lb ----~I
1ft
,~2.88~ lb .- __ ~I
ZI
!
y_ P
(')'= constant)
.71
';/1
Figure P2.136
x~ b
2 .137 Replace the force system shown in Figure P2.13 7

by:
a
2PVA Figure P2.141
,8. A force through a and a couple

b. A single force * 2.142 A circular plate of radius R supports three vertical
loads as shown in Figure P2.142. Determine the magnitude
and point of application of the smallest additional force
50tb that m.ust be applied onto the surface of the plate if the four
loads are to be equipollent to:l(a) zero (that is, to a system
with F, ~ 0 and M, ~ OJ, (bl a force through the center of
50lb the plate. What is this force?
2f~ 1 3ft
w
Figure' P2.137
x
2.138 Show that if the elements of a force-couple resultant Figure P2.142

at one point are perpendicular, ~then the elements at any
other point are also perpendicular.
2.143 Is it possible to reduce the force system shown in a. The force-alone resultant of the lift. and drag forces
Figure P2. 143 to a single fon;:e? If so, what is the shortest and moment Mel which represent the resultant at C
distance from P to the line of action of this single force? of the wind forces on the parabolic antenna dish.
b. The point where the resultant from part (aJcrosses the
line I in the figure. (This line is the intersection of
the rim plane and the:xy plane.)
~'
2.147 Figure P2.147 shows a force-couple system. The
\M"
magnitudes are:
IF,I~ 3ji3lb
Figure P2.143
IF,I = 2.j40lb
2.144 Suppose we take a complicated system of forces and
couples and reduce them to an equipollent system, at P, of ICt! ~ 21 lb.ft
force F, and moment M,p. When can the system be funher ICz I ~ 9 lb.ft
reduced to (al a single force? (Q) a single couple? Hint: Think
about the figure of the prece~ing problem. Give an equipollent system' consisting of a single force and
couple through point A (2/0, 0). Can your system be fur-
" 2.145 Replace the force system of Figure P2.145 by (al a ther reduced to a single force or to a single couple?
force through a and a couple; Ibl a force.
1 tO lb
351b
I 251b
(-3,2,0)ft
! q
!
(2,2,0) It
)
y 3ft
C,
\ --~.~.-
501b.ft y
I x
Figure P2.147
~ I Figure P2.145
2.146 With reference to Figure P2.l46, find thefollowing:

2.148 If possible, replace the system of forces in Fig-
ure P2.l48 by a single equipollent force. OtheIWise replace
the system by a force through 0 and a couple.
~llOolb
,,
,
I drag ~ 2200 Ib x
1301b _.- 0 I
y
f 2500 llrft = moment Me
~
x~4lt 7 /
501b
. F,gure P2.146 Figure P2.148

z
z z
1ft
,,,
: I ft 1ft
0.*,
, A
_ lib lib
/
/
/ ,,
,, y /x
/
/
,
x I
Figure P2.149
ION. m
lOON 200N
2.149 Find the.force and couple that must he added at
point A to the force system shown at the left in Fig- 30N. m
Ure P2.149 so that it will be equipollent to the force sys- Figure P2.150
tem at the right. What is the screwdriver equipollent to
the original system on the left?
In Problems 2.152-2.163, the procedure outlined in the
~.150 With reference to Figure P2.ISO, and in terms of I, text is to be followed in establishing the "equipollent
find the following: screwdriver" for the given system~that is, the resultant
a. The force and couple at the origin a that are equi- consisting of a collinear force and couple. Give, in addi.
pollent to the three forces and three couples shown
I tion to the force and couple, a complete description of the ..
: acting on the bent bar line of action of the screwdriver.
lb. The value of t for which the system can be further
2.152
reduced to a single force
z
2.151 ]0 Figure P2.lS! a systerrt of four forces and a couple
is shown. Replace this system by an equipollent system ISlb
consisting of a singlecouple and ,asingle force whose line of 12 ft
4ft
action passes through point A, located at coordinates
(2, 6, OJ.Further reduce this new system to a single force, if
possible. 3ft ---- 1
I'
z x
l
Figure P2.152 ,I
2.153
z
3m
4m
y
y 3N
x
IN
2.8 The Simplest Resulian!'ol a Force System 93
y 2.158 F, ~ 3 lb, F, = 4 lb, and M = 50Ib.;n.

2.154
z
Figure P2.154
x
y
Each force has
z magnitude 100ft N
x
2.155 y
Figure P2.158
2.159
Figure P2.155
x
.;f,- P a
2.156 z
31b
5 It
30'
Gi'
Figure P2.159
3a
"fi
2.160
z
40N y
30N
Figure P2.156
Figure P2.160
2.157 z 2.161
20N
31b
y
(2, 0, 0) It
x Figure P2.161
Figure P2.157 Couple of magnitude 6 Ib-ft
\
z 2.165 Show that Equation (2.23), expressed in slope-

intercept form as
1ft
I it _ (F".)
y--x+-- (- M,p)
F,x F,x
y
agrees with Figure P2.165 i that is, show that the slope and
intercept of the line are correct from the information in the
Figure P2.162 figure.
2.163
/'
Zt,
/
'11/
/ /
r( /:/ I
/1 '-j-ISlb
I
I <> I
I '- I I
:::1
: 15ft 1
Y V '--
I 2ft
I \ I
I -, Figure P2.165
x " /9ft \ y
601 + 106J IMt 2.166 The equation of the screwdriver line in the preced-
Figure P2.163 ing problem must obviously be rederived if F,x = O. ObtaIn
the correct equation of the line for this case.
2.164 The pitch of an "equipbllent screwdriver" is de- 2.167 Return to Problem 2.10 1 and find the screwdriver
fined to be M'PII1F,. Suppose that three force-couple systems equipollent to the forces and couples shown again in Fig-
have each been resolved into equipollent screwdrivers, and ure P2.167. At what point does it pierce the ground (xy
that their lines of action are the x, y, and z coordinate axes
(Figure P2.164J. Prove that, if these are further reduced to
a single resultant screwdriver, ,and if it is a single force
Iwithout any couplel, then the pitches IM,/FrI, (M,IFz),
and (M3/F3J cannot all have the'sa~e sign.
planel'
z I
o
4ft
Figure P2.167 y I
2.168 Return to Example 2.21 and find the screwdriver

equipollent for each of the six force systems. Why can none
of them be a single force through P?
\.
~2.9 Distributed Force Systems

Probably the most important reason for studying the resultants of force
systems is to have at our fingertips the resultants of frequently occurring
distributed force systems. In engineering mechanics we usually are
dealing with bodies on a large scale (macroscopic!, where material is
perceived (or modeled I to be continuously distributed in space. This is in
contrast to a microscopic view where we might be distinguishing
individual atoms and the spaces between them. We perceive mechanical
actions to be exerted on bodies either by direct contact or by the action of
a "field" such as gravity or electromagnetism. In the first instance Ifor
example, pressing a finger against this book', it is natural to view the force
exerted as the net effect of something distrib':'ted over the surface area of
contact. In the second case (for example, the gravitational force exerted
by the earth on the book!, it is natural to view the force as the net effect
of "weights" of individual particles, or elements of mass, which are
distributed through the volume of the body. Thus, the mechanical
actions that naturally arise in engineering mechanics may be classified as
either surface forces or body forces.
We begin our calCulations of resultants of distributed force systems
by considering the simplest case, in which the distribution is over a line.
This, of course, doesn't fit the classifications of the preceding paragraph,
but it commonly arises as a system that is equipollent to one of those
classifications. In particular we consider the frequently occurring easel
illustrated in Figure 2.31, in which the force system is distributed over a
straight line and the mechanical actions are all parallel to one another and
perpendicular to the line.
y
I dx F,
I(x)
o
_x_ll_dx x
x,
L------~I
Figure 2.31
Letting f = - tJbe the distributed force intensity-that is, force per

unit of length along the line-then an elemental, or infinitesimal, force
in the system at location x is (- f dxll. To find the resultant force F,we, as
always, must simply add up all the forces in the system. Here the process
"96 Chapter 2 Forces and Moments
of summation becomes integration so that
F, = r fdx = rl-f'ldX
= -(r fdX)'
where the unit vector -, is a constant, both in magnitude and direction. '.1
The couple pan of the resultant at a is obtained by adding up (integratingl j
the moments of the elemental forces in the distributed system so that
M,o"" LL xi x I-f,dxl = -k LL xfdx

J~
Thus if f dx # 0, there is a force-alone resultant (aswe may have
anticipated since our distributed system is both parallel and coplanarl.
Letting x, locate the line of action of this force-alone resultant, we can .!
find x, by ensuring that the moment condition for equipollence is
satisfied:
x,.l x F,. = M,.o ;

or
x, LL fdx LL xfdx
=
or
x, =
rr xfdx
fdx
(2.251
It is imponant to observe the similarity of Equation 12.25)to the second of

Equations (2.241,where parallel discrete forces were being studied. It is
also of interest to observe that S~
f dx may be interpreted as the "are,a'"
under the force intensity curve or loading curve, when f(xl is graphed.
We shall see in Chapter 6 that x, locates the x coordinate of the
"centroid" of the area beneath the loading curve of Figure 2.31. The
denominator of Equation (2.251 measures the "total" (or magnitude of
the resultantl of the distributed force.
In summary, then, the force-alone resultant of a parallel distributed
line loading has lal a magnitude and sense given by the signed area
beneath the loading curve, (bl a direction parallel to that of the parallel
distributed forces, and Ie) a line of action given by Equation 12.25).We
shall now consider three examples in which we compute resultants of
distributed line loadings.
,'._
L.
I.
..
"
,!
~,-"-~-------~-----~~
.,
E A M p L E
Find the resultant of the uniformly distributed weight of the sacks of cement
stacked on the dock. There are 12 piles as shown, with 8 bags per pile, and each
94-lb bag is 20 in. wide by 2.5 t long as shown in the figure.
L
r 20in._1
I,
I:.
if
2.51{
20in.-I~,_I-- 20It .1
SOLUTION
The total weight of the cement is
Ib
94 -18 x 121 bags ~ 9020lb Ito tbree digitsl
bag
This of course is the magnitude of the resultant Fr By intuition, its hne of
>
action is downward, 10 feet from either end of the cement. But let us obtain the
result by ensuring that the moments of the two systems shown in the next
illustration are the same about the left end A of the loading.
-
f(x) ~ ~~O ~ 451 Ib/ft
~mrnm
r Equipollent
I' I x )
T; I. System I System 2
"
I
L xflxl f'O x'I'O
IM,AI, ~
I
o
This must equal the moment

dx =
0
9020
---
20
x dx = 451 -
2
(MrAlz of the force-alone resultant:

0
~ 90,200 Ib-ft
9020 x, ~ 90,200
x, = 10ft las expectedl

,
(Continued)
.97:
Note that in the solution we did not need the 2.S-ft dimension. Since the
loading distribution does not vary in the direction perpendicular to the page; we
have idealized the weight as a line load acting in the central plane of the bags.
More will be said about this later in the section.
E x A M p L E 2.36 ......
A ramp has the weight distribution shown in the figure/where PL isthe weight per
unit length at the right end of the ramp. Find the resultant of the triangularly
distributed weight.
B-T
SOLUTION
The distributed loading has the equation
Pc
f (x) ~-x
B
~!
p,
~ ~f(x) ~
I x- I~dx I
B
The differential force dF at x is given as suggested in the figure by
dF ~ flxl dx ~ P,. x dx
B
so that the resultant Fr has magnitude
(BpL xdx = PI.B

Jo B 2
(Continued)
98
,I
i
'. ,V
:f:,-
This is 1/2 the base times the height of the triangle, or the area beneath the
loading curve, as we have previously shown. We next locate the line of action of
the resultant by finding the value of x, in the figure for which the moments of the
f
if' two systems are the same about some common point, say, 0:
"
r
I r
~
PI
Equipollem
o
I! - I~--L .1
";."
,, We obtain
8 - f8 P
IF,lx, ~ f o xflxJ dx = 0
x -.!: x dx
B
or
I
I PLB
--x
PL
=--
X318
2 ' B 3 0
2
x , =-B
\ 3
Therefore, whenever we encounter a triangularly .distributed loading curve, as in
I
the example to follow, we will know the magnitude of its resultant is its area,
and that its line of action is 2/3 the distance from the venex to the opposite side.
I
E x A M p L E 2.37~
Find the single-force resultant of the distributed loading acting on the' beam
shown in the figure.
800 N/m
500 N/m
SOLUTION
We shall consider the loading as the sum of the two distributions illustrated. Note
~ )x that we are familiar with each of the loadings III and (2)from Examples 12,35)and'
1-.--~-9
m~---- (Continued)
99
~300N/m
500N/m~500N/m
(2.361. Therefore, the given loading is equipollent to the following pair of single
forces:
F" = t(9113001 ~ 1350 N (6m from left end of beam as shown)
F" = (911500)= 4500 N (4.5m from left end of beam as shown)
The final step is to find the single force F,.that is equipollent to this two-force
system. Its value is obtained from the force condition:
F, = -1350, - 4500, ~ - 5850, N
And if the x coordinate of its vertical line of action iscalledx" we find the value of
X,. from the moment condition
(5850Ix, ~ 4500(4.51 + 1350(6)

X,. = 4.85 m
----,
Therefore, our solution is shown in the illustration below.
. rTIJJJJ~w~-
500N/m
9m
Equipollent
r--------
1--4.85m-
I I.--
5850N
I
i
I
I
This procedure of breaking up a loading into two ot more separate ones that are
individually familiar is called "composite parts." We shall study this method in
detail in Chapter 6 in conjunction with centroids.
We are now going to check the above results for F,.and its location by
integrating the distributed load. Equating moments about the pin P, we have
(J: f(x/ dX) Ix,1 J: xflxl dx

location
magnitude of force.alone moment of
of force.alonc resultant distributed load
f(x) (N/m)
resultant about P
800
I The loading curve in the figure has the equation
I
500 I 300
I fix) = 9x + 500
I
9 x(m) (Continued)
100
so that
o -9- + 500 ) dx J x, = f9(300

[f9(300X -9-x' 0 + 500x ) dx
9 9
[ - 920 -
300 X'I9 + 500x 1 J
or
x = -300 -
930
X'I9 + 500-X'I
20
= IF,I ~ 5850 N 28400 N . m
or
Xr = 4.85m las beforel
As a practical matter, in a situation such as that of Example 2.37, we

very seldom have an interest in determining a single-force resultant.
,
{
What we really want to do is avoid, if possible, explicitly evaluating the
integrals that arise when we evaluate the contributions of the distributed
forces to the equilibrium equations for the beam. This was achieved in
the example when we decomposed the distributed loading into two parts,
I and were able to recognize the force-alone equipollent of each part. Our
objective is then satisfied as suggested by the illustration below. The next
example will further illustrate this point.
I
II 350 N
4500N{ _-- _- I
500 N/m
800 N/m ~
Equipollent r""::::::'-='-:::"
--
f
--r-----l
I
9m 1_-4.5 m-I I
\-6m-
E x A M p L E 2.38 ......
Replace the distributed loading on the cantilever beam by an equipollent set of
forces.
400 Ib/ft
4 ft---1_3ft--l_3ft-I
(Continued)
101
SOLUTION
By viewing the distributed loading as a uniform pan plus two linearly varying
parts, and using the results of Examples 2.35 and 2.36, we obtain the results
shown in the next illustration. These three forces will collectively make the
same contributions to the equilibrium equations for the whole beam as will the
original distributed loading.
+ (400)(3) ~ 600 lb
200(4) ~ 8001b + (200)(3) ~ 300 Ib /]
/1
----- -----,_..... //" I
_-. // I
! -_ /' ,I
.<-' .._ ..-_ _--_ _- .. ~~~.
l~2 It-I-2 1,-1-1-2ft-I-2 ft-I

" I It
We now address the fact that loadings such as we have seen in

Examples 2"35 through 2"38 are actually (that is, physicallyj distributed
over surfaces. Force systems distributed over surfaces occur with great
frequency in engineering mechanics" We shall treat here the special case
in which each elemental force is perpendicular to the surface~that is,
simple pressure" To begin, let us suppose that the surface is plane Illatj
and rectangular in shape and that the pressure p(xl varies only with the
coordinate x, measured along one edge of the surface (Figure 2"32(all"
Z~P(X)Wdx
2 I
~ I p(x)dx
;-- hTml
w
,
~w-----.j~
I
l
\I
(a) (b)
Figure 2.32
Along a strip of infinitesimal width dx and length w we have a set of

infinitesimal forces plxl dx dy, which can be viewed as a line-distributed
force system, the intensity at each point being plxj dx" The resultant
of the strip of infinitesimal width is then plxJw dx Isee Figure 2"32(bIJ
1021
2.9 DistributedForce Systems 103
il I
with line of action at y = wl2. Since this is true in each such strip,
the pressure loading is equipollent to a line-distributed system along
the line y = (wl2l with plxlw = flxl being the intensity as shown in
Figure 2..33.* It is in this fashion that line-distributed force systems
pix) w ~ fix)
-~~L--~I~
Figure 2.33 The plane y = w/2.
arise in mechanics. When they are encountered in examples, the reader

should always bear in mind that they are the result of the process we
have just been through. This was the case in the three previous exam-
ples and will be again in the one to follow, in which we shall discuss its
resolution into a line load.
E x A M p L E
Water is held back by the submerged rectangular gate q in the figure. Find the
value of the single force land its location) that is equipollent to the fluid pressure
forces acting on (j.
SOLUTION
As the reader may recall from previous studies, the pressure p in a fluid ~atrest:
1. is equal in all directions at a point (Pascal's Law)

2. is constant through the fluid in each horizontal plane
3. causes a force that is normal to every differential area of surface on which it
acts
4. is equal to pgh, where p is the mass density of the fluid (taken to be constant
herel, and h is the depth below the free surface
(Continued)
*The same type of equipollent line loading alongy = [wIll occurs when p = pIx, yJ
if the pressure is symmetric about y = (w/21-that is, if pIx, yl is an even function of
(y - w/lj. In that more general case, f(xl = J~ pIx, y) dy.
Pressure = p(x) = pgh(x)
= pg(x cos 4
fix) ~ pw
/ ~ pgw(x cos q,)
z,k
pgh,w ~ 62.4(60)10
~ 37,400 Ib/ft
For a flat gate, the distributed loading caused by the water pressure therefore
forms a parallel force system. Multiplying the pressure by the constant width w of
the gate, we obtain the distributed line load as discussed in the preceding text and
as illustrated above.
]0 the above figure, we have used the fact that h and the "slanted co-
ordinate" x are related quite simply, as shown in the illustration at the left. The
single force that is equipollent to the system of parallel distributed forces caused
h=xcost/J by the water pressure is calculable from
I
60n
F, =
f flxl dx =
20./2
62.41101 r;; x dx
V2
pgw cos '"
~ 441-
x loon
Z
2 20./2
~ 1.41 x 1061b"
The location of this resultant follows from equating the moment about 0 of the
single-force resultant to that of the distributed loading:
x3160n
f I
60n
F, x, = xflx) dx = 441x'dx = 441-
20,/2 3 20J2
1.4i11061Ib
86.5 X 106
X, = 1.41 X 106
61.3 It
(Continued)
I.
I
*We shall show in Chapter 8 that this resultant equals the product of the pressure at
the centroid of the gate and its area. Thus, as a check, F. = 1162.4)4011160- 201J21 10}1=
1.41 x 106 lb.
104
1~f"
..
.,
Checking these results; using the idea of "composite parts" as in Example 2.37,
we have (see the figure aboveJ
F, = 140,)2112,500 = 707,000Ib
F, = 1140,)2124,900 ~ 704,000Ib
The single force that is equipollent to these tWo forces land thus also to the
original system of forces caused by' the waterl is obtained by the force condition
for equipollence:
F, ~ 707,000 + 704,000
,',
las beforel
The location of Fr is obtained by satisfying the moment condition for equi-

~i pollence:
"
40,)2)
M,o = F,x, ~ F, ( 20,)2 + -2- + F,120,)2 + 1140,)211
1.4111061x, ~ 40.00061 + 46.511061

x, = 61.3 It las beforel
We now broaden the scope of our study by again considering pressure

on a flat surface, S, but letting the surface boundary have any shape and
allowing the pressure to vary arbitrarily with both of the coordinates x
and y in the plane of the surface (Figure 2.341.
The resultant force F, is given by
F, = (-I<I L pix, y) dA = -pI<
105
y
x
Figure 2.34
where A is the area of the surface S. The resultant couple at the origin is
M,o = L (xl + YJI x iplx, y) dA(-kll
= -I LYPlx, y) dA + JL xplx, yl dA
We pause at this point to note that sometimes there is negative

pressure over a portion of the surface so that P = JJ
p dx dy might vanish
and the resultant is then the couple M,o. This occurs particularly in
the mechanics of solids where we are concerned with an internal sur-
face separating two portions of a body. In that application, "negative
pressure" is called tensile normal stress and ordinary or positive pressure
is called compressive normal stress. The resultant couple is usually then
referred to as a bending moment.
When P i= 0 there is, of course, a force-alone resultant, and if x".and
Yr locate its line of action,
x ~---
J xp dA
, J p dA
JypdA
y, = J P dA
]n the special case of p = constant,
J x dA
x, = J dA
(2.26)
J ydA
y, = J dA
where A is the area of surface S. We shall see in Chapter 6 that x, and y,

locate the centroid of the area of the plane surface in this case.
2,9 Distributed Force 'Systems 107
I
j
j
)
i
,. x
I
I
i~
,r
:(
,~ Figure 2.35
~
"
!
With regard to pressure on curved surfaces, there are a few special

properties of resultants we shall have occasion to use:
f..
1. For uniform pressure the component of the resultant in a given
direction is the pressure times the projection of the surface area onto the
plane perpendicular to that direction. To show that this is the case, we
refer to Figure 2.35, in which dA is an element of area on the surface and ii
is a unit vector normal to the surface. The elemental force is Ip dA)ii and
the component in the x direction is Ip dA)i1 . I, so that
L,
l":
P" = 1 Iii . lip dA
In the integration, :ii. varies since its direction is always normal to the
" surface. However} Ii . iis the cosine of the .angle between the normal to
the surface and x Iwhich is perpendicular to theyz plane). Thus Iii . Ii dA
is the projection, dA" of that element of the surface on,to the yz plane.
Since p is uniform
P" = P J ii .IdA =p J dAx
= pAx
where Ax is the projection of the surface area A onto the yz plane.

2. The resultant of pressure on a spherical surface has a line of
action through the center of the sphere Isee Figure 2.361. This follows
from the fact that each elemental force has a line of action through that
point. That is, we have here a concurrent distributed force system.
3. Pressure on a circular cylindrical surface produces 'no resultant
moment about the cylinder axis (see Figure 2.371. This follows from the
fact that each elemental force has a line of action that intersects that axis."
'Figure 2.36
.~
~. I
~
.t
.~
Figure 2.37
,.. _,' ;~..._ _ _ ;, _ )' _".' ,,' " _ ,:.,~:t

,Question 2.24 Would the above results I~Iand 13'be validift4e ,
5pressure.w,ere"not constant? '. _ ;, _ -"":".. - _ ' '."'..
.',.";,,._,./,'._'~""' .. ,.t.- ..-
,-.... ._'.. ~ _~:f.
, .. _. -. 'L. '--, -'c" ,\~'":
Question"2:25' 'Would. the moment about' the axis ofa cone, due
~ to'p~essureori-'a
" ~- i"
portion
of the cone's ~urfate, be zero?' ....
.. -, .... .... , .. ~; ,
We now tum to the most common example of a parallel force system

distributed over a volume. Suppose a body IS can be treated as if the
gravitational attractions of the earth on all of the particles of IS are par-
allel (vertical). The magnitude of the force exerted by the earth on an
element of mass in the body is gldmJ, where g is the strength of the grav-
itational field (or the acceleration of gravity', assumed constant over the
body, and dm = p dV is the mass of an elemental volume dV, where
the density Imass per unit of volume' is p (see Figure 2.38).
For this lassumed) parallel force system, the resultant force Iweight)
is vertical (downward' with magnitude
z
F,= tgdm=gtdm=mg
where m is the mass of the body. In order to produce the same moments
about the x and y axes as does the distributed system, we must have
x,F, = S xgdm
12.27'
Figure 2.38
= gf xdm
and similarly,
y,F, = f yg dm
12.28'
= gSydm
where x, and y, are coordinates of points on the line of action of the force.
alone resultant.
2.9 Distributed Force Systems 10~
Since F, = mg, Equations 12.271and 12.28) simplify to
(2.29)
Jydm
y,
m
The coordinates given by Equations 12.30) define a line on which the

center of mass C of the body is located. A third equation,
Jzdm
Z, = ---
m
pins down the actual point C. We usually write the coordinates of C as

(x, y, 2"1rather than Ix" y" z,J, incidentally.
Thus we see that, when it is practical to assume that the gravity
:'
forces acting on a body are parallel and g is constant, the earth exerts a
force Icalled the weight) with its line of action passing through the center
of mass of the body. This will be the case in all the exercises in this book.
In this case, the center of mass is sometimes called the center of gravity. *
We note that if in Equations 12.29) we replace the differential mass
dm by p dV, where p is the mass density and dv is the differential volume
enclosing dm, then we obtain three coordinate equations, the first of
which is
J
x p dV
x, = ----
J p dV 12.301
in which the denominator is the mass m of the body:
m = J dm= J pdV
! *The terms "center of mass" and "center of gravity," of course, refer to different
physical concepts-the former having to do with the mass distribution of _a body and
the latter having to do with the resultant of distributed gravitational attractions. In the
literature of mechanics "center of gravity" is used in two ways. One usage refers to the
location of the equivalent panicle (same mass as the body) that would cause this particle to
be subjected to the same force by an attracting particle as would be the actual body in
question; this center of gravity has a location which depends upon, among other things, the
orientation of the body. The second and more common usage refers to the location of the
point through which the resultant weight passes when the gravity field is unifolll) and
parallel. This center of gravity is independent of the orientation of the body, and, as we have
seen, it has the same location as the mass center of the body. Thus, in this case there, is no
reason to distinguish center of gravity from the center of mass except, perhaps, to remind
the reader of the physical phenomenon motivating location of the point. However, it is
important to realize that the solutions of some engineering problems require recognition of
the fact that a gravitational field is not uniform and paralleL An example of this arises in the
attitude control of an earth satellite. The resultant of the earth's gravitational attraction on
the satellite is a force through the mass center and a couple whose small moment is called
the "gravity gradient torque," and this is a very important factor in establishing control of
the satellite.
,
We see from Equation 12.301that if the density p of the body is constant, it

cancels, leaving
x
J x dV J x dV
, =---=---
J dV V
(2.3 II
and similarly
J ydV and z=---
J z dV 12.321
y, = --V- , V
The coordinates given by Equations 12.31)and 12.32)define the centroid

of volume of the body. We see that, for a body having constant density,
this centroid and the center of mass coincide.
When positions of non-obvious mass centers are needed in the
equilibrium problems in Chapters 3-5, these mass centers will be
indicated in the various figures.
We have presented in this section a number of special cases of
distributed force systems, particularly those for which the force-alone
resultant, or pethaps only its line of action, is easily recognized. It is for
these cases that the concept of a resultant is most useful. For the sake of
completeness, however, we set down here the method of handling the
general case. Suppose f is the intensity of a distributed force system Iforce
per unit of length or area orvolumel, and suppose we let dQ be an element
of length or area or volume as the case may be. Let r be the directed line
segment from point P to the point of application of an elemental force
f dQ. Then the resultant at P is
F, = J f dQ and M,p = J r x f dQ
This is nothing more than the obvious extension of our work with
discrete systemsj here, though, we are integrating instead .of summing.
Once F,and M,p are calculated, any further reduction follows in the same
manner as for a system of discrete forces.
t
PRO B L EMS / Section 2.9 3
a
2.169 Specify and locate the single force that is equipollent 2.170 A cantilever beam is loaded as shown in Figure
to the concentrated and distributed loads acting on the P2.170. Replace the distributed line load by an equipollent
shaded plate in Figure P2.169. system at the wall.
on
Yi hx la,
2500lbt 100Ib/ftI:OJ:.l1l300
1_ ft-1-------c-12ft_I
Figure P2.169
B
Ib/f~
x
r~l----t
I---L---i
Figure P2.170
w
th,
sur
0.0
2.1
roOr
2~171 Pressure acts on a r~ctangular solid as shown in in Figure P2.174. If the concrete weighs 22,600 N/rri3,
Figure P2.171. Find the single force that is equipollent to determine the ramp's weight and its line of action.
the given loading (magnitude and line of action).
Figure P2.174
Figure P2.171
,"
h '" ....
x
p ~
,
(2-)'
100
lb/!t' I. 6m
') 2.175 With reference to Figure P2.175:

x
a=100ft a. Show that a uniform pressure p within a conically
h~400ft shaped tank with a closed, flat base produces no
resultant moment about the axis of the cone.
2.172 Compare the resultant of Problem 2.136 with that b. Show further that the resultant of'this distr~buted '.
Ofthe distributed load shown in Figure P2.172. Tell why force system is zero.
. the force is the same but ~he line of action is slightly
qiflerent.

"'I
61'1b/ft 2.176 Replace the distributed loading shown in Figure

P2. I ? 6 by a single force.
;.173 Wind'velocity varies:with height due to a number
of factors, among which are' the earth's angular velocity,
~ind
, path curvature pressure ,
gradient, air density, lati.
tude, and viscosity~ In coastal areas, if the wind speed at
=,~N/mA_,,' ~
I 30 feet (called v301 is under 60 mph, then it is assumed that ~= ~~
, I
'I
it height z ft '(for z ~ 600 ft.), the wind velocity is Figure P2.176
I_--lm " I x
I'
I', '
2.177 The distributed load on the arch shown in Figure

I
,; P2.17? varies according to q = 300 cos 8 N/m. Find the
to Use thi? equation to ~ompute the total wind force resultant of this load, expressed as a force at Q and a couple.
i~ on the windward sides of tw'o buildings of equal areas
facing the wind, one with height h ~ 100 ft and width
w =50 It, the other with h =
50 ft and w ~ 100 It, Take
the value of V30 to be 20 f;usec and the dynamic pres-
s,ure to be (l /2)p v;CD, where p= wind density (use
0,0024 slug/It'l and CD ~ drag coefficient luse I AI,
2.174 A concrete ramp leading up to a hospital emergency

room door is 1 m wide and h~s the length and height shown Figure P2.1 77
~ 2.178 Repeat the preceding problem if q = 300 cos 20 2.180 4 kN/m

(see Figure P2.178}.
2kNI
IkN/m

7m--~.I-am~T
Figure P2.180
* 2.179 Repeat the preceding problem if q = 300 cos 30
Isee Figure P2.1 791.
2.181
aoo
Ib/ft 3001b/ft
Figure P2.181
Figure P2.179
For each of the following three problems, replace the

distributed loading on the beam by an equipollent .set of 2.182
forces.
500
Ib/ft 500
Ib/ft
Figure P2.182
-1-aft----l-I~-4 ft--I-a ft----1

1 ft 1 ft
\,
COMPUTER PRO B L EMS I Chapter 2
I
2.183 Write a computer program that will read the
components of the three-dimensional vectors IABI F and L,
whe:re B is a point on the line of action of force F, lAB is a \ "B
position vector from point A to B, and L has as components \ ',..
\\L ./ ""
a set of direction numbers of a line I through A. The
program is to calculate and print (aJ the moment of F about
Aj lb) the moment ofF about line ,; and Ie) the distance from
Avr~ A \ Line t ,
,
:;,
A to the line of action of F. Run the program for these
,,
data:rAB
L = a1 +
= 2.
+
41 -
12k.
3, -
6krnj IF = i - +2, 2kN;and
~
x
o y
Figure P2.183
2.184 Write a program that will read any number of forces
and .couples in a coplanar force system, along with a point
Answers to Questions 113
on the line of action of each of the forces. The program is 2.185 Write a program that will read any number of forces
then to compute and print tRe single-force resultant and parallel to the z axis (with +k suppressed), along with the
the equation of its line of actio'n. Run the program far these (x, y) coordinates of the points where each force pierces
forces and couples: the plane z = O. The program is then to compute and print'
the single-force resultant and its piercing point in the
F, = 10m - 200,lb, passing through lx, yl plane z = O. Run the program for this data:
= (1,31 It;
F1 = 200 N through the origin;
F, = 501 - 340,lb, passing through lx, yl
= 12,-51 ft; F, = 1000 N through lx, y) ~ (10, -20) m;
F, ~ 250,lb, lying along the line x ~ - 7 ft; F, ~ -580Nthroughlx,yl ~ 1-5, 151m;
F4 = 300 lb, lying along the positive x axis; F. = -900 N through:(x, yl = I~10, -21 m.
C, = 400 k lb-ft;
C, ~ - 730 k lb.ft.
Answers to Questions I Chapter 2

Q2.1 Yes. Gravity and electromagnetic forces are two such examples.
Q2.2 If the point lies on the line of action of the force, then, of course, the plane isn't
defined. But then the distance is zero, so the moment is zero.
Q2.3 In Figure 2.6 we see that Irl sin () is a constant, making IMp] the same for all
intersection points. This figure also shows by the right-hand rule that the
direction of the cross product is also independent of the intersection point. Thus
Mp is the same regardless of which point on F is intersected by r-that is,
regardless of which r is used to form it.
Q2.4 Yes! r x F = -(F x rl, so if F x r is used, the moment will be in the wrong
direction.
Q2.5 No. This was never required in the derivation, an~ thus it isn't necessary.
Q2.6 It would be the same.
Q2.7 No! M,is the same for all points on I But both Fil and F.1 make other contributions
to the moment of F about points lying on I-contributions perpendicular to M,-
so that the magnitude of moments of F about points on lis greater than or equal to
1M,!.
Q2.8 F3 atA is parallel to YQand it intersects ZQi thus, nO moment about either of these
lines!
Q2.9 lei/IFI
Q2.10 As we have seen, the moment of a force is the same regardless of its poiht of
application on the line of action.
Q2.11 laJYes, if and only if ~F ~ o. Ibl Yes, if and only if ~F ~ 0 and ~Mp = 0 at some
one point P.
Q2.12 No, because in this case LF could not possibly be the same. Recall that LF = 0 for
!' a couple! (This assumes the force and couple are not both zero, of course.l
Q2.13 Yes.
11 4 Chapter 2 Forces and Moments
~i
Q2.14 (aJ No, for they must form a couple. If they were horizontal, they would be
collinear and their moment would be zero about points on their common line of
action. (bj No, then they still couldn't form a couple. This time neither the force
condition nor the moment condition can be satisfied.
l
,
Q2.15 At B, C, and all other points, the resultant in this problem is the same: a couple of
240k lb-ft, unaccompanied by a force.
Q2.16 :EF = 0 becomes F, = 0, and EMp = 0 becomes M,p = O. or course, in the
context of equilibrium, the force-couple system we are considering is the set of all
the external forces and couples exerted on B.
Q2.17 Because it is made up of (3) couples of the form Ck, and/or (b) moments of forces of
form (xl + 01 x (F) + Fyi). The latter is (xF, - yFxlk, thus M,p has only a z
component.
Q2.18 It passes through 0, and therefore has zero moment about O.
Q2.19 As we have seen in Section 2.2, the vector r in r x F may intersect F at any point
on its line of action and the moment will be the samej in this case r = 4,
intersects the line of action of the force at point B.
Q2.20 We have shown in general that the force-alone resultant for a coplanar force
system lies in that same plane.
Q2.21 Yes, as they must be. Those of the line are [J - 1, j - 0, 0 - 1-11] = 11/1, it
and these are proportional to the direction numbers of the line of action of Fr>
which are II/ft, lift, lift).
Q2.22 In Equation 12.261, if f isnegative over a part (or partsl of the interval [0, L), it
simply contributes a negative result for that portion of the integrals. Note that if
J~ f dx = 0, then the resultant will be (at most) simply a couple.
Q2.23 No. It is the fact that all the forces intersect the center of the sphere (or the axis of
the cylinder) that makes the moment zero.
Q2.24 Yes, for the same reason as in the preceding answer.
Q2.25 Yes. Even though the forces caused by the pressure intersect the cone's axis non-
perpendicularly, they still produce no moment about this line.
Review Questions I Chapter 2

True or False?
1 A force on a body has to result from direct contact with another body.
2 A force has zero moment about any point on its line of action.
3 A force has no moment about a line parallel to its line of action.
Review Question's 115
!" 4 The magnitude of the moment of a force about a"line equals the product of the
component of the force perpendicular to the line and the distance between this
component and the line.
S The moment about a point P of the sum of a set of concurrent forces equals the
sum of the moments about P of the separate forces.
6 A couple has the same moment about any point.
7 If we know the moment of a couple about a point A, then we can find the moment
of the couple about a specified line Be even if A does not lie on'Be.
8 The sum of the moments, about any point, of the external forces acting on a body
at rest in a noninertial frame is always zero.
9 Two force and couple systems are equipollent: if they have either the same
resultant force or if the moments about some point P are the same for both
systems.
10 It is possible for a system consisting of a single couple to be equipollent to a
system of one force and 17 couples.
11 Given any system of forces and couples, and any point P, the system may be
reduced to an equipollent system comprised of a force at P and ,a couple (where
either or both might be zero).
12 The couple part of the resultant of a concurrent .force system will vanish at all
points.
13 If a system of forces is coplanar, there is a point Qin the planewh'ere the resultant
moment vanishes, and the moment also vanishes for any point on the line
through Q normal to the plane of forces.
14 If a system of forces is parallel then there is a line I at every point of which the
resultant moment is zero, and both the line I and the resultant force are parallel to
each of the forces.
15 If a system 51 of forces and couples has a "force-alone" equipollent system Si'
then 51 is either a concurrent, coplanar, or parallel force system:
16 The resultant of the distributed loading shown in the figure is a zero force and a
zero couple.
17 The simplest resultant of a general system of forces and couples is a "screw.

driver," that is, a collinear force and couple along a specific axis in space.
18 Let a general system of forces and couples be resolved into a resultant force at
point P and an accompanying couple. If the couple is normal to the force, then the
1
equipollent screwdriver consists of a single force.
Answers: 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. T 5. T 6. T 7. T 8.F 9. F 10. F 11. T 12. F

13. F 14. T 15. F 16. F 17. T 18. T
Analysis of
Equilibrium Problems
3.1 Introduction
3.2 The Free-BodyDiagram
3.3 Fundamental Applications of the Equilibrium Equations
3.4 Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting Bodies

or Parts of a Structure
116
. 3.1 Introduction 117
~3.1 Introduction
Now that we have studied forces and moments in some detail, we extend
our study to bodies in equilibrium under the action of these forces and
moments. This chapter is the heart of the book; the two chapters that
preceded it are preparation for it, while the two that immediately follow
I will be special applications of it. By the end of this chapter the reader
rI should be able to write and solve the equations relating the forces acting
on a body in equilibrium.
The equations of equilibrium IEquations 12.161and (2.171Jrelate cill
of the external forces acting on a body at rest in an inertial frame of
reference. In most engineering problems some of these external forces are
known (or prescribed) before any analysis is carried out; we usually refer
to these as loads. The external forces exerted by attached or supporting
bodies are called reactions; usually we can think of these as forces that
constrain the body against motion the loads tend to produce. It is by the
equations of equilibrium that we try to find these reactions. We empha"
,.
,
~. size, however, that a force "by any other name" is still a:force as far as
the equations of equilibrium are concerned; whether we think of a force
" as a cause (loadl or as an effect (reaction I makes no difference in the
equations of equilibrium. If a body could be equipped with sensors to
measure all of the forces acting on it, the sensors would not be able to
distinguish applied loads from constraint reactions.
To illustrate one of the difficulties encountered ,in statics, We
consider the problem of determining the forces (reactionsl exerted by the
supports of a diving board when a diver (whose weight is the loadl stands
on the end of the board as in Figure 3.1. The configura'tion shown is
that to which the equations of equilibrium must be brought to bear;
the distances from the supports to the diver are important because of
1, the moment equations. However, the diver's distance from each of the
supports depends upon how much the board is bent-the greater the
bending, or sag, of the board, the smaller the distance of the diver from
each of the supports. Clearly, the bending of the board depends upon the
weight of the diver and the stiffness of the board. Thus we might be
tempted to conclude that we can do nothing useful until we study the
geometry changes that occur when a body deforms. Fortunately, for many
engineering problems the picture is not quite as bleak as the one we have
Figure 3.1
118 Chapter 3 Analysis of,EquilibriumProblems
Q- L-a
Figure 3.2 Near-rigid diving board.
painted. Frequentlyvthe deformations arising from the application of

loads are small enough that gross changes in geometry can be ignored. A
rigid body is the idealization in which no deformation at all occurs, a rigid
body being one in which the distances between all possible pairs of points
are unchanged when the body undergoes a change in configuration. That
is, no portion of the body can change in shape or size. No real body is
rigid, but it may be near-rigid in the sense just described-that is, for
small deformations. If that can be assumed to be the case with the diving
board, we have the situation shown in Figure 3.2. Here the geometry with
which we have to deal is, for all practical purposes, independent of the
weight of the diver. The assumption of near-rigidity is to be understood
throughout this book with few exceptions that will be obvious. However,
as students proceed into further studies of mechanics Imechanics' of
deformable solids, mechanics of fluidsl, it is important for them to realize
that the equations of equilibrium are valid f'1r any body at rest in ~an
inertial frame, regardless of the degree of deforfnability and regardless' of
the phase (solid, liquid, or gasl.
In engineering mechanics, as in other are,asof science and applied
mathematics, we must be alert to the possibility of posing a meaningle'ss,
or silly, problem. For example, suppose we remove the interior support
from the diving board and inquire as to the hinge reaction when the board
is in equilibrium in the configuration of Figure 3.3. The difficulty here is
I _ .....,.
Figure 3.3 Equilibrium impossible. "
l' ,~
11
that this configuration cannot be an equilibrium configuration_ The

equations of equilibrium will tell us that, but, of course, we don't need
them here. The impossibility should be obvious from the fact that the
board is free to rotate as a rigid body about the hinge. We shall usually be
immune to the possibility of this situation if the body is constrained in
such a way that a rigid-body change in configuration is prohibited. Such
would be the case, for example, if one point of the body were fixed and
rotation about each of three distinct nonplanar axes through the point
were prohibited. .
~3.2 The Free-Body Diagram

The free-body diagram is an extremely important and useful concept for
the analysis of problems in mechanics. It is a figure, usually sketched,
depicting (and hence identifying precisely) the body under consideration.
On the figure we show, by arrows, all of the external forces, and moments
of couples, that act on the body. Thus, we have a catalog, graphically
displayed, of all the forces that contribute to the equilibrium equations
lor the equations of motion if the problem is one of dynamics). Of
particular importance is the fact that the free-body diagram provides us a
way to express what we know about reactions (forexample, that a certain
reaction force has a known line of action) before applying the equations of
equilibrium. This is best illustrated by example.
A,
I ;
k-a-t-B L-a-iw,
Figure 3.4 Free-body diagram of diver
and board.
! t Let us return to the diver and the diving board of the preceding
section. We want to emphasize that a body is whatever collection of
material we choose to focus on; we shall choose here to let the body be the
diver and the diving board, taken together. The free-bodydiagram is then
shown in Figure 3.4.* The meaning of, and reasoning behind, the
symbols appearing on the diagram are as foHows:
*One need not be an artist to draw good free-body diagrams. The roughest of sketches
will suffice as long as the body is clearly identified.
120 Chapter 3 Analysis of Equilibrium Problems
I. W, is the weight of the diver; thus the resultant force exerted by

the earth on the diver by way of gravity is W, times a unit vector
downward. The line of action of this resultant is through the mass center
of the diver. Similarly, W, is the weight of the board, and the line of action
of its resultant passes through the mass center of the board. In each case
the letter and the arrow identify the vector description of the force,
W,I- Ji or W,I- iJ, and the location of its line of action. It is this informa-
tion that will be needed in the equations of equilibrium.
2. The board is connected at its left end to the supporting structure
by a hinge; basically, a cylindrical bar or pin fits into holes in brackets at
the end of the board. In the absence of any significant friction we perceive
that the pin exerts only pressure on the cylindrical surface of the hole. We
saw in Section 2.9 that the resultant of this pressure will be a force with a
line of action through the center of the hole. Because we don't know in
advance the direction of this resultant, we express it by its unknown
components Ax and Ay- That is, the force exerted on the left end is
A) + A,.j. The letters and arrows at the left end constitute a code for
how we have chosen to express the force, each arrow denoting a unit vec-
tor in the direction of the arrow.
3. The interior support is perceived to exert pressure perpendicular
to the board. While we don't know precisely the location of the line of
action of the resultant, if this pressure is distributed over a small region
then we know the line of action close enough for engineering purposes.
Because the pressure acts perpendicular to the board here, we know the
direction of theforce-alone resultant lit is verticall. Thus the force may be
expressed in terms of a single unknown scalar B; that is, the diagram is
communicating that the force may be expressed as Bj without any loss
of generality.
Question 3.1 Why does the force exerted on the board by the
divei;~..feet not appear on this free-body diagram?
It is important to realize that each of the forces appearing on the

free-body diagram (Figure 3.41 is in fact the resultant of a distributed
force system. We recall that the resultant of a force system embodies
all of the characteristics of that system that show up in the equations of
equilibrium. Thus, for example, when we write the equations of
equilibrium for the diver-plus-board body, the only information we can
hope to determine about the hinge pressure is its resultant, and that is
precisely what is depicted on the free-body diagram. Shortly we shall look
at several other kinds of mechanical connections between bodies and
identify the nature of the resultants at these connections.
L
2
--~
t
Figure 3.5 Free-body diagrams of board
and of diver.
The hinge reaction in the diver-plus-board problem alternatively

could be determined by an analysis in which the board alone is the body
under consideration. The free-body diagram of the board is shown in
Figure 3.5, where we see that the external forces are the same as before
except that the weight of the diver does not appear. This is because the
free-body diagram does not include him, and thus we have a new external
force, P, that is the resultant of the pressure exerted on the board by the
feet of the diver. The free-body diagram of the diver communicates (by
the arrow I that the same scalar P multiplies an upward unit vector to
express the force exerted on him by the board, that is, the force (vector)
exerted by the board on the diver is the negative of the force (vector)
exerted by the diver on the board. This is an example of the action-
reaction principle, which states that, when two bodies interact mechani~
cally, the resultant exerted by the first body on the second body is the
(vectorl negative of that exerted by the second body on the first. This is
often loosely referred to as Newton's Third Law. The principle is almost
self-evident when we consider two.bodies in intimate contact so that the
interaction between the bodies is that of force systems distributed over
the surface of contact. At each point on the common surface the
I ,. mechanical action (force per unit areal of the first body on the second is
the negative of what is exerted on the first body by the second. Because
the force intensities are opposites, the resultants likewise must be the
negatives of one another.
Before we take up a variety of examples of free-body diagrams, it will
be helpful to identify the resultants that are transmitted at different types
of connections between bodies. To do this we follow the procedure
we used on the diving-board hinge, that is, we study the particular
"distributed-over-a-surface" force system involved and deduce what is
,.
i the most general form of the resultant of that distributed system. This
process could be tedious, but there is a shortcut that fortunately is in
harmony with the intuition of most engineering students. The reasoning
that leads to the correct conclusions is based upon the rigid-body motion
that would be inhibited, or impeded, if each body attached to the one
under consideration were to be fixed in the frame of reference. If there are
several attachments, then to determine the resultant exerted by one of

them we first imagine the others to be removed. We then determine how
the single attachment hinders a rigid motion of the body. In particular, if
we desire the resultant at a point A, then the force part of the resultant
will have a component in any direction in which a displacement of A is
inhibited. That is, if the connection resists a movement of A in a given
direction, then the resultant force at A must have a component in that
direction. The couple part of the resultant at A will have a component in
the direction of any line through A about which the rotation of the body is
inhibited. Results of applying this reasoning process are presented in
Table 3. I for several types of connections.
The first item III in Table 3.1 is a reminder that, when there is no
special freedom associated with a connection, the resultant of the
distributed forces of interaction is/ageneral force and couple. In this case
we know nothing about the direction of either, and hence each must be
described by three unknown components. Under "Plane Counterpart"
are displayed the symbols used to denote the connections when we have
reason to be concerned only with forces having lines of action in a given
plane together with moments perpendicular to that plane. (In our
discussion of the diver and the diving board we tacitly assumed that to be
the case.1 We shall discuss this assumption in more detail later in one
of the example problems. Unless otherwise indicated, items II.IX in
Table 3.1 are based on the assumption of negligible friction at contact
surfaces. The student should study them to gain familiarity with the
reasoning process and with the symbols that often will be used in
the figures that depict exercise problems. A brief description of each
follows:
II. An ordinary door hinge is the most common example of this

connection. In the absence of friction, rotation is free to take place about
the axis of the hinge; thus the only vanishing component of the resultant
at a point on the axis is the component of the couple along the axis. Of
course if the hinge is "rusty," friction will produce a component of couple
in that direction, too, and the resultant will revert to that of 1.
III. If there is no resistance to sliding along the hinge axis, the
component of force in that direction also vanishes. An example of this
connection is a cylindrical pin attached to one body and snugly fit into a
cylindrical cavity in a second body if the pin is free to slide without
friction along the cavity.
IV. If the pin of item III is inserted in a slot, there is only one
component of force and one component of couple. That is, the pin is free
to slide in two directions lin the plane of the slot I and to turn about an axis
that is perpendicular to the plane of the slot. If a cylindrical roller is
inserted between two Inecessarily parallell surfaces, the same kind of
resultant is generated provided the contact is along a region sufficiently
narrow to be approximated as line contact. In that case we could reason
~"'" .~
-T~~le
3.1
Sel~cted Connectioris and the Corresponding Unknown Components of Resultants on Body li'lshaded)
Reaction on IJ
Type of Connection [shaded} Plane Counterpart
l. General
interaction Ino freedom!
F.
I'} [el Id}
II. Hinge Pin
or
... clevis
pin
i i
Same Same
III. Rod in
sleeve
(hinge
..
without
thrust
support)
Same as II
(Continued)
I
..' ,,'
:"C.
124 Chapter 3 Analysis of' Equilibrium Problems
, .
Table 3.1 (Continued)
Reaction on B I
Type of Connection I:
Ishadedl Plane Counterpan
IV. Pin in slot, or roller, or line'
to,ntact along smooth surfa~e
v. Ball-and-
socket, or self.
aligning bearing, .j'
or local contact
with rough
surface
~.
F,
t F,
\
J
VI. Ball bearing
..
~
~~
Same as II
(Continued)
";.
'"
Table 3.1 (Continued)

~,~ Reaction on IJ
::1 Type of Connection Ishadedl Plane Counterpan
VII. Rollerbearing
. il;
l
';\' t
, ~
F,
Same as II
VIII. Cable(rope,wirel
6...
~:_
. ",'
"';r . Same as the figure at the left
, IX. Clevis pinned to

collar supporting
smooth bar
c, Same as II
that the resultant should be a force alone. However, not knowing in

advance where along the contact line the resultant will act, we express
, .. the resultant as a force with preassigned location on this contact line and
a companion couple.
V. A ball-and-socket connection is a spherical ball on one body
snugly fit into a spherical cavity in the other. No rotation is inhibited, but
the attachment point (center of ball or socket) cannot move in any di-
rection. In self-aligning bearings, the bearing housing is supported in this
manner. The same resultant is also transmitted when one body is in local
("point"j contact with a surface of a second body, there being friction at
the interface.
VI. The balls in a ball bearing will exert what are essentially radial
point loads on a circumferential line on the surface of a shaft. These
produce no moments about diameters of the shaft that intersect that
] . circumferential line. Consequently, the resultant is a force (with
126 Chapter 3 Analysis of EquilibriumProblems
components Fx and Fyi having a line of action through the center of the
shaft. All of this assumes that the bearing provides no thrust support-
that is, resistance to motion of the shaft along its axis. The figure is of
course simplified in that the bearing races are not shown.
VI!. The rollers in a roller bearing exert loads essentially distributed
over Jongitudinal(axiall lines on the surface of the shaft. Consequently,
there is resistance to turning about diameters. Thus the possibility of a
couple perpendicular to the axis of the shaft exists in addition to the
resultant of Fx and Fy.
VJI!. A flexible cable or wire exerts a tensile force in the direction
of tangency to the cable at the attachment point. Unless otherwise indi-
cated we shall assume that cables are suffiCiently taut that the center-
line will be a straight line joining its ends.
IX. The last item is a composite of the clevis pin IJlI and. rod-in
sleeve IIlII. Note that freedom for rotation about the pin axis eliminates
one component of the couple shown in Ill. That vanishing component
is along the axis of the pin.
We now illustrate the construction of free-body diagrams through
several examples. As we do this, we keep in mind that the equilibrium
equations are
I:F=O or F, = 0
LMp = 0 or Mrp = 0
where P is any point, and the subscript "r" denotes resultant (of the
external force systeml. The free-body diagram will provide:
1. A catalog of all the external forces and/or couples acting on the

body.
2. A graphical display of how much we know (directions, locations)
about unknown reactions.
3. The geometric dimensions needed for establishing moments of the
fortes.
Thus, we shall find that the free-body diagram will include all of the
information to be incorporated in the equations of equilibrium.
In many of the examples and subsequent exercise problems,
information is given only for two spatial dimensions. It is reasonable for
the student to be uneasy about the fact that we have not set down any " ,
criteria by which to decide when we can ignore considerations of the third
dimension. Universally applicable criteria are n'ot easy to establish, and
this, like other issues of mathematical modeling in mechanics, requires
!f,.~
experience. Working a large number of three-dimensional problems will
provide students some of the experience with which to supplement their
raw intuition.
f
. ,
E x A M p L E 3.1~
Draw the free-body diagram of block 8.
SOLUTION
From our previous discussion of item VIII in Table 3.1, each cable is replaced, on
a sketch of IJ, by the single, tensile force which it exerts on B at A in the direction
. Flgu~e1 along its length. The weight is replaced by the equipollent force-alone resultant of
t.he gravity forces, acting as always through the mass center of the body.
In the extended Problem 3.1 57, we outline a proof of the fact that if a body is
in equilibrium under the action of three forces, then these forces are necessarily.
coplanar and either concurrent or parallel. When we examine the equilibrium of
Bfurther in Section 3.3, we shall find that in the case suggested by Figure 1, the
forces acting on IJ are concurrent. If the cables are parallel as shown at the le(tJ
however, then the free-body diagram depicts a system of three parallel forces. It is
interesting that even in three dimensions, the case of bodies in equilibrium under
the action of three forces is never more complicated than one of the two types
above!
E x A M p L E 3.2~
Sketch the free-body diagram of the small advertising sign and supporting post,if
there is a steady wind load producing the resultant shown. The sign itself is sheet.
metal with a weight of 200 lb, and the post weighs SOOlb.
(Resultant
of pressure
from wind)
SOLUTION
.-,
'/
10ft
fJ--- When we separate the sign and post from the ground we see that the external
!
forces on the body are:
a. The resultant of the pressure from the wind.

, b. The weights of the sign and the post.
c. The reaction of the ground on the base of the post.
Thus the free-body diagram is as shown in the illustration.

(Continued)
127
<,
Note that we have tacitly assumed that the masS center of the POSt is on its
centerline and that the sign itself is of constant thickness and constant density
so that its mass center is in the "middle." It is important to realize that the
connection of the post to the ground provides resistance to displacement in every
direction and r~sistance to rotation about any axis through the base. Thus the
force and couple there will each have three unknown components.
. ,..... . "." '. . ..;"; ... ' "

.. '.' ':'. ";'.",.
Questi!O~.3~~;'..wWy has It beep u9he.~essaryte,r,~pecify the elevation o( ":
.the mass center of the,., post on the free-body
. -- diagram?
"
...
500 Ib
I'
I:
I.;
I.
R,
<'C, I/"
c,
E x A M p L E
Sketch the free-body diagram for the pliers and for each of its pans.
10 Ib
3.75in.--
SOLUTION
The only external forces acting on the pliers are the hand-applied IO-pound forces
and the reactions of the nut being gripped. The free-body diagram is shown in the
illustration.
128
.'
10 Ib
F,
,..
F,
F, , "
:<,
,,' "j
f,~_'
Removing the pin that holds the two parts together, the free-body diagrams
of the individual parts are shown in the next illustration. Note that the action
transmitted at the pin is just a force since the pin provides no resistance to relative
rotation of the pans. Note further that the action-reaction principle has be~n
satisfied automatically in depicting the pin forces.
.,'
'ip ROB L E M SI Section 3.2
I
"Draw a free.body diagram of body A in each of the fol.
I,
lowing problems.
il
3.1 Body A in Figure P3.1 is a uniform 40.1b rod, 6 fdong.
3.2 Body .A in Figure P3.2 is a crowbar of negligible

weight. Assume the force of the man's hand -is directed
along his arm} and that the force of the nail is along the
axis of the exposed part of the naiL
30lb
Figure P3.1
129
3.3 Body A in Figure P3.3 is the 200-N uniform cylinder 3.7 Body .A in Figure P3.? is the boom of the crane,
in equilibrium on the rough plane. The cable is parallel to weighing I000 lb.
the plane.
6ft- IBft---'EI2f'-1
3.4 Body A in Figure P3.4 is the 30-kg ladder, together
1
t-
with a 70-kg painter.
6ft
3.5 Body ..A in Figure P3.S is the lower of two cylinders C'l.'o\e I
resting on a floor between two walls. All surfaces are
smooth (meaning friction is negligible! . .A weighs 40 N.
3.6 Body .A in Figure P3.6

weighing 600 N.
is the 5.m uniform bar,
2 ft
h
6 ft
i
Winch , i
,.
Figure P3.7
3.8 Body A in Figure P3.8 is a SO-lb door, supported by

two hinges, each capable of exerting thrust in the direc-
tion of the hinge axis as well as a lateral force and couple.
3.9 Body A in Figure P3.9 is a 100-N solid door. Each

hinge can exert forces in all three directions and couples
about both lateral axes (parallel to y and z, in this case).
Figure P3.3
3.10 Body .A in Figure P3.1 0 is the 180.N "comer bar, "
supponed by three smooth eyebolts.
Figure P3.4
Figure P3.8
z
'-90cm-
z
Figure P3.5 a.3m
D.2m Figure P3.9 Figure P3.10
D.2m
a.3m O.4m
x I ~ 0.6 m
......
3.3 Fundamental Applications of the
Equilibrium Equations
The most common problem in statics is the determination of unknown
forces and couples which together with prescribed forces and couples hold
a body in equilibrium. As we have seen in our discussion of free-body"
diagrams, the unknown forces and couples will be expressed in terms of
the least number of unknown scalars (componentsl consistent with what.
I
is known about directions. There arises then the question: will the
equilibrium equations provide a sufficient number of algebraic equations,
relating these scalars so that they may be found? At first glance we might
be tempted to answer with an unqualified yes, since EMp = 0 for every
point P so that there is no limit to the number of moment equations of
equilibrium. However, in Section 2.5 we found that for a system of forces
12.191
Thus, if EMp = 0 for some point P, and EF = 0, then EMQ auto-

matically vanishes for every point Q. Therefore, the equations ofequi-
librium are the two independent vector equations
EF = 0
EMp = 0
or in the notation of resultants
F, = 0
Mrp = 0
Question 3.4 These equations perta(n when the body is 'in .

equilibrium relative to what frames of rfference?
The vanishing of a vector is guaranteed by the vanishing of three distinct

(usually taken to be mutually perpendicular) components. Thus the two
vector equations are equivalent to six component Iscalarl equations. If we
have more than six unknown scalars, then we cannot have enough
independent equations, and the problem may fall into a category known
as static indeterminacy. When that is the case additional
l information,
usually having to do with the deformability of the body, is needed to find
the unknown forces.
In many situations the equilibrium equations provide fewer than six
independent scalar equations. To illustrate this, consider the block
supported by two taut cables (Example 3.1) as shown again in Figure 3.6.
First we observe from the free-body diagram that all the external
F, F,
~,
".
;
\
I
Figure 3.6
forces have lines of action passing through the same point IA)'; in
Chapter 2 we called this a concurrent force system. Since LMA = 0
regardless of the values of FI and F" the moment equation provides no
information about these forces. More generally, we may state' that
whenever the external forces on a body constitute a concurrent system,
there is a moment equation of equilibrium that is identically satisfied,
and the greatest number of scalar equations relating the forces will be
I
I
three. I
The other equilibrium equation, LF = 0, is
FII-cos 450
i + sin 45,) + F,lcos 30 i + sin 3011 + WI-II
0
= 0 ..~ .. '.'
or, because the iand j coefficients must separately add to zero, we get two
equations in two unknowns:
'I
-FI cos 45 + F, cos 30 = 0
i, .
and
FI sin 45 + F, sin 30 - W = 0 ,
"' ..
from which
FI = 0.897W
and
,. Fi = 0.732W'
We observe that there were only two independent scalar equations
embodied in LF = 0 because all the external forces have lines of action
in a single plane and thus none of the forces has a component in the
direction Iz) perpendicular to that plane. In the language of Chapter 2, our
force system here is coplanar and concurrent. Our two scalar equations
express the vanishing of the sums of components in the x and y direc-
tions, respectively. We shall often write them using the notation
and LF). = 0
*The block must be "hanging" in such a way that the mass center is directly below Ai
otherwise !:MA - O.
F,
Figure 3.7
Before leaving this illustrative problem let us see what would happen
if there were a third cable helping to support the block as shown in Fig-
ure 3.7. The force system is still coplanar and concurrent so that there
still will be only two independent equations, now relating F" F2, and F3
(The symbol.!:.- is a reminder that the unit vector in that direction has
been suppressed from each term in the equation to follow. Some call it
the "positive direction" for the force summation.)
..:t.. "LFx = 0
- FI cos 4So + F2 cos 30 + F3 cos 60 = 0

j,'
,
;'
+\ "LFy = 0
i"
F, sin 45 + F2 sin 30 + F3 sin 60 - W= 0
With three unknowns and only two equations the problem is now
statically indeterminate.* We need more information to determine Fi,
F2, and F3. Problems such' as this are solved in engineering courses
variously titled Mechanics of Solids, Mechanics of Materials, Mechanics
of Deformable Bodies, or Strength of Materials, where the equilibrium
equations are supplemented by information describing the manner in
which the cables stretch. Most of the problems in this book are statically
determinate, but it is important to realize that the equations of equi-
librium are necessary ingredients in the analysis of statically indetermi-
nate problems as well. It's just that statics alone is insufficient to solve
such problems.
We shall not attempt to catalog all the various circumstances in
which one or more of the component-equations of equilibrium is
identically satisfied, but we shall point out some commonly occurring
situations as they arise in the examples.
Before proceeding to the examples we derive some results about two
situations that will arise many times in both the examples and problems,
:i' and that will facilitate solutions when these situations arise.
*Note here that a problem can be statically indeterminate with fewer than seven
unknowns.
,.
I
Belt, Rope, Cord, or Cable Passing Over a Pulley on Frictionless Bearings.

Referring to the free-body diagram, the equilibrium equation requiring. ,
that LMbming"i, = a yields (provided the mass center of the pulley is on
the bearing axis)
, ,
(The symbol'+) means that the unit vector out of the page has been
T, \
suppressed from each term in the equation.) Thus
That is, the belt tension is the same on both sides of a pulley supponedin '
equilibrium by frictionless bearings.
Two-force Body (or Member). Suppose that a body is held in equilibrium

by two (and only twoj external forces. We let the plane of the page contain
the points of application of these forces as shown below. In order that
LF = 0, we must have F1 = - F2 so that the free-body diagram might
now appear as shown in the second figure. But wait! These two forces
constitute a couple and LM # 0 unless the lines of action of the two
forces coincide. Thus the proper free-body diagram must be the third
figure below.
F, F,
1
1,1
1
j
.f
We now see that the two forces acting on the body must have a common
line of action -the line ;oining the two points of application of the forces.
Individual members in truss structures are idealized as two-force bodies;
we shall study the analysis of such structures in Chapter 4.
While we intentionally have not made a clear separation of discus- ,.1,.'
sions of two- and three-dimensional problems, the examples that fol-
low are ordered so that the two.dimensional ones come first. In these,
where we are dealing with a planar force system, it is important to realize
that three of the component equations are satisfied identically. If the xy
plane is the plane of the force system, LF, '" a and each force produces,
with respect to a point in the plane, a moment perpendicular to the plane.
Thus, if P is a point in this plane, then ILMplx '" a and ILMpj, '" O. For
this restricted class of problems, then, the component equations not
,.
,.~-<.":,'::,,~-" ---------------------------------------------------- ,;
3.3 Fundamental Applications of the. Equilibrium Equations 135
automatically satisfied are
I:Fx = 0
I:F, = 0
(I:Mpl. = 0
There follow several examples of problems of equilibrium. The

student should note the central role played by the free-body diagram in"
each of these analyses. Throughout the book, where the weights of
bodies subjected to other loads are not given as data in examples and in
problems, it is to be understood that these weights may be neglected in
comparison with the other loads.
E x A M p L E 3.4 .......
A uniform sphere of weight W is supported by smooth (frictionlessl plane surfaces
as shown in the figure. The plane of the page is vertical. (al Find the forces exerted
by the supporting surfaces on the sphere. (b) Investigate the' implications of
friction at the contact surfaces. 'I
SOLUTION
(a) The free-body diagram shows that each unknown force has a line of action
through the sphere's center, which is also its mass center. This is an example ora
body held in equilibrium by three forces (see' Problem 3.157 for a general
discussion). We see that
~ I; is satisfied"since each of the external forces has a line of action through G

The force-equation of equilibrium, EF = 0, yields
FI[cos45'1 + sin 45'Ji + F,[ -cos 60'1 + sin 60'TI + W[ -TI = 0

Separating the coefficients of i and;, we get
j i coefficients: III
which we could obtain directly by LFx = 0, and,
..fi .j3
[21
; coefficients: -FI +-F, = W
2 2
(Continued)
I
< 11
which we could get from I:Fy = O. (To do this, we would just sum up the venical
components of all forces and omit the unit vector j as we go.) The solution to
Equations (I) and (2) is
F, ~ O.518W
F, ~ 0.732W
(h)If friction exists at the contact surfaces, we have two additional unknown
components of forces. We call them F3 and F4 as shown on the free-body diagram.
The moment-equation of equilibrium I:Mc = 0 yields
'+) F4R + F,R = 0
or
From I:F = 0 we have, as before, two scalar equations, but now in the four
unknowns FI, F2, F3, and F4 These two equations plus the result of balancing
moments, F4 + FJ = 0, constitute three equations in four unknowns and hence
the problem is statically indeterminate.
- - - -----.
Question 3.5 Why can't we sum moments at some other point to get a
fourth equation?
We note that if one surface is smooth, the remaining friction force vanishes
(from the moment equationj, and Ft and F2 revert to the same answers we found in
pan (a).
E x A M p L E 3.5 .......
Let the sphere of Example 3.4 be nonuniform; that is, the mass center C does not
coincide with the geometric center 0. Taking the surfaces to be smooth, identify
all possible equilibrium configurations of the sphere.
SOLUTION
From the free-body diagram we see, as before, that the lines of action of the two
reactions, Ft and F2, pass through the geometric center (OJof the sphere. Thus in
order for I:Mo = 0 to be satisfied, the mass center C must lie either directly above
or below 0.
The reader may recognize that this probleITl;is similar to that of finding the
equilibrium positions of a body supported in the manner of a pendulum, as shown
in the next illustration. The equations of equilibrium tell us that there are two
such positions: one where the mass center is directly below the support and one
(Continued)
136
". ,"
.. "
Unstable
equilibrium
Pendulum
Stable
equilibrium
where the mass center is directly above. Our experience tells us that the body will
not remain (without additional restraintl in this second position. This con-
figuration is said to be an unstable equilibrium configuration and the first is said
to be a stable equilibrium configuration. The important point to recognize is that
the equilibrium equations do not themselves distinguish these two types of
equilibrium states.
~,'
E x A M p L E
Find the reactions on the ends of the simply supported beam.
2001b/!t 600lb
._. B
A
6!t~--kl2ft~
SOLUTION
I L.
I
I'
~
, From Section 2.9, we recognize the resultant of the distributed load to be the area
i
beneath the loading curve, or 1200 lb. Its line of action is at the center of the
1.
(Continued)
, 'I
~;
~,~l
137
ft
loaded segment as indicated on the free-body diagram of the beam. Using the
f
equilibrium equations,
,EF ~ 0
yields :1'
i .
i ~:
I
I
LJ + L,J+ 1200(-11 + 6001-11 + RI ~ 0
i
which has the following component equations: I
i,
I,
i i'
,
I ,:
I
!
and
L, - 1200 ~ 600 +R = 0 (11
~MA ~ 0
:1
, I
yields
I
"
3(1200Jl-kl + 8(600Jl-k) + 10Rk = 0

,
from which
-3600 - 4800 + lOR = 0 -]

R = 840lb
Substituting R into Equation III, I

L, ~ 1800 - R ~ 1800 - 840
L, ~ 960 Ib
I
t
It is often worthwhile to use another moment equation of equilibrium to check ! f,'i! ,,','
I!
the numerical results. Let's see if ~MB = 0 is satisfied by the values we have I',
! ,~
calculated for Lx, L)I' and R. f
i, .
2(6001k + 7(1200)k + 10L,1-kl

~M8 = 0
= 0 J J
it
,
"
t
[
1200k + 8400k - 101960)k = 0 I"
.,.,
( (9600 - 9600)k ~ 0
j ~
:~
,i'.
This check correctly suggests that we could have solved this problem using
'IL
il
the three scalar equations: r.Fx = 0, IrMA!: (orsimply r.M..1 = 0, and :LMB = O. :,
Problems 3.40~3.42 are concerned with the possibilities of using two and three ii'
moment equations when the force system (loads and reactions) is coplanar.
*In the future, we shall shorten (:EMA)z to simply :EMA when the problem is a "plane"
onei when this is the case, only liZ moments" are normally written.
138
,.
,.,j
E x A M p L E
The "A-frame" is subjected to the lS0-N load as shown. Find the pin reaction atA
and the force exerted by the roller at C.
, A
1.5m 1.5 m
SOLUTION
,.1,
Referring to the free-body diagram we see that we may obtain the reaction at C
by summing moments at A. Since the force system is coplanar we may easily use
the "scalar" form of the moment equation. Thus, counting counterclockwise
moments as positive,
c
j '+) ~MA = 0
I
31FIZ) - 411501 = 0
F ~ 400N
~,.
The student should realize (or confirm! that this scalar equation is precisely what
results when we write the vector equation :EMA = 0 and then pick off coefficients
of k. Were we instead to take clockwise moments as positive, then
yields
-3(FIZ) + 4(150) = 0
which is nothing more than the result of writing :EMA = 0 and picking off
coefficients of 1- kj'.
The component forms of:EF = 0 are
and
From the first, we find
A, + 150 - ~ (4001 ~ 0
(Continued)
,I
139
.,
so that
I
From the second,
A, + F(2 = 0
so that
A, = -200 N
These are the same equations we would obtain by writing :EF = 0 and then
picking off coefficients .of Iand j, respectively.
In conclusion, the magnitude of the pin reaction at A is ~ A; + Ai ~
)(1961' + (200)' ~ 280 N, and vectorially the force exened by the pin on the
frame at A is 1961 - 200, N. The force exerted on the frame at C is
In each of the next three examples a part of the body to be analyzed is

either a pulley on bearings of negligible friction, or a two-force body. In
order to use the facts we have developed about these elements earlier in
this section, we must employ:
1. The fact that, when a body is in equilibrium, each of its pans is

in equilibrium.
2. The action-reaction principle.
Problems that require the separation of a body into two or more parts are
discussed in the next section. Thus these next three examples preview
some of that material. ..
E x A M p L E 3.8~
The pulley is supponed by frictionless bearings at the end of the uniform 750-N
cantilever beam. The IOOO-newton block is supported by the cable that passes
over the pulley as shown. Neglect the weight of the pulley and find the reaction of
the wall on the beam.
SOLUTION
~~~~-2.Sm
At first glance the free-bodydiagram of the beam, pulley, block, and pan of the
cable suggests that possibly this problem is statically indeterminate because we
have a coplanar force system Ithree independent equations of equilibrium! and
(Continued)
140
T
~~ ._c.
M R,1-1.25m--125m-
T c ~ ",m~
M t-125m--125m-
750N IOOON
R, 750 N
'.;.
four unknowns. It is the nature of the attachment lfrictionless bearings) of the

pulley to the beam that renders the problem statically determinate, however.
We first cut the cable between the block and pulley and sketch the resulting
two free-body diagrams. Note that we have used the previously obtained result
that the cable tension is the same on both "sides" of the pulley/and we have also
used the action-reaction principle.
For the block,
+1 "EF, = 0
T - 1000 = 0
T = 1000 N
Returning to the original free.body diagram Ibeam, block, pulley, and part of the
cable!, we equate the moments about A tozeroj this eliminates two jRx, Ry) of the
remaining three unknowns:
'<:l "EM. = 0
M - 1750 NII1.25 ml - 11000 N1I2.80 ml
+ C~ON)[(2.5 + ~)m] + C~ON)(~ m) = 0
where we have used the result from above that T = 1000 N. Thus,
M= 1670N"m
Next we equate the sums of external forces in thex and ydirections to zero, again
using the original free-body diagram:
T
"EF=O=R --=0
'.j2
1000
R. = .j2 = 707 N
T
"EF = 0
, = R, - 750 + -.j2 - 1000 = 0
(Continued)
141
I
..
1000
R, ~ 750 - .,fi + 1000 ~ 1040 N
In summary, the force and couple exerted on the beam by the wall are,
respectively,
7071 + 10401N
and
1670 !:> N . m
E x A M p L E 3.9 .......
A dumping mechanism is shown in the figure. The weight of, the bed plus
contents is 1200 lb. It is in equilibrium in the given position with mass center at
C. Find "the force in the strut AB, which contains a hydraulic cylinder for raising
and lowering the bed.
-----3>
x
D,
SOLUTION
Recognizing that the strut AB is a two-force member, we draw the free-body
diagram as shown in the figure:
Summing moments about the pin at D will give the force in AB:
~MD = 0 ~ roc x 1-120011 + rDA x FA_
[ ( -54~ 53,) (3,5 54~)J

6 i + i + 2 i+ j x 1-1200jl '
+1-10i1
~ x FA'
(2,.j5i+ .j5i1,) =0
1-3.601 + 5.2011 x 1-l200Ji + FA.I-4.47kl ~ 0
FA_ = 9661b
(Continued)
142
,,' ...~
We say that the force "in" the two-force memper AB is compressive since the
strut is subjected to a pair of 966-pound forces that tend to cause it to shorten.
Note that we defined (arbitrarily) the scalar FAB in such a way that a positive value'
would indicate compression of the strut. Indeed it turned out that way as Qur
intuition would suggest. Had FAB turned out to be negative, we would have called
the force tensile since the strut would then be subjected to a pair of forces tending
to stretch it.
E x A M p L E
Find the reactions exerted on the frame at A and B by the pins.
SOLUTION
The member BD is a two.force member because, even though it isn't a straight
bar, it is loaded by forces at only two points. Therefore, we know the direction of
the reaction at B to be along BD. The overall free-body diagram wiH help us
determine this reaction, and those at A as well:
'+) 1:M A= 0 - 60 1b-1t + (,Jz}4 Itl
iI F. = IS,/21b
i A.
I
t
:1
,
d
~i
= Ax -
F.
,/2 ~ Ax 15
Ax ~ ISlb
and
~'
I F.
1:F, ~ 0 = A, + ,/2 = A, + 15
I
I A, = -ISlb
Therefore, the reactions onto the frame are

I
I'. 4~lb
atA, 15,/2 1b
-It
atB, 15,/2 Ib
15,fi~ II
Note that these two reactions necessarily form a couple of 60 c; Ib-ft:
143
_. ,I
..
E x A M p L E 3.11~
Find the force and couple reaction at the base of'the advenising sign of Exam.
pIe 3.2.
,
2 It
(Resultant
of pressure
-'- from wind)
- ?"
-".. '
10 It
500 Ib
p--'
~.
~ R./t~_----7
A R.
~;- I~'", .
SOLUTION
H ~O
IR) + R;i + R,k) + 5001-,1 + 200(-,1 + 2501-11 = 0

so that
R = R) + R,' + R,k = 2501 + 700)Ib

is the resultant force exerted on the base of the post by the foundation. Thus
Rx = 2501b R, = 7001b R, = 0
Next, we sum the moments of all forces and couples about the base A of the sign:
:EM. = 0
so that
IC) + C;i + C,kl + 19, - 2kl x 1200(-,11
+ 19, - 2.5kl x 12501-111 = 0 ,.::
Therefore,
(c3 + C;i + C,k) + 9(2001101+ 2120011-11

;~
+ 91250llkl + 2.5125011 = 0 .'
(Continued)
144
. "
...
so that
C = C) + c,., + C,k ~ 4001 - 625) - 2250k Ib-ft
is the moment of the resultant couple on the base of the post. Therefore
Cx = 4001b-ft C, = - 625 lb-ft C,= - 2250 Ib-ft
.. .... --:; ..
. Question 3.6 Why doesn't the 500,lbfotce appear explicitly in the!.
l:~
-mom'en~',e1~.ihb,r:i.-Urri-leq?iatl~n, :~~"?J:-'~
'~ ",..'~ ,;' . ..",::'''~;}':;---"''
-;~ ..
E x A M p L E 3.12~
The boom, whose weight may be neglected, is supported by a ball-and-socket
connection at A and two taut wires as shown. Find the tensions in the wires and
the reaction at A.
2ft
j A 2ft
2 ft
B c
:.-
.( z
SOLUTION
From the free-body diagram we see that there are only five unknown scalars
describing the reactions. For a three-dimensional problem such as this, we should
then be concerned that there is not enough constraint provided against a rigid-
I.' ,
body motion-that is, that we might not be able to satisfy the equations of
'equilibrium, However, in this case, one of the equations Ithe balance of moments
about the axis of the boom (xli is satisfied identically since each of the loads and
reactions has a line of action intersecting that axis, The body would not be
adequately restrained were there to be a loading that tended to turn the boom
about its axis,
(Continued)
145
'I. '
I
3 It
D----;,.
x
IOOlb
The vector descriptions of the forces exerted by the wires on the boom are
TIel and TZe2' where
_ 'BG -21 + 2k _ _
el = -- = ---;0==== ~ -0.707i + 0.707k
I'BGI ,J121' + 121'
and
- 41 + 2i - 3k
.,~--I
'en
= ,,====== ~ -0.743i + 0.37lj -
- 0.557k
lIen ,J141' + 121' + (31' .
We first use the moment equation :EM. = 0, since it will not involve the
unknowns R;:(/ R}JI and Rz:
:EM, ~ 0
JAB X TIC. + rAC x Tzcz + w x (-10011

J.. = 0
21 x TtI-0.7071 + 0.707kJ + 41 x T,(-0.7431 + 0.37li - 0.557kl
+ 71 x 1-IOOil ~
,
0
-210.707IT,i + 410.37ljT,k + 4(0.557IT,j - 71I00Ik = 0
Note the absence of iterms! Thus we have
k: 4(0.37lIT, - 711001 ~ 0
T, = 4721b
and
_.'" ~ 1)0
F .-':210.707IT I + 4(0.557IT,= 0
TI ~ 7441b
Thus :f
TI., ~ - 5261 + 526k Ib

j
and
T,., ~ -351i + 175i - 263klb
Next we equilibrate the forces: I
.d~
H ~ 0
IRJ + R,j + R,kl + T + T,., + 100(-il ~ 0
I
II I
(Continued) .
146
(R) + R,I + R,kl + 1- 5261 + 526kJ
+ (- 351 I + 1751 - 263kl - I001 ~ 0
Thus, collecting like terms,
1: R. - 526 - 35 1 ~ a
R.=8771b
i: Ry + 175 - I00 ~ a
R, ~ -75 Ib
k: R~ + 526 - 263 ~ a
R, ~ -2631b
Therefore, the force exerted on the boom by the 'ball-and-socket connecti~n is

8771 - 751 - 263k lb.
E X A M p L E 3. 13 .......
The uniform door weighing 1200 N is held in equilibrium in the horizontal
position by the cable and DYthe smooth hinges at A and B. Find the force ex~rted
on the door by the cable.
/ ~---2m /
/
(Continued)
147
,.,ole
)
SOLUTION
As usual we express the unknown reactions in terms of the minimum number of
unknown scalars (components). As indicated on the free-body diagram the hinge
reactions are expressed as follows:
Force at A
F,I + F,I + F3k

Couple at A
M,I + M k 3
Force at B
F.l + F,1 + Fok

Couple at B
M,1 + M,k
The force exerted by the cable is
- + 3k-)
-2.Si - - O.Sj
T
(JI2.S)' + 10.SJ' + (31'
= T(-0.63s1 _ 0.1271 + 0.762k}
because we know that force to have the line joining points D and E as its line
of action.
We see that ten .unknown scalars are required to represent the hinge
reactions. Including the unknown cable tension T, we have eleven unknown,
scalars, but we only have six independent equations available from the equations"
of equilibrium. Thus, the problem of finding all of the reactions is statically
indeterminate. However, none of the hinge reactions produces a moment aboutl
the common axis of the hinges, but the cable force T does, and so it may bei
determined from the equilibrium equation requiring that the moments about the:.
hinge axis sum to zero. This equation may be written as
Substituting the moments of the various forces and couples,
I.10 X (F,1.+ F,I + F,kJ + M,I + M,kJ

+ 1.11-1.511 x IF.l + F,f + FS) + M,I + M,kJ
+ 1.11-0.751 + II) x (-1200kJl
+ I .110.251+ 21J x TI-0.63S1 - 0.1271 + 0.762kJl ~ 0
0+ 0 - 111112001
+ 210.762)T = 0
T = 787 N
We could have obtained the same result with a little less formality. Suppose
/ we first decompose the cable tension into three parts at D as shown in the ~figute.
We see that only the O.762Tcomponent produces a moment about the hinge axis'
(Continued)
148 .
;~'
..
and that moment {using the "perpendicular distance" method) is 2(O.762Tji.
Similarly the moment of the 1200.N weight is seen to be (IJlI200Jl-i). These
two moments must sum to zero since we can see that the hinge reactions produce
no moments about the hinge axis. Thus
2(0.762TJ) + (IJlI200Jl-)1 ~ 0
or
2[0.762TI - OJll2001 ~ 0
T ~ 787 N
Let us now see what information the other equations of equilibrium yield.
::.i LF = 0
IF,) + F,) + F,kl + (F,) + Fs) + F,kl + 1200(-kl

+ 787(-0.635) - 0.127) + 0.762kl ~ 0
(F,) + F,) + F,kl + (F,) + Fs) + F,kl = l200k + 500) + 100) - 600k
or
Notice that the left-hand side is the sum of the foice parts of the hinge reactions
at A and Bi in other word.~,we have found the force part of the resultant of the
hinge reactions.
Turning to the moment equation
LMA = 0
1M,) + M,kl + (-l.Slj x (F,) + Fs) + F,kJ + IMs) + M,kl

+ (-0.75) + 1)1 x (-1200kJ
.
+ (0.25) + 2)1 x (-5001 - 100) + 600kl ~ 0

We can recognize the first three terms (all of the unknowns} as the couple part of
the resultant at A of the hinge reactions.
...... ~ !~ We see then that the reactions at the individual hinges cannot be found
,t
here, but their resultant can be. Unfortunately this -resultant doesn't tell us much,
r about conditions at the hinges in a problem such as this one where it is'reasonable
!
!i'!.
to expect the reactions at the two hinges to be substantially different. In the next
example we explore a situation in which the two-hinge resultant might be ex.
pected to provide valuable information.
i ,
!
, \
........
-- -- ...,. ."",.
----"1
, Question 3.7 If in thepr~ceding example the hinge at B broke,
1'-
jO
could the body remainiJ.1.equilibrium?If~o, would the probieiri of
It . finding the hinge reaq{Onat A thenb.e statically determinate? :Ii "
I.
I
. ..' 'J '0 . ..pt." 0'
!i,
I
, 149
_.
E x A M p L E 3. 14 ....
The hinged door of Example 3.13 is supported by the (different) cable as shown in
the figure. Find the tension in the cable and the resultant lat 0) of the hinge
reactions.
~lm ,<:' I m--.,/

v-!z
SOLUTION
Example 3.13 illustrated the futility of attempting to find the individual hinge
reactions; thus here we are seeking their resultant. Because in this example. the
hinge axis is the z axis! the component of the couple in the z direction is zero as
suggested by the free-body diagram. We use here the component forms of the
equilibrium equations and encourage the reader to write out the vector equations
~F= 0 and LMo = 0 in terms of Wlit vectors so as to compare with the results
below. First, we sum moments about the hinge axis:
so that
21T12j - (1111200) = 0
T ~ 1200 N
- ..Jjf, """...... ., M,
Next, we sum moments about the x axis (through OJ:
This yields
A third moment equation is written about the y axis:
c6 I~Mo), = 0
+1
It gives
C, = 0
(Continued)
150
Next, we sum the forces; first, the x components:
giving
R, - r('7) = 0
so that
R, = .r: .r:
T = [12001 1040 N
Next, the y components:
+1 LF, ~ 0
so that
R, + TI~I - 1200.~ 0
R, ~ 1200 - 600 = 600 N
Finally, the z components:
/
giving
Rz = 0
Thus the resultant of the hinge reactions is 10401 + 600; N, with a line of action
through a since ex = Cy = Cz = O.
As we mentioned before, the equilibrium equations won't tell us the
individual hinge reactions. However, it would seem reasonable to assume with
identical hinges symmetrically placed about the xy plane (as is the case here) that
the components of the hinge reactions parallel to this plane will be identical.
. ,"
These components would each equal 5201 + 300; N. At the hinge A, t~e z-
direction force and the x. and y-direction couples will each be equal in magnitude
but opposite in direction to the corresponding :force or couple at B. These:
reactions, however, result from the tendency of the fairly rigid door to defomi.and
are typically small in a problem such as this one ..
The fact that there is a pla-ne (xyj of symmetry for loads and supports
..... "....
suggests that this problem could have been treated as two-dimensional as shown
__
R,O c~
.D
RJ-i m-r-I m-I

D
1200N
(Continued)
151
--
.~
1
in the figure and free-body diagram. Invoking the equilibrium equations in the
-!
form appropriate to a coplanar system of loads and reactions, we obtain I
.~
\
'+) IEMo), ~ 0
21T sin 30) - 1/1200) = 0
T = 1200N las beforel
Rx = TIJ3I2J ~ 600J3 = 1040 N las beforeJ

and
R, - 1200 + Tsin 30 ~ 0
i
I
R, = 1200 - 1200ltl = 600 N las beforel
I
E x A M p L E 3.15~
The uniform thin triangular plate is supponed by a slider-on-smooth-guide ,,
welded to the plate at A and a similar slider attached at B by a ball-and-socket
I
connection. The plate weighs 10 Ib per square foot of plan area and the mass
center of the plate is at C. Find the reactions atA and Bwhen the plate is subjected
to the 400.lb force shown.
II z
! A
~ y
! '
y
I, 7t
B,
400
,
1
B,
270
x
__I J
SOLUTION

f
The weight olthe plate is 101l9J161121~ 270 Ib and, of course, the line of action
of this resultant of distributed gravitational attractions is through the mass -.j.
center C.
;~
(Continued)
;1.
152
-.;;J
<,
The ball-and-socket at B eliminates the possibility of a couple there, and the
slider eliminates the possibility of an x component of force there. At A the slider
eliminates the possibilities of a y component of force or of couple. Thus, we see
from the free-body diagram that there are six unknown components of reactions.
Since, in addition, the plate is adequately restrained against rigid motion, we
should anticipate that this is a well-posed, statically determinate, three.
dimensional problem; and thus that the six independent component-equations of
equilibrium will provide a solution for the reactions.
Component equations guaranteeing that :EF = 0 are
:;,
3
A, - -(4001 = 0 => A, = 240lb II)
5
~Fy = 0
4
By+ 5(4001 = 0 => By = -320 Ib 121
and
+t ~F,=O
13)
Component equations corresponding to :EMA = 0 are obtained by balancing -

moments about axes through A that are respectively parallel to x, y, and z:
+/X'
/0 ",MA, 1
(~ = 0
M, + 312701 - 9B, = 0 => M, - 9B, = -810 14)
W (~MAly = 0
4(2701 - 6B, = 0 => B, = 180lb (5)
and
'if' (~MAI, = 0
M, + 6[~ 1400lJ + 6By = 0 161
or
M, + 6(3201 + 6(-3201 = 0
and so
Mz = 0
Substituting the result B, = 180 lb into Equations (31and (41we obtain
A, + 180 = 270 => A, = 901b
and
M, - 9(180) -810 => M, = 810 Ib-ft

(Cominued)
153
We could have used other sets of component equations. For example,
referring to the free-body diagram;'if we had chose~ to balance moments about the
e
lineAE, we would have been able to solve for M;c in one step. To show this, let AB
be a unit vector along AB:
_ 61 - 9, 21 - 3J
CAB = --;0==== = ---
.)(61' + (91' .jl3
The moment of the couple at A about line AB is
and the moment of the weight is, using (MB eAB')eAB
2 1620
--M ---=0
.jl3 x .jl3
or
Mx = 8101b-lt las belore'

The reader is encouraged to show that this equation expressing the balante of
moments about AB is a linear combination of Equations (4) and IS). In this
example we have chosen, out of convenience, to balance moments about axes
that all intersect at the same point 1A1.Thus, the equations are all components of
I:MA = O. However, because the sum of the moments about any line must
vanish, we could have generated component equations by balancing momentS
about non intersecting lines. The fact is that we obtain three independent
component equations that, together with I:F = 0, assure I:Mp = 0 for any point
P, provided the three lines are nonparallel and nonplanar (see Problem 3.1581.
By this time the reader perhaps has developed some feel lor the
delicacy associated with providing adequate support for a body and at the
same time having static determinacy. In the preceding example, if we
were to fix the slider at B, a new component of reaction Bx would be
introduced as shown on the next free-body diagram. This problem is
statically indeterminate, which we can clearly ascertain because we have
seven unknowns IBx, By! Bz, Ax, Az! M ! and Mzl and only six indepen-
X
dent scalar equations of equilibrium_

On the other hand, were we to provide only a "ball" support at B
giving resistance only normal to the xz plane, so that Bx = B, = 0, we
would have only five unknowns. Then we would not be able to satisli the
equations of equilibrium unless, because of some special nature of the
loading, one 01 the equations was identically satisfied. That would be
154
.&.
,.
3.3 FundamentalApplicationsof the EquilibriumEquations 1 55
I,
If the case, for example, were we here to neglect the weight (2.70 lbl of the
, plate. Without neglect of this force, we can see from the next free-body
diagrain that we cannot satisfy :EM, = 0' The inability to satisfy one
F ,
,"!"'
"I' .
, ..
I,
,
lor morel equation(sl of equilibrium, except for special loadings, is charac-

teristic of inadequate support lor constraint). When that is the case there
usually will be one lor morel rigid motionls) not prohibited by the support
system. For the case at hand the supports provide no resistance to rota~
tion of the plate about the y axis.
The preceding discussion might tempt uS to conclude that if, in,the
three.dimensi~nal situation} we have exactly six unknown reaction
components, all is well. Unfortunately this is not the case. To illustrate
this difficulty suppose that our plate is supported by ball-and-socket
connections (no sliders) at both A and B as shown in the figure. The plate
z
A,
A,
l/
~------7
A, Y
B, l B, 400
A 270
~
again is not adequately supported. We cannot satisfy the balance' of
moments about the line AB; and this correlates with the freedom to rotate
about the line, which these (inadequatel supports do not curtail.
t
:1.11 A smooth ball weighi~g 10 Ib is supported by a cable 3.14 In Figure P3.14 joints A, B, and C are pinned, and the
and rests against a wall as shown in Figure P3.11. lal Find slender rods AC and BC are light in comparison to the
the tension T in the cable and the normal force N exerted" applied forces" Determine the supporting"Jorce at B acting ': .-f
on the ball by the wall, as Junctions of the distance H. on member Be. Does this force put BC in tension or
(bJ Explain the limiting case results for T and N as H gets compression?
very large.
3.15 In Figure P3.IS the cable ABC is 10 feet long and
flexible. A small pulley rides on the cable and supp:orts a
weight W = SO lb. Find the tension T in the cable.
3.16 The rope in Figure P3.16 has length I It is attached at

one end to a pin at A and at the other to mass m after
passing under the free, small pulley at D and over the fixed,
Figure P3.11 small pulley at B. The mass M is suspended from the free
pulley. Find the height H for equilibrium of the system.
* 3.12 The 260-N cylinder shown in Figure P3.12 is c'on. A

60
._._\I
.
neeted to the ceiling at B by cords CR, and to the wall at D
by cords CD. lal Find the positioning angles e
and q, of the
cords. fbI Find the tensions iIi the cords.
600N
I~L5m_
1200N
I
B
Figure P3.13
. \\~I.5 m long
1m 400lb Figure P3.14
8 It
j (s 0.8 m long
D
Figure P3.15
2L----1 B
Figure P3.12
:3~13In Figure P3.13, lal if e~ 60, find the tension in

each cable. IbJFind the angle 8 so the tension in each cable
,Isthe same. What is this tension?
Asterisks identify the more difficult problems.
., .I
.........
3.17 Find the weight of block P if the system is in equi- 3.20 In Figure P3.20 a lSOO-N weight is attached to a
librium and UJ has a mass of 40 kg. ISee Figure P3.17.) small, light pulley that can roll on the cable ABC. The
pulley and weight are held in the position shown by a
second cable DE, which is parallel to the portion Be of the
- main cable. Find the tension in cable ABC and the tension
in cable DE.
-----2.5 m----'
"f:~< J
;
Figure P3.17
.~
','
. j 3.18 A straight uniform bar weighing 60 lb rests in a
, horizontal position against two frictionless slopes as
shown in Fi~re P3.1B. A concentrated venical load of Figure P3.20
200 lb acts at a distance x from the right end of the bar as
shown. Find the distance x for equilibrium and determine
'* 3.21 In Figure P3.21 the bar of mass m and length I is
the reactions at A and B.
pinned at B to a smooth callari which is free to slide on a
fixed vertical rod. The other end rests on the smooth
200lb parabolic surface shown. Find the x coordinate of the
contact point A.
6ft
,
Figure P3.18
B
3. t 9 A boat is in the middle of a stream whose current

flows from right to left as shown in Figure P3.19. If the Figure P3.21
.forces FI and. F21 .exerted.on: the. ropes shown, are holding
the boat in equilibrium agai~st a force due to the current of
'* 3.22 Find a. such that the tension in cable AC is a
50 lb, what are the values of FI and F2 ~
minimum.ISee Figure P3.22.)
;,..,
. ;", :1/1 F,
.' ; 4 .
3OO1b
." ~x'
.. -
-~"
...3.~
;;".~' '. .
. :.: ~
B
F,
.,
3.23 Find the forces exerted by the smooth planes on the 3.28 In the preceding problem, the nail turns out to be
IOO-kgcylinder C shown in Figure P3.23. IThe dOlled 3 in. long, and the claw hammer only succeeds in pulling
cylinder2 is absent from this problem.) it up I in. at first effort Isee Figure P3.27Ibll. A board is ., ,
3.24 To the preceding problem, add the dotted cylinder 2, then used as shown in Figure P3.27(C)to get enough lever.
age to finish extracting the nail. Assuming 150 lb of verti-
.,' , :'i
i
I,';,~
which though smaller is more dense and has the same I
mass. The contact between: C and 2J is frictionless. Find cal friction force must now be overcome, find the force F . !~
the forces exerted by the planes on C and 2. needed to complete the job. Again assume the nail exerts ,
,
no horizontal force on the clawj that is, the nail has been ,..:
3.25 The man in Figure P3.25 is slowly pulling a drum straightened.
over a circular hill. The drum weighs 60 N, and the hill is
3.29 The cylinder of weight W is in equilibrium between
,~.
'.iii
,~
sinooth. In the given positio~, find the tension in the rope
the two smooth planes. (S~eFigure P3.29.) Find the reac. ~: '.> ~
(which does not vary along the rope if the hill is smoot.hl. 1, .j
3.26 It is possible for the 20-N half-cylinder to be in

tions Nt and N2 of the planes on the cylinder. Check your
results by showing that Nt -+ Wand N2 -+ 0 as OJ -+ O.
-ft ,,
equilibrium on the smooth plane for only one value of the j
angle 1>.ISeeFigure P3.26.) For that angle, find the tension 3.30 la! A cable is being used to lift the 2000-N beam in
in the cord as a function of fJ, and check your answer in Figure P3.30. Find the force in the lengths AB and Be of
the limiting cases fJ = 0 and: fJ -+ n/2. cable which are tied at A, in terms of the angle 8. llil If the
cable breaks when the tension exceeds 5000 N, what is the
3.27 In Figure P3.27(a), the nail is on the verge 9coming smallest angle 0 that can be used?
out of the boardj that is, any huger force than 40 lb will pull
it out. Find the resultant of aU the vertical differential
friction forces acting on the nail, assuming the nail exerts R = SOcm
no horizontal force on the claw of the hammer.
Figure P3.25
5"-
Figure P3.26
Figure P3.23
T~ 401b
l~ F
10.5 in.
Figure P3.29
9.5 in.
. > , I , ~j
F I-=------2
.I;.: m. ~,~,2" 1!1'.,.~.__
. -'
(al (b) (c)
,-
I
.3.31 In Figure P3.31 determine the angle ()for which the 3.35 The 7-1b lamp in Figure P3.3S is suspended as in-
ladder is in equilibrium if planes AB and BC are both dicated from a wall and a ceiling. Find the tensions in the
, smooth. two chains.
y
c (m)
Figure P3.31
3.32 In Figure P3.32 force P .is applied to a sman wheel

that is free to move on cable ACE. For a cable tension of o x(m)
5001b, find P and . Figure P3.34
4t-
Figure P3.32
Figure P3.35
3.33 Find the angle 0 assumed by the stirrer of length L, in
equilibrium in a smooth hemispherical cup, for L = 3R.
3.36 In the preceding problem, suppose the chains are
iSee Figure P3.33.1 replaced by a continuous 7.ft cord. (See Figure P3.36.) If it
supports the lamp by passing through a smooth eye-hook so
that the tension is the same on both sides, find this tension.
'---,41,
FigureP3.33
3.34 The man in Figure P3.34 is holding the 200.N

cylinder in equilibrium at the point (x, y) = 12, IJm, with a
force paranel to the plane at the point of contact. If friction
is :negligible, .find the force ex.erted by the man. Figure P3.36
..,
:160 Chapter 3 Analysis of Equilibrium Problems
3.37 The man in Figure P3.37 weighs 800 N. He pulls 3.40 Show that the three scalar equations of equilib-
down on the rope, raising the 2S0.N weight. He finds that rium for a coplanar system of forces on a body 11F,;{ = 0,
the higher it goes, the more he must pull to raise it funher. r.Fy = 0, r.MA = 01 may be replaced by three moment
Explain this, and calculate and plot the rope tension T as a equations EMA ~ 0, EM. = 0, EMc ~ 0, provided the
function of O. What is the value of the tension, and the points AI 8, and C (in the plane of the forces) are not I,. ~
angle 0, when the man can lift it no further? Neglect the collinear. Hint: Show that satisfaction of the three moment:~
sizes and weights of the pulleys. equations ensures a zero resultant. Use lMA = a to
establish the resultant as, at most, a force through A.
Decompose this force into components parallel and per-
pendicular to the line joining A and 8.- Then apply the 1
remaining moment equations. A sketch will help.
3.41 Find the conditions on the locations of points A andB

so that the equations r.F,;{ = 0, r.MA = 0, and r.MB = 0
"are equivalent to r.Fx = 0, r.Fy = 0, lMp = 0 as
Figure P3.37 equilibrium equations of a body under a coplanar system of
forces and couples.
3.42 What are the conditions on A and B in the previous

I
t
r.F,. = 0
exercise if the equivalent
instead of I:.Fx = O?
conditions include
j
3.43 For equilibrium of the rectangular plate shown in :
Figure P3.43, what are the reactions at A and B?
3.44 A wheelbarrow plus its load has the weight and

1
3.38 A SO-lbtraffic light sags I It in the center of a cable as center of mass location shown in Figure P3.44. Find the
shown in Figure P3.38. Dete~ine the tension in the cable vertical force H exerted on the handle by the man and the
to which it is clamped. force exerted on the tire by the ground. Assume the system
33ft--i. is not moving.
r
;.... i'
.
I
Figure P3.38
lOON
----..
SON
Figure P3.43
3.39 Is there a force F at P tor .which the system of three

forces is in equilibrium? jSee Figure P3.39.) If so, find it;
if not, why not?
261b
Figure P3.44
Figure P3.39
r ,
.
3.45 In the preceding problem, determine the resultant N

of tre forces exened on the man's shoes by the ground in
the configuration shown in Figure P3.45. Also find the
Weight location of Nj that is, find the distance d.
~ 1701b
3.46 If the weight of the rod.of length L is negligible; and if,o.-r ..
all surfaces are smooth, find the range of values of the angle
{J for which the rod will be in equilibrium. See Figure P3.46.
3.47 Rod ABeD in Figure P3.4 7 rests against rollers at B

H
and C, and against a smooth surface at A. 'raj Find the angle
a. so the roller at B may be removed. (hI Find the resulting
Figure P3.46 forces at A and C for this angle Cl.
. ~; 3.48 The wrench in Figure P3.48 is applied to a hex-head

, ;. . Figure P3.45 boh in an 'effort to loosen it. Determine the forces Fi and F2
1201b on the bolt head if there is a slight clearance so that the
contact is only at A and B.
\a
3.49 In the preceding problem, assume a tight fit between
the bolt and the wrench and that the load is distributed
Figure P3.47 linearly on the two faces as shown in Figure P3.49.
Determine the force-alone equipollents of each of the two
loadings. Explain the increases in these two values over the
concentrated forces in the preceding problem.
3.50 Assume that the reaction of the wall onto the

cantilever beam is the pair of linearly distributed forces
A shown in Figure P3.50. Find the intensities qT and qB in
terms of P, L, and I.
3.51 A slender uniform bar of length L ,and weight W is

slung from the two cables shown in Figure P3.51. Hnd the
tension in the cable on the right as a function of the ratio
IlL. Show that equilibrium is impossible if I < L12.
Figure P3.48
?-r M I
i-/------j
w
J ~~) " .1 ;;
F,
I---L
Figure P3.51
Figure P3.50
Figure P3.49
---------------_.!-_-----------------------------~,~ ,.
162 Chapler 3 Analysis of Equilibrium Problems
3.52 A man is painting a waH using a crude scaffold that 3.55 In Figure P3.55 find the reactions onto the bent bar at
consists of a pinned board and two cables. jSee Figure A, B, and C.
P3.52.) (aJ Find the tension T in each cable as a function of
the man's weight and position (Wand xl, the length and 3.56 In Figure P3.S6 find the reactions exerted by the wall
weight of the board (I, wI, and the angle (). Investigate the on the beam.
.J'
following limiting cases: IbJ the board is light and the man
is at x = 0 i leJ the board is light and the man is at x = Ii
Idl the man is light. Assume symmetry.
3.53 In the "one size fits al,I" wrench of Figure P3.S3, the
Figure P3.55., ,.
handle JJ and the member B are free to turn relative to
each other about the pin P. Neglecting ricti.on between
the wrench and nut, find:
a. The force exerted on the nut by the handle if the nut

is already tightened an:d nothing moves
b. The magnitude of the force carried by the pin P
c. The tightening moment labout the center line of the
nut! that the wrench exerts on the nut.
5000N
3.54 In Figure P3.54 find the reactions onto the beam at ~6m
the pin IAI and rollet IBI.
4000N
Figure P3.56 12000N.m
In Problems 3.57-3.68 find the reactions exerted on

the members by the supports.
2ft;"\ 3ft 3.57 300N

--j_5ft~_4ft-
I I
n I
0.5 m 0.6m
SOlb 601b
A
A ~ 4
*@j'n-p- .-
=1'-~----2
Figure P3.57
m----~
.251b
x
J Figure P3.54
3.58
Figure P3.58
20lb
3.59
~".".'"'
. 2
I=--f. I !::__
2
+
1 '
.,~.
6001b/ft
-3ft-I-6ft-
Figure P3.61
3.62 2nx
q = qosin~
L
Figure P3.62
; 3.63
2000lb
C
A D
1-5ft--5ft~I-5ft-
o )x Figure P3.63
3.64
1800N/m
Figure P3.67
c .
3.68
Figure P3.64
3m
B
3m-\
1 It
2m
~
i
i-;:
A I Figure P3.68
;t,
. ,.
3.69 The crane in Figure P3.69 is pinned to the ground at

o and to a screw-jack at A. ;The truss ~ and load .J'weigh
800 and 1200 pounds, respectively. In the given posi-
tion, neglecting the distance between pin P and the nut,
determine the tension in the screw and the pin reactions
exerted onto ~ at O.
Figure P3.71
"-8ft-
1Bit
Figure P3.69
~-
x
3.70 The crane of the preceding problem is lowered so that
angle POA increases to 60 (SeeFigure P3.70.) Again find
0

Figure P3.73
the \ension in the screw-jack and the reactions at O.

3.74 Repeat the preceding problem if the contact of the
parabolic plane with the wheel is on its inner radius and if
the weight is attached to a cord running over the outer
radius.ISee Figure P3.74.1
Figure P3.70 '_I. ~
','.i':
3.71 In Figure P3. 71, the equilateral triangular plate has
, ~.
mass 80 kg and is supported by the light members.J' and IJ,
the latter of which is free to slide in a smooth slot. If the
'.,'
'plate is in equilibrium, find;the value of the couple M that '+1
is acting on it. "n

Figure P3.74
.d .J
r .,.
3.72 Repeat the preceding problem if M is replaced by a
vertical force P at D whose magnitude is to be found.
3.75 The 33-ft diameter antenna shown in Figure P3. 751al
3.73 The weight of UJ is 300 Ib, and the weight of wheel is supported at three pins. Pin A connects the "dish" to the
Cis 200 Ib Isee Figure P3. 731.Find the height (ycooTdinatel jack AB, which extends to raise (and contracts to lower' the .j
of the center C of C. Assume sufficient friction to prevent antenna in elevation. This rotation takes place about a
slipping. horizontal line through two pins, shown as one at D in
II
,,' ".j
1r
1
17 It
I
Elevation jack
B
'""~iJ"j'I;ii
Figure P3.75{b)
Figure P3,751bJ. The entire structure suspended above A

and Dweighs 3500 lb, with mass center at C. Find the force
in the elevation jack AB.
3.76 To the pteceding ptoblem, we add the effect of the

wind. Large antennas like the one shown in Figure P3. 75laJ
are designed to survive severe hurricanes and tornados of
up to 125 mph wind velocities. At this wind speed, with
the wind blowing hotizontally into the dish Ito the right"
the wind forces on the disli have a resultant at the vertex V
of: III Drag Force ~ 44,'200 ~ Ib; 121 "Lift" Force =
27,100 lib; and 131Mom~nt = 41,300" Ib-ft. Find the
force in the elevation jack and the combined reaction on
the hub pin at D. ISeeFigure P3. 75(bl.1
.* 3.77 Repeat th~' precedihg problem, with the antenna

pointing at 80 elevation; This time the 125 mph wind Figure P3.78
10adsare:IJIDrag = 8790 ~ Ib;(21"Lift" ~ 19,100 lIb;
and (31Moment = 106,000 ., Ib.ft.
3.78 The fork.lift truck weighs 9500 lb. lal If it carries a

load of 5000 Ib in the position shown in Figure P3. 78, find
the forces exerted by the ground on the tires. (blHow much
greater load could be carried in the same position without
Figure P3.79
the truck tipping forward?,
3.79 The 50.kg uniform rod is pinned to the 80.kg wheel

at A and B. ISee Figure P3.79.1 At C, the rod rests on a
smooth floor, as does the wheel at D. Find the reactions at
CandD.
'r,l
----....
3.80 The rod weighs 64.4lb and is. held up by three cables 3.83 In Figure P3.83 disc .A is pinned to the bent bar IS
as shown in Figure P3.80. Find the tension in each cable. at A; the bodies weigh 20 N (.A) and 30 N WI. Body Blias
mass center at C and rests on the smooth plane. Find the
~ force P required for equilibrium of the system of .A and B.
A
13 It
Smooth
B
Figure P3.80
Figure P3.83
3.81 In Figure P3.8 I the rod AB of length L and weight

W is connected to smooth hinges at F and D by the light 3.84 In Figure P3.84 the ISO-kg cylinder is pinned at A
members AF and BD, each of length L. A cable CE com- to the 200-kg uniform bar. Find the force P required fOT
equilibrium of the bodies.
pletes the support of the rod. Find the force in the cable.
-
p
Smooth
... ~.". I"'" ..
1---4m-
';0]
---1 "
2m
,
,. .
Figure P3.84
I
Figure P3.81
B
1 3.85 Repeat the preceding problem if a clockwise couple of
SO N . m acts upon the bar.
3.86 A beam with mass M and length f is supported by

a smooth waH and floor, and a cable, as shown lin Fig-
ure P3.86. Find the tension T in the cable as a function
of B(different cables for different B'sl. Show from TIBI that
i3.82 The man is holding the wheel of weight Win equi- as 0 - 0, T - 0, and that T approaches etJ as 01- 90.
,Hbrium on the rough inclined plane. (See Figure P3.82.1 Verify that these results make sense using free-body dia-
j
Find the tension in the rope, in terms of W. Assume suffi-

"
grams at () = 0 and (J = almost 90.
cient friction to prevent slip.
Figure P3.82
Figure P3.86
I
I
3.87 Show that if the cable in .the preceding problem is 3.90 In Figure P3.90 the uniJorm circular disc of weight W
instead attached to the top of the beam (see Figure P3.8?), and radius I has a uniform bar of length L and weig~t W" '"
its tension is constant (i.e., this time it doesn't depend welded to it at A such that the bar is perpendicular to AG.
Find the angle () for equilibrium of the combined body.
on 01.
3.88 What horizontal force F will pull the IOO-kg lawn
roller over the step? (See Figure P3.88.) What is the value of
Smooth pin
F if it is directed normal to AC as shown dotted?
3.89 The IO-ton moving crane in Figure P3.89 has a mass

center at C. It carries a maximum load of 18 tons. Find the
smallest weight of countetweight C, and also the largest
distance d, so that: (a)the crane doesn't tip clockwise when A
'~
the maximum load is lifted; and (bj the crane doesn't tip Figure P3.90
counterclockwise when there is no load present. Also find,
for d = 2.5 ft, the range of weights of C fot which (aJand 3.91 In Figure P3.91 the homogeneous, uniform bar
(blcan be satisfied. weighs 10 lb/ft. Find the reaction the pin at A exerts on
the bar.
Figure P3.87
J. 3cm Figure P3.91

Figure P3.88
t
3.92 The uniform bar weighs 1000 N and is in equilib-
----15ft
rium in the horizontal position shown in Figure P3.92.
Find the tension in the cable and the reactions exerted by
the pin at A onto the bar. ~.
Figure P3.92
Figure P3.89
I.~I L
c
." B
4
L=3m
.,
-"--------~---------------
3.93 Repeat Problem 3.82 for the different man and rope 3.97 Zeke the moonshiner has built a "water" tower in
arrangement shown in Figure P3.93. which to store his liquid refreshment. The tank at the top is
5 ft high and 4.8 ft in diameter, and is mounted on four
3.94 The car in Figure P3.94 has weight W. What is the
symmetrically located legs inclined to the horizontal. ISee
resultant of the normal fortes on the driver's-side tires if
Figure P3.97.1 The weight of the whole lOwer Ilegs plus
the car is parked on the indicated incline?
tank) is 3800 lb. Wind force is to be computed on die ba:sis'
3.95 The 1OO-Ib sign in Figure P3.95 is supported by a pin of the pressure times the projected area of the tank on the
at A and a cable from B to C. If the cable breaks at 400-lb plane perpendicular to the direction of the wind. If this
tension and the pin fails at 600 Ib of force, find the safe dynamic pressure is 62.5 Ib/ft2 (blowing left to rightJ, nnd
values of O. whether the tower will blow over or not. IZeke sees the big ,.
storm coming and is running to get something with which
to fill the tank. ,
Figure P3.93
15 f<
Figure P3.94
__ 0 A
Figure P3.97
3.98 In the previous problem; if Zeke begins filling the

tank with moonshine having the density of water, how
"il, 0+. close to full must it get in order to prevent the tower from
Figure P3.95 tipping over?
3.96 In Figure P3.96 the member weighs 50 N and has its 3,99 Bar AB in Figure P3.99 is supported by a roller at C, "
I,
mass center at C. At B, a pin, fixed to the ground, hears and by a smooth wall at A. The bar is uniform, has a mass
-against a slot. The spring carries a tensile load of 100 N. of 20 kg and is 0.6 m long. What vertical force at B is
Find the vertical component of the reaction at A. necessary for equilibrium?
DS\T ~ .. E B
0.3 mI m~JMlI~Ij'~ji,
01 JJj B
..... Figure P3.99

3
l 0.9 m- fi.
FlgureP3.96 1---I.2m_ 0.2m o
+ ","
3.100 In Figure P3.100 the beam AB and the pulley each and falling. When the rno'tor is turned off, the t~nsioJi.S Til
weigh 30 lb. Find the tension in the rope, and the pin and Tb are equal if friction is neglected. In this case, find the
reaction at A. tension in the belt.
Figure P3.100
3.101 Five weights are suspended as shown in Figure

a
. P3.1 I at equ~l di$tances aldng a uniform har 40 em long
weighing 60 N. The first weight at the left end is 10 N, and Figure P3.103
each successive weight is ION heavier than the preceding

one. At what distance x from the left end should the bar be 3.104 The frame in Figure P3.1 04 is supported by the pin
. suspended so as to remain hO,rizontal? at A and the cable. Find the pin reaction at A and the
tension in the cable.
Figure P3.101
.3.102 In Figure P3.I02 the body ADB is a bell crank

,pinned to the floor at point D: Find the force Fin the link J:, Figure P3.1 04
pinned to the bell crank at B, required for equilibrium.
3.105 If the comer Q in Example 3.9 helps to support the
1200-lb weight with no force in AB, what is now the, force
in AB required to start the:bed pivoting about the p'in d?
[See Figure P3.10S.}
JOON
Figure P3.102 2fT I
3'.103 In Figure P3.103 the motor weighs 200 lb and is

fixed to the SO-lb frame, which is pinned to the ground at
61n-l- -6ft+4ft--
I
O. The tension in the motor's belt prevents it from turning Figure P3.105
,
''5:
;,,'L
,,'
~,-- .1- j.
1 70 Chapter 3 Analysis of Equilibrium Problems
3.i106 Bar ABD in Figure P3.1 06 is supported by a hinge at

B and by a cable at A. Find (a)the tension in the cable, and
lbj the components of the force at Bon ABD.
t 1
2081b
Figure P3.109
3.109 Repeat the preceding problem if a couple is applied ,

.(
as in Figure F3.1 09 and if the cable is replaced by an applied

force of 130 lb. Also, the plate now rests on a roller at Bas
shown.
Figure P3.106
* 3.110 A davit is a crane on a ship for hoisting lifeboats,
anchors, or cargo. A "gravity davit" uses gravity to help
3.107 Find the pin reaction at A and the roller reaction at with the lowering. A boat is shown being held in the stow
B for the bent bar situated and loaded as shown in Fig- position by two gravity davits, one of which is shown in
ure P3.107. Figure P3.110(a). Assume that a removable pin is located at
roller A. The boat weighs 1500 Ib, and each of the three
1
Figure P3.107
t....
8.ft
3.108 Find the force that the pin at A exerts on

}
j it~
rectangular plate shown in Figure .P3.1.Q8.....,'- " .i'.
"I
.~
8
tI
r<
f(
a,
2081b
a'
Figure P3.108 Figure P3.110(a) a,
'I
3.3 Fundamental Applications of the 'Equilibrium Equations il71
';f,
Figure P3.11 Olb)

~:
Figure P3.111
* 3.111 When the cable is let out in the preceding problem,

:Figure P3.110(c) gravity causes the davit to :move downward to the left in
i
the slot. Eventually roller .A reaches the bottom of the slot
-I a:s shown in Figure P3.III, and the boat then lowers into
the sea. After the cable is released from the boat, find the
forces on the rollers .A and B in the position shown.
3.112 If the child and swing together weigh 200 N, find

the force in each of the two ropes. jSee Figure P3.112.)

Figure P3.112
Figure P3.110(d)
8-ft sections of the davit weighs 350 lb. Find the force in
the cable (two per davit, .i.e" four per boat) and also the
reactions exerted on the smooth rollers .A and B. The
rollers are pinned to the davit, as are the free pulleys C, '21
1
"
and G.IThere are also pulleys on rhe other side of the davit
at C, D, and E.) Neglect friction and the width of the davit, 3.113 In Problem 3.112, if the child's father uses a hori.
':and note the photographs in Figures P3.110 lb, c, dl. zontal force to pull the swing back 30 from the vertical
r 1
plane of the ropes Isee Figure P3.113), what is this force 3.116 The SOO-N reinforced concrete slab in Figure
and what is now the force in each rope? P3.116 is being slowly lower'ed by a winch at the end of
the cable C The cables .A, Ii and :JJ are each attached to
3.114 The boom in Figure P3.114, consisting of the iden-
the slab and to the hook. Find the forces in each of ;the
tical struts S, an:d S2 and the cable C, holds up a compressor
four cables if the distance from the upper surface of the
weighing 1300 lb. Find the forces in the struts and in the.
slab to the hook is 2 m.
cable.
3.117 In Figure P3.1 17 a weight of 2500 N is held up by
3.115 A shaft that carries a thrust of 1000 N terminates in
three cables oA, OB, and oC, which each tie to a ceiling
.a conical bearing as shown in Figure P3.11 5. If the angle e
2 m above point O. The cable OC makes equal angles
is 25, find the normal force that each of four equally with the positive coordinate directions at O. Find the
.spa,cedball bearings exerts on the conical surface. Assume
force in cable oc.
symmetry.
3.118 The 10-1mast OD in Figure P3.118 can carry
Ii
10,000 lb without failing. The cables can each qtrry
. !;
4000 lb without breaking., Find the radius of the base

.Figure P3.113 z circle, on which the cables are attached, for which both
post and cables will reach their maximum loads simulta-
neously if the cables are gradually tightened.
B
2ft y
Figure P3.114
1000 N .
Figure P3.117
Fi
... ', ..
Fi~ureP3.115
Horizontal
circle
z I
x
I
F;igure P3.116 Figure P3.118
. ,-tr
J
,, 3.119 An equilateral triangular plate weighs 500 N.

Three equal-length ropes (which break at a tension of 1500
NJ are tied to the comers of the plate and to each other as
shown in Figure P3.119, and hold up the horizontal plate.
Find the shortest value of I such that the ropes don't break.
~. 3.120 The weight in Figure P3.120 is to be suspended by

, , 60 t of cable in any possible number of equally spaced
S~lm lengths lone 60-1t length, two 30-1t lengths, etc.). The
Figure P3. t 19 cables are to be symmetrically attached to the 20-ft
diameter ring as suggested in the figure for three lengths .
Show that the load in the cables is less for four lengths
than for one, two, three, or five, and that for six, the load
Figure P3.120 in each cable is theoretically infinite. In each case, assume
all the cable forces to be equal by symmetry, noting that
for four or more cables, the problem is actually statically
indeterminate.
3.121 A small roof made of two identical rectangular

plates, each weighing 60 lb, is supponed symmetrically as
shown in Figure P3.121. The plates are braced by three
I triangular plates (ABC, DEF, GHIj of the same density and
~ .. thickness as the rectangular plates. Calculate the tension
in each of the four cables, assuming them to be equal by
symmetry. Could you work the problem without this.
assumption ~
A 3.122 For the structure ABeD loaded and supponed as

shown in Figure P3.122, find the reactions at A and the
cable tensions.
3.123 The uniform block in Figure P3.123 weighs 500 N.

It is supported by ball joints at a and A, and a cable from B
to C. Find the tension in the cable.
G
Figure P3.121
Ball and socket z
c
,'I
!I
)
y
"
x
x
Figure P3.123
"'" I
"
.. ,
1 74 Chapter 3 Analysis of EquilibriumProblems
:.~
~
I',~
5200 N
Figure P3.124
T
)
y
Figure P3.127
x
B,
Figure P3.126 Ball and socket
~.124 ln Figure P3.124 determine the tensions in cables

Be and BE. Neglect the weights of all members and assume
that the support at A is a ball-and-socket joint. The 5200.N
Joice has no x component.
3.125 A 40-1b cellar door ,is propped open with a light 'I"
stick, as shown in FigureP3;125: Find. the ..force !in the
'stick.
3.126 In Figure P3.126 the bar CD is welded to the center

of another bar AB, with the end D resting against a smooth
vertical wall in the yz plane. The bars aren't perpendicular,
and AB is connected at A ,to a ball joint; at B it passes
3.128 A particle located at the origin [tx, y, zl =
through a smooth eyebolt. The bars weigh 12 lb/ft. Find
(0,0,0) mJ is suddenly acted on -bythe three forces F1, F2,
the force exerted on the bar at point D.
and F3, of magnitudes 14,6, and 10 newtons, respectively.
3.127 A rigid frame whose base is in the xyplane is shown ISee Figure P3.128.J F, acts on the line from 10, 0, 01 to
in Figure P3.127. Calculate the forces in the cables, and the 13, 6, 21 m; F, acts on the line from 10, 0, OJto 13, 6, - 61 m;
reactions on the frame at A,'if the frame weighs ISO N/m. and F, acts on the line from 14, 3, OJ to 10, 0,-01 m. Is the
Neglect the cross-sectional dimensions of the beams can. particle still in equilibrium after the forces are applied? If
stituting the frame. not, in what direction will it accelerate? .'
;1
" . I'
c(
l'
2m
x
Figure P3.129
Figure P3.130
3.129 In Figure P3. 129 the weight W is 600 N, and it is 3.132 A shaft with two 90 bends is supported by three
0
supported by cables AD, BD, and CD. Find the tension in ball bearings as shown at A, B, and C in Figure P3.132. Find
each cable. (Points A, B, and C are all in the xz plane.1 the reaction of bearing C on the shaft.
3.130 In Figure P3.130 the door weighs 120 lb. If there is 3.133 In Figure P3.133 a heavy uniform rod Rof length
no friction between the rope and the tree limb, what must 1 rests with one end, A, on the ground and the other, B,
the children collectively weigh to start the door swinging against a vertical wall. The vertical plane through the rod
open about its hinges on the x axis~ makes an angle 0 with the wall. End A is 1/ J2 from the
wall. Letting p and (J be the ratios of the tangential to
3.131 The smooth collars lot sleeves) in Figure P3.131 are
normal reactions at the ground and wall, respectively~
a~tached at C1 and C2 to the rod of mass m by ball and
show that
s~cket joints. In terms of mg', find the force P that, when
applied parallel to the x-axis onto the lower collar, will I
~ - - 2.Jzsin'e-
result in equilibrium. Upon completing the solution, p
comment on why o~e of the six scalar component equa-
.tions was redundant li.e.;yie,lded no new informationj.
I).
,
..
y
lJOON
E C
E I
20 ft
Is Figure P3.136
1.3m
! j 12 'it
Ao
5L:::~ B
z
Figure P3.134
.L.
70cm 180cm
x Figure P3.135
lLi
-
5ft
-1
1 .......
Hinge
-'1
2 ft \ 1 B C
-----7
--~.''''''-'=--
31-5It~l-
"--, Cable
6ft
3ft
-~I 3ft
y
2 It
300lb
Top view x Figure P3.138
Figure P3.139
/x.
Side view Figure P3.137
250 N door
'.11:-
I '.
3.134 Aim X 1.3 m plate weighs 325 N and is i
supported by hinges at A and B. ISee Figure P3.134.J It is 3.137 In Figure P3.137 find the force and couple exerted I
held in the position shown by the 0.6-m chain ED. Find the on the 200.lb plate by the hinge at O. !
tension in the chain.

3.138 The bar in Figure P3.138 is supported by cables BD
l
3.135 Member AD in Figure P3.135 is supported by cables and GE, and by a ball-and.socket at A. Points D and E lie in
CE, BG, and BF, and by a ball-and-socket at A. Find the the xz plane. Find the tension in each cable. I
tensions in CE and BF if the tension in BG is 3000 N.
3.139 In Figure P3.139 the hinge at A has broken off. Find
3.136 Find the tension T in the cable DE. This cable gives the tension in the cable. Then find the couples GRr and:
the same moment about Iin~ AG as does the weight of the CRy that the remaining hinge must exert if the door re"I'
uniform segment BD, which is 400 Ib.ISee Figure P3.136.1 mains in equilibrium.
I
I
, , .,' <.
j
.'f
3.140 Find the force F and the bearing reactions. (See

Figure P3.140.J Assume that one of the bearings cannot
exert force in the z direction and that neither can exert a
couple.
3.141 A shaft with two 90 bends is supported by three

0
ball bearings at A, B, and C as shown in Figure P3.141. Find

, the reactions of the bearings on the shaft.
,'
. 3.142 The semicircular bar of radius 30 cm is clamped at
, 0: The 2000-N force acts downward through the bar's
highest point, and the other force lies in the horizontal
plan'e through its ends. Find the:reactions Fo and Mo at the
c1arrtp.ISeeFigure P3.142.) 2000 N
Figure P3.141
F, ~ l20Di + sooj N
E
x
Figure P3.142
Figure P3.140 z
3.143 The rear door of the station wagon in Figure P3.143

is held up when open by the two gas-filled struts attached
to the car by ball-joints. The door weighs 90 Ib-30 lb in
part .A and 60 Ib in part IJ. Find the forces in the two struts.
Figure P3.143
Pins
5 in. 10 in. 12 in.
..1- ; .
in equilibrium in the (precarious) position shown. Find the

door vertical reaction components exerted by the ball and socket
onto the rod at B and by the smooth floor onto the ring
roof of wagon
Figure P3.144 at Q.
* 3.147 Three identical.spheres are at rest at the bottom of

z
the spherical bowl shown in Figure P3.147. If a fourth
sphere is placed on top, what is the largest ratio Rlr for
equilibrium if there is nofriction~
B
Figure P3.149 \
Ii
.Figure P3.145
~,
t
l2It
U
14 It
Figure P3.147
1-30 It- 10ft
F~ 101+3j+ 100klb
* 3.148 Repeat the previous problem if there are four

spheres in the bowl and a fifth is placed on top.
3.149 Find the supporting force system at A on the bent

bar.ISee Figure P3.149.1
3.144 When the gas leaks Qut of one of the struts of * 3.150 The plate weighs 100 lb and is supported as shown
Problem 3.143, it will no longer exert a force to hold up the in Figure P3.lS0. Find the reactions at A, B, and D.
door. If the right strut has become useless and the left pin
;breaks, find the resultant fdrces and couples exerted by the z
"left strut and the right pin \hingel. (See Figure P3.144.1
3.145 The horizontal homogeneous trap door in Fig. Figure P3.150 Rests against smooth rod
ure P3.145 weighs 72 pounds. It is supported by the cable
AB, a ball-and-socket at 0, and a hinge at D that provides no
1.
support in the x direction:+:Find the force in the cable.
*'3.146 A ring is welded to,a rod at a point A as shown in )

Figure P3.146. The cross-sectional area A and mass density y ,>
of the rod are the same for the ring. The combined body is
Smooth guide .~
~'
A
}i
'.'./!; :
'ff a
q v
'j
c,
0
.; c
Ball-and.socket joint Figure P3.146 h,
:1
The spring is one of the most useful of all mechanical

devices. It gives a resistive force proportional to its stretch ~p
if,it is "linear," and the constant of proportionality is I
I
calledthe spring modulus. Problems 3.151-3.156 contain p
I
. springs, and the last four are ch~]lenging. I
I
3.151 The cart in Figure P3.151 weighs 500 N and is held
in equilibrium on the inclined plane by a spring of modulus Figure P3.153
;1 5000 N/m. Find the force in the spring and its stretch.
>,' '''Ii\
.:to
Figure P3.151
* 3.154 The spring in Figure P3.1 54 is unstretched with
length I when the uniform bar of mass m is venicaL
la)Write the moment equilibrium equation for the bar at an
angle O.lblShow that 0 = 0 satisfies the equation lor any k,
!, ru, and g. leJLet kl = mg and show that there is another
equilibrium angle 0 between 0 and 18~o. Find this angle
0
"3.152 In Figure P3.152 the slender homogeneous rod 12-lt numerically, using a calculator.
longand weighing 5 lb is connected by a pin and a moment
k,f
spring to the vertical walL The moment lor rotational or
torsional) spring exerts a moment when the angle is [
changed between the two bodies to which it is fixed; an
.. example is the springs in most flexible, metal-link watch Figure P3.154
.'bands. In a moment spring the modulus has units such as
lb-ft per radian. If the rod is in equilibrium in the given
: position, and the natural (zero moment) position of the
spring is when the bar is vertical, find the modulus of the
~Im~ment spnng.
li * 3.155 The bead of mass ill can slide on the smooth semi-
circular hoop, and the spring:connects the bead to the'!top
A 01 the hoop 101 radius RI.ISee Figure P3.155.1 The spring
has modulus 2mg/ Rand natural (unstretchedl length R/4.
Find the angle(s) 0 at which the bead is in equilibrium.
Hint: Prove and then use the fact that the three forces
..... -
~~
acting on the bead form a force triangle that is similar to
Figure P3.152
ABC.
* 3.153 The light bar in Figure P3.l 53 is fixed to the ground

Figure P3.155
at 0 by means of a smooth pin, and is subjected to the
vertical force P at its other end. The spring of modulus k is
constrained to remain horizontal, and is unstretched when
8 =: O. If PI < kh2, there is an equilibrium position for
o < 0 < rrl2. Find this angle O. Why must PI < kh'
hold for this configuration to exist?
..~. .. r
180 Chapter3 Analysisof EquilibriumProblems
* 3.156 A linearly elastic endless spring with modulus k is 2. For case la), apply :EF = 0 to conclude that all three
placed around a smooth cone of vertex angle 2a. (See Fig. lines of action are parallel. Then consider the plane
ure P3.156.1 The natural length of the spring is L, and it defined by the lines of action of F, and F2 lif they are
weighs W. Find the value of h for equilibrium. collinear then they, of course, must coincide with
that of F3J. Requiring that the sum of moments about
any line in that plane vanish, conclude that all three
-1 of the (parallel) lines of action lie in the same plane.
h 3. For case (bl, conclude from:EF = 0 that the three lines
_I of action lie in parallel planes. Let a line, /, be parallel
Figure P3.156 to the line of action of F2 and intersect the line of
action of F1 . From :EM, = 0 conclude that the line of
action of F3 intersects I, and hence lies in the same
plane as do I and the line of action of Fl. Now apply
the moment equation of equilibrium for moments
about the point of intersection of the lines of action of
* 3.157 Show that, if a body is held in equilibrium by three F) and F3 to conclude that the three lines of action are
forces, the forces must have coplanar lines of action that concurrent and coplanar.
are either parallel or concurrent: Note that we only need to
consider the case in which none of the forces vanishes, for * 3.158 Suppose that the sum of the external forces acting
otherwise we have a two-force body that has already been on a body vanishes. Show that the sum of the moments
discussed. Hint: We outline below a set of steps by which about any point is guaranteed to vanish if the sum of the
the result may be obtained; the student is encouraged also moments about each of three nonparallel nonplanar lines
to think about alternative approaches. vanishes.
1. Let F1J F2, and F3 be the three forces. Consider the two
possibilities: (a) two lines of action are parallel and
lbl no two lines of action are parallel.
~3.4 Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to

Interacting Bodies or Parts of a Structure
When we say that a body is at rest (equilibriuml we mean that each of its
material points (or particlesl is at rest. Consequently, when a body is in
equilibrium each of its parts, or subdivisions, is in equilibrium. Thus the
equations of equilibrium apply to any part of a body as well as to the
whole. We should realize, however, that the equations for a part will not
be the same as the equations for the whole because some forces external
to a part are internal to the whole. In this section we explore some of the
consequences of applying the equations of equilibrium to individual parts
of a body.
Suppose we decompose a body 11 into two parts 11, and 112 as shown
in Figure 3.8. Furthermore:
1. Let F, be the sum of all the external forces on 11.
2. Let M,p be the sum of the moments, about an arbitrary point P, of all
the external forces and couples on 11.
3. Let F; be the sum of all the forces external to 11 that act on 11" and
M;p be the sum of the moments of those forces and couples about P.
3.4 Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting Bodies or Parts of a Structure 181
4. Let F; be the sum of all the forces external to 8 that act on 82, and
M;p be the sum of the moments of those forces and couples about P.
5. Let force R and couple C constitute the resultant at A of all the forces
that 82 exerts on 8,; these are internal to B.
Figure 3.8
From the definitions just given we see that
F, = F~+ F~'
and
We now apply the equilibrium equations to 8, and obtain

F; + R = 0 (3.11
13.2)
Applying the equilibrium equatio'ns to 82 and using the action-reaction

principle as indicated on the free-body diagram (Figure 3.81,
F;+I-R)=O 13.3)
M;'p + TPA x (-R) + (-CI = 0 (3.41
Adding Equations (3.1) and 13.31,

F; + F;' = 0 or F, = 0 iI3.5)
which is of course the force-equation' of equilibrium.for the combined
.... ,~-- _-
.. -
182 Chapter 3 Analysisof EquilibriumProblems
body B. Adding Equations 13.2)and 13.41,
or :~;
,~t
M,p = 0 (3.6) t~
which is the moment equation of equilibrium for 8.
Two important conclusions can be drawn from this ,analysis. first,
we note that the equilibrium equations for,body 8 are the sums of the
equilibrium equations for its constituents 8, and 8,. Any two of the sets
will be independent, but not all three. Thus while there may be profit to
be gained from writing the equilibrium equations for two, say 8 and 8"
nothing additional can be obtained from the equilibrium equations
for 8,.
Second, if we know, or can determine, all of the external forces on B,
then the resultant interaction between 11} and B2 can be determined from
the equations of equilibrium for 8, lor 8,1. This is the basis for much of
stress analysis in the mechanics of deformable solids Ifor example, the
determination of shear and bending moments in beams IChapter 41J.
Sometimes, as previously mentioned, we find that the equilibrium
equations for a body such as 8 contain more scalar unknowns than there
are independent equations. This suggests that the problem might be
statically indeterminate, but that is not always the case. The special
nature of the connection between two parts 18, and 82) of 8 may render
one or more components of Rand C to vanish so that the equations of
equilibrium for 8 together with those for 8, may in fact yield the same
~,iJ
number of independent equations and unknowns. Some of the examples
that follow illustrate such situations. We note, however, that when we it..7; f. i
know nothing in advance about Rand C Ifor example, when 8, and 82

are "welded"J, equations such as 13.II and 13.2) are of no assistance
in determining external forces Ireactionsl on 8 because each of these
equations contains an unknown vector that has not appeared in the
equilibrium equations for B.
In most of the examples that follow, the body or device under
consideration is an assembly of rigid lor near-rigid) parts. When these are
pin-connected, for example, we often shall find it useful to write the
equilibrium equations for the individual parts; that is, we shall disas-
semble the device. When the assembly is intended to be a stationary
structure for supporting loads, it is often called a frame, unless it is
composed exclusively of straight two-force bodies or members. In that
case it is called a truss labout which more will be said in Chapter 41.When
the function of the device depends upon the freedom of the parts to move
relative.to one another, particularly for the purpose of doing mechanical
work, it is often called a machine. The pliers of Example 3.18 will be
seen to constitute such a device .
,
.
.~,
E x A M p L E 3.16~
Determine the force the man must exert to hold the blocks in equilibrium.
SOLUTION
In a problem involving frictionless (at the axle) pulleys in equilibrium, first re-
member that the tension in the rope is the same going on as it is coming off.
The tensions would differ, of course, if either (a) the pulley were accelerating
angularly, or (bl there were friction between the pulley and its axle.
Let us now start with the load WI and proceed to draw free-body diagrams of
the various bodies. Normally the pulleys' weights 3re neglected and we shall do
I
so here.
In the lower right part of Figure 1, the tension T1 is seen to equal WI- In the
upper right part, the tension T 1 is the same on either side of the pulley PI' as we
have proved in general. But the tension Tz is not known yet.
T3=2T2by'EFy=O
t~ W,- W,
~
Tr2
rT~W'-W'
t 2 2
W,
p,
~ T, ~ W,
T4 = W2 by r.F =
y 0
"
"
W,
Figure 1
(Continued)
:';
I 183
~,
<:-~.
1-
!
We proceed next to pulley pz in Figure 1 and write
+1 LF,. ~ 0 ~ 2T, + w, - w,
where T4 = Wz by 'Fy = a on weight Wz. Therefore,
W,
T, ~
2
Finally, we arrive at the free.body diagram of P3 as shown at the left in Figure 1.

We see here that the man's pulling force on the rope is :_' :1
i. !J
'I"
c.'
,
:,j
We show the results on the three free-bodies in Figure 2. ',}!', I.
W2 +.:! w
'.}.~'
..!
;}I":
2 2 '
W,
Figure 2
Note that if we put everything back together (see Figure '3), then from the
overall free-body diagram we obtain a check:
+1 LF,. = [W, :.- W,! + (:' +~ WI) ~ (W, ~ WI) - W, - w,

, ~ ,'"--0--'
'Ope weight weight
above rope man"s nfW! of WI
p, above force
p,
or
LF,.=O ./
l
w,
The reader should note that if WI = Wz/ then no force is required to hold
the blocks in equilibrium. This is because, in that case, the tensions on either side
Figure 3 of PI are equal to WI (= W1J, while the tensions On either sideof P3 and A-vanish.
184
1 I
., ;,
I
.j.
r,
;li 3.4 Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting Bodies or Parts of a Structure 185
'J'.
':, ,':, ,...., ~ " ii, .'-, '.. , " ,

Question~;8If the ni:m."eginsto p~llon thempe viith ~ f.o~ce
slightly g,.eaterthan" the
- . equilibrium
.
vM;}eof
.~.
(W2 W,-' 1
'I2,what'
.,~' ,
happens to the blocks? . .
", '. , '" 'Cc' , ",' ,<'~"',',L " '," ;,~:\,""c 1",-
Questiol\ 3.$ How ihuch aoes the.ma(lhilVti towelgh to stay ,
on t~e"gJ-ound? . , ~. . ."., ' '." '.,.'
I
I'J
!{L
I"
P 2P E x A M p L E 3.17~
~.!o~ _.!o-j_l_ In Figure 1 find the reactions at the supports A, B, D, and E and the forces between
I
"2,414
the beams at F and H.
A . >5': . ,
F
H
D .--~'_:;': __ .0-. E
_.!o_1 ~4
'4
2L
L -~- 4 Figure 1
SOLUTION
The free-body diagrams of the separate beams are shown in Figure 2.
From Figure 2(aJ, we see that Ax vanishes by LFx = O. Then,
. 3 L
~MA = 0 = -LFF - P- - 2PL
4 2
.,
10
FF = ~P
3
: !B , I
B, t
B.
Ff
(b) (e)
(,)
Figure 2
(Continued)
,,'
Therefore, we may find Ay by
+1 LF,. = 0 = A, + FF - P - 2P
10
A,. = 3P --aP ,
-f
,
P
= --
3
"I
i
Thus the pin at A pulls down on the beam A/. Next we study Figure 2Ib). From
force-equilibriumof beam HB in the x direction, we get Bx = O. Then,
'30p
~ LM8 = 0~ft~L) - FIIILJ :\1

j~
so that
ai.
"::.:,'4 ~
fill
from which :i.} .~
#;1 ~
i'~"
1,( !,
:iio "
'., i
5 ~. ~r
B,. ~-P
6 ~f,t
Last, we examine Figure 2(c), obtaining 1~ 1:
~l
:, ! ., f
~p ;:~ ),
~ LMD = 0 = LIF,I - ~ I~J (a'l

!~ I
t~ I
...
:;
';.i
'1' I
= -P
5
8 ~!
il
I
15
t,', ~
"'~
.
.
D, =-P
8 1:,
'~., !
Putting the beams together and considering an overall free.body diagram of",
them plus the two pins, we obtain (note how and why the various 13 P and -iP . 1
forces become internal and cancell 1
L'- .... rc_o_n_tl_.n_"_ed_! ----- . 4
186 (
..~.
P 2P
~l~
~_.
!.":~",.,,.,i
~
(" ...t;;;,;,;;,,,,: .:,.....-.
,
,~,
~. 2p
k"
~J_~ ..
': pt
Checking the equilibrium,
15 SSP
:EF,~-P+-P+-P---P-'2P~O 0/
, 8 8 6 3
:EM, ~ 185 p(~) - p(~) - 2PILI + ~P(~L) + ~P(iL) = 0 ,/
,1.5 in.
3.75 in.- ---
10Ib E x A M p L E 3.18~
~ind ~he torces transmitted through the pin in the pliers of Example 3.3.
" ~~::~j~J
SOLUTION
We first shall consider a free-body diagram of one of the parts of the pliers because
the force we seek will be external to that body.
We can see immediately that there are more (four) unknown forces appearing
t 10 Ib
than independent component-equations (three) of equilibrium for this two-
dimensional problem. Writing these equations, we have
III
Rx - FI = 0 :::;.Rx = Ft
(Cominued)
187
-<
3.7Sin.-
j;
~.o-__ f"
F,
and
+1 'i:F, = 0
121
N, + R, + 10 = 0
and
"i) 'i:MA ~ 0
131
-1.5N, + dF, + 3. 75(10) ~ 0
I.S in.
3.75 in. 10 Ib
F,
F,
:, !i;:J..2lt'P*< .
t 10 Ib
Turning to the free-body diagram' of the whole pair of pliers, and summing
moments at B, we obtain ....
'i:MB ~ 0
F,b ~ 0 = F, = 0
The balance of forces yields
'i:Fx = F, + F, = 0 = F, = -F, = 0
and
+1 'i:F, ~ N, - N, + 10 - 10 = 0 = Nt ~ N,
(Continued)
188
"
Substituting PI = 0 into Equation (3),
I.5N, - 0 - 37.5 ~ 0
Nt ~ 25lb
Then from Equation (21,
25 + R, + 10 ~ 0
R, ~ -351b
The results displayed as free-body diagrams of the two parts are shown in the
next figure.
351b
251b
3.75 in-----
351b
Note that we have not actually specified which of the parts of the pliers (if
either) would have the pin at A included in the free~body diagram. Which choice is
made doesn't affect the analysis because the free.body diagram of the pin is
351b
t351b
Note in the three figures that follow, the net result in each case is the pair-of free-
body diagrams of B1 and 82 just shown.
(Continued)
189
J
1
351b
~~>.B'
251b I '<---._ _ __
351bl: . .. ::: ,\>0
,-- I . flO Ib
(' ~'PIO
if) IOlb
10 Ib
i ~~ Ib _,,-
251b I
251b
I
B,
1'-
'- 351b
351b
(a) The pin is a part of neither III nor /]1'
(b) The pin is included with Rio
351b
B,
, ",t:.
flO Ib
10 Ib
1J2 plus pin
351b
(c) The pin is included with 82,
We note also for completeness that the free-body diagram of the nut being
gripped is
~251b
~'"
. . .. . .
Questjon.3;fO
,
]Lihe h~nd Jore,;",;"e

-', ," ' ~; ,
different, would/thegrippiilg .
-f
. -" ,~', "'. '~
;
f~rce still be.2:5 times it? !l~
~ - -
190
1
E x A M p L E 3.19~
Find the forces exerted by the various pins shown in Figure l: (a) at A on ABCj
Figure 1 IbJat B on ABC; leJat C on ABC; {dlat D on BD; and leJ at E on CDE.
i
SOLUTION
In frame problems, it is wise to develop the habit of:drawing free-body diagrams of
the overall frame and its constituent parts. * See Figure 2.
A E
_ :]._-- ."'"""
-3t----
.....
-Sft-
l-
C' ,
250 c,
l B,
C'
t
*
~ 250
Tt A,
C~-.
C, tE B,
~
150
D
r
D,
Free body of pin C Free body of CDE Free bod y of BD

Overall free body Free body of ABC
(b) (e) (d) (e)
(al
Figure 2
. ":~ . .
Question 3.11 "Draw a free-bo~y diagram 'gf
~he_roller at E and fr~m' it .
argue that the force-excited by the pin on CbB is.the same as thenormal.
force exerted by'the ..ground onto the roller.",;" , :.".
";. '. ,.' .....' :.Or.: '. . ,.~~h'" .; .;.
We first see that we ,can determine the required forces at A and E from the
overall free-body diagram [Figure 2(aJl.
(Continued)
* As we have seen in general at the start of this section, the complete set of equilibrium
equations that we could write using each of the free-body diagrams in Figure 2 won't all be
independent. This is because, when combined (or "put back together"l, the bodies of
Figures 2(b)-2(el form or constitute the "overall" body of Figure 2(al. Thus if we draw a
"redundant" free-body diagram [anyone of Figures 2{a)-2(e) is redundant], we must be
aware that some of the possible equilibrium equations (three, here) will be redundant also,
and will serve us only as checks on our solutions.
191
~I
'+) ~MA = 0 = 15ftlE - 1150 IbJll.5 iii - 1250 lbJl7 ftl
1975
E = -- = 3951b
5
Now, from the force equilibrium equations for the same free-body diagram [Fig-
ure 2/aJl, we may obtain Ax and A}.:
ct... ~Fx = 0 = 250 - Ax =0> Ax = 250 Ib
+1 ~F, = 0 = A, - 150 +E =0> A, = -2451b
Iwhich means that the reaction A,l is downward-that is, 245 lIb!.
Therefore, the pin at A pulls to the left and downward on the frame member ABC.
We now illustrate a difficulty that often occurs in frame problems. In eac.h of,
the four remaining free-body diagrams IFigures 2Ib)-2Ie)L there are four unknown
forces:
In Figure 21bJ,body ABC: BX' B" CX' and C,
In Figure 21el, the pin at C: e e"

XI C~,and C~
In Figure 21dl, body CDE: C~, C;, DX' and D,
In Figure 21el, body BD: Bx BY1 D,u and Dy
Thus in this example no single one of the four free-body diagrams may be used
to find all four of the unknowns appearing on it. However, if we writel:Fx = 0,
~F, ~ 0, and ~Mp = 0 IP is any pointJ for each body, we shall have four
more equations than we need to solve for the eight remaining unknowns above.
In this example, we shall illustrate how we can obtain these eight forces in a
logical manner.
. If we sum moments on ABC [Figure 2(b)] about B, we can find Cx because we
have already found Ax:
'+) ~MB = 0 = Cx14.2 It) - Ax12.8 ft!
C . = 2.812501 = 1671b
x. 4.2
1 1
t
7ft "j:
~j
~"
_1 1
'~.
-I
~,
I
2ft ~
I-Sft- ij
.;
f"
(Continued)
};
192
:,')
" ..
.L
where similar triangles were used to get the moment arms as follows:
2 5 14
- ~ - => d ~ - ~ 2.8 ft
d 7 5
ii.
Thus
a = 7 - d = 4.2 It
Turning next to free-body diagram in Figure 2(cl, * we can immediately

, find C~:
is
-=!:... Hx = 0 ~ 250 + Cx - C~
C~ ~ 250 + 167 = 417 Ib

The motivation for the above moment equation using Figure 21b)and the"x
equation" using Figure 21cl is now clear: we can find all forces on member CDE
Isee Figure 21dJ]because only three of them are still unknown. Equating the forces
on CDE IFigure 21dll in the x direction to zero, we find Dx:
Summing moments about D then yields C~:

.,
l:MD = 0 ~ EI2 Itl - C~14.2 ftl + C;13 It)
C' = -1395 lb)(2 Itl + 14I 7lb)(4.2 Itl
3 It
, ., y
= 3201b
And finally, summing forces in the y direction gives D),:
l:Fy ~ 0 ~ -C; - Dy + E
D, ~ - C; + E = - 320 + 395 = 75 Ib
':
!.~
Next, we shall use Dx and Dy on Figure 21e) to obtain Bx,and By. No moment
equation is necessary this time: t .
....:t.- I:.Fx = 0 = Dx - Bx => Bx = Dx = 4 17 lb

+1 l:Fy ~ 0= -By - 150 + D, => By = -150 + 75 ~ -75 lb
The reader may wish to'verify now that about any point P, I:.Mp = 0 for the
free-body diagram of Figure 2Ie),
(Continued)
*We are assuming (see Figure 2(cll that the 250-lbforce is applied to the pin at C; Thus
we shall find that Cx ::;6 C~.If the 250-lb force were instead directly applied, say, to m:ember
CDE, then the only forces on the pin would be Cx, Cy, C~, and C~. Therefore Cx would equal
C~,and Cy would equal C~ .. (It is for this reason, incidentally, that we needn't draw free-
body diagrams of the pins at B and D.)
f But, of course, we could write one. For example, moments about D would yield By
independently of our preceding work.
193
.J
320lb Returning now to Figure 2(c) of the pin, we find
-1- ',......- 167 1b

+1 LF, = 0 ~ - c, + c; ~ c, = c; ~ 320 Ib
Returning to the free-body diagram 121bIJof ABC, we find that there are no ..!
Ii'II.' more unknowns. This free-body is shown in the figure at the left.
I
42ft
751b
It is a good check on the solution to note that
-1-,}--'417Ib LFx ~ -167 + 417 - 250 = 0
2.-8 ft ~i LF, = 320 - 75 - 245 = 0

!: ,
250 Ib
I
-''--''fJ' A
LMA 167(71,- 417(2.81
1.40Ib-!t
2451b The value of tMA should be zero, but is not, due to roundoff to three
significant figures. IIf four figures are retained throughout, then this residual is
cutto LMA = 0.141b-ft.1
This problem is an example of a rigid frame; that is; separation of the frame
from the supports at A and E leaves a structure whose shape cannot change ekcept
by deformation of the parts. The reader should observe that were the rolld at E
replaced by a pin (such as at AI, the problem would then become statically
indeterminate. This is a characteristic of rigid frames. Such a frame will be
statically indeterminate if the external reactions cannot be obtained from the
equations of equilibrium written for the assembled structure.
E x A M p L E
The pin, which bears against the slot in B, is fixed to rod I<. The weight of. W is
125 lb. Find the force exerted by the pin onto B, the tension in the cable, and the
reactions at Band R onto bodies Band I<.
(Continued)
194
.,\.
SOLUTION
The free-body diagrams of value to us in this problem are shown in Figure I.
B, R, B,
By
R,
(a) (b) (e)

Figure 1
Note from Figure 1(aJthat here the pin reactions cannot all be found from the
overall free-body diagram. Three equations in these four unknowns plus the
tension T could be written. We shall use the free-body diagrams of the separated
bodies [Figures Ilbl and 11cllto solve the problem, then return to the overall free-
body diagram [Figure Iiall to check some 01 the results.
Using Figure 1(bl, we may find the pin force immediately by summing
moments about B:
'+) ~MB = 0 ~ 11.5 ftllPl-1125 IbJl1.25 It I
P = 104lb
Summing forces in the x direction on body IJ then yields
25(t) ~ 125It ...:!:.- I.Fx = a = Bx - P cos 30

from which
Bx ~ 1104J1,)312) ~ 90.1 Ib
Also, in the y direction,
+1 ~F, = 0 ~ By - 125 + Psin30

so that
By = 125 - 104(0.51 ~ 731b
The tension in the cable follows from moments ahout R on the free-body
diagram 01 the bar K! [Figure 1(cll:
'+) ~MR ~ 0 ~ T(2 sin 60 It) - (Pcos600Jl1.5 It I
T ~ 52.011.5) ~ 450 Ib
21,)3121
(Continued)
195
.,'
Then, the equilibrium of forces on J< results in
2:.... I:.Fx = 0 = P cos 30 - T - Rx
from which
Rx ~ 104(y'3121 - 45.0
= 45.llb
Also,
LF, = 0 = -Psin 30' + R,

R, = 104(0.51 ~ 521b
The overall free-body diagram, redrawn showing the calculated values of the
four pin reactions and T, is shown in the figure at the left.
As a check of the results, we see from this diagram by simple calculations
that 1:Fx = 0 and :EFy ~ O. Checking moments,
'+) LMB = -(125 Ib1l2.5 cos 60' Itl + (521b1l211.5 cos 60'1 It]
+ 145.0 Ibll2 sin 60' Itl
~ -0.311b-ft (slightly off from zero due to roundoff erroil

.45.11b
In contrast to Example 3.19, this problem is an example of a nonrigid name.
Separation of the frame from its external supports by removal of the rope and
731b 521b removal of the pins at Band R leaves the bars Band REreeto move relative to one
another without deformation of the individual elements. Note that the problem
is statically determinate in spite of the fact that the external reactions cannot be
determined solely from equilibrium equations written for the assembled
structure.
,
i
3.21............
. I ~,
E E X AMP L E !
In Figure 1 find the forces exerted by the pin at B on (al the pulley, (blthe bar ABE, ,.1
and IcJthe bar Be. . .:.11
-1
SOL UTI 0 N .l;1

We note by inspection that Be is a two-force member. The importance of such an :;~J
observation is in realizing the reduction in unknowns from four (two pin reacbons\~'~
at C and at BIdown to just one-the tensile or compressive forc.e in the member.~ ~
Thus we need no free-body diagram of that member. . J;1i
The overall free-body diagram, which will prove helpful in analyzmg the ',~I
)1
Figure 1 ~~~ ,
,
;'~(~
'
196
,
frame in t~is problem, is sketched in Figure 2. Equilibrium requires
;;'
,,, 500
'+) LMA ~ 0 = C,(3 mJ - 1500NJl2.5 mJ - (500 NJl4.5 mJ
/

C ~ 3500
, 3
= 1167 N
where we start with four digits in this example. Also,

_3m_
Ay Cy LF, ~ 0 = A, + C, - 500
Figure 2
A, ~ 500 - 1167
"" -667 N
Furthermore, we obtain:
or
Ax = -SOON
We note that the vector sum of AJ and AJ,J lies along BA because ABE,
loaded by forces at just two points, is also a two-force _member. Its free-body
diagram is shown in Figure 3. We see from this simple free-body diagram that the
pin at B exerts the 834-1b force shown on the bar.
The free-body diagram of the pin at B is shown in Figure 4, with Bx and By
representing the components of force extended on the pin by the pulley. The
1167-1b and 834-1b forces are the forces from the pair of two-force members.
4
Equilibrium of the pin requires
B"
--':... LFx = 0 ~ Bx 834(~)
l0
-
6671b 341b
I,
Figure 4
B'-<r 11671b
+\
Bx ~ 500lb
LF,~0=1167-B,-834(~)
B, = 500lb
5001b Putting the reverses of these two forces onto the pulley [see its free-body
diagram (Figure sll provides an immediate check on our solution by inspection.
In conclusion, the force exerted by the pin at B onto:
a. the pulley is - 5001 + 500) Ib

b. the bar ABE is 5001 + 667) Ib
c. the bar BC is -1167) Ib
500lb
Figure 5 Note that in this problem, the forces exerted onto ABE and Be at B are not
equal and opposite because of the presence of a third body (the pulley) there. What
is true is that all three of these resultants add to zero because their negatives
(Figure 4) form the totality of external forces acti.ng on the pin at B.
197
, ,..
'ir
E x A M p L E-3.22~
Rework Example 3.21 if the horizontal portion of the cable is tied to ABE at F
instead of extending past it to the wall at D.
SOLUTION
Recognizing again that Be is a two-force member, we have the overall free-body
diagram shown in the figure. Note that in order to isolate the frame, in this
example we have to cut the rope only once. Thus Ax = 0 because
Note that ABE is not a two-force member in this example.
--Q--u-e-s-tl-o-n-3-.-1-2--W-h-y-n-o-t.'-' ,------, :----------] .
Continuing,
'+) LM. ~ 0 = Cyi3 ml - 1500 NJl2.5 mJ
1250
C ~ -- = 417N
y 3
from which
+1 LF, ~ 0 = Ay + Cy - 500
Ay = 83 N
The free-body diagram of the pulley shown in the next figure is ,the same as in, '~
Example 3,21,
LFx ~ 0 = Bx = 500 N} Both as shown. These are the forces exerted
LF, ~ 0 = By = 500 N on the pulley by its pin, at B.
500 N OON B;
~B, . ~B'
SOON J<
B,
~
417 N
500 N
The free-body diagram of the pin, with (B~, B~l representing the forces exerted on
it by bar ABE, is shown above. Note that the force exerted on it by the bar Be is
(Continued)
198
,1.-
"
417 t N. It in turn exerts a force of 417 ! N on Be at B. Thus
:EF, = 0 = 500 - B~
B~ = 500 N
and
LF, = 0 = 417 - 500 - B;
B; =-83N or 83 iN (on the pinJ
Therefore the free-body diagram of member ABE is as shown at the left.

It is obvious that f.Fx = a = I:.F}" Checking for moment equilibrium,
83N"
LMA ~ -(83 NII3 mJ - (500 NII4 mJ + 1500N1I4.5 mJ
=IN.m (differing from zero due to roundoff error!
E x A M p L E 3.23~
r,
!r
G
-1 2m
The structure shown in the figure is composed of two light bars and a cable.' Find
the tension in the cable, the external reactions at A and D, and the interaction at
B, when the structure is subjected to the lOO-N load.
f:
~ Cable_
w
J B'll.nd~E
C x
,~' B
1.5m J lOON
1.5 m
Slider
z
: ,
t'
~
to: SOLUTION
['"
F
i r First we shall consider the free-body diagram of the two bars taken together as
shown in the next figure. We observe that, in this free-body diagram, eight
I.I unknown components of reaction appear. Thus we cannot determine all of the
:'.
, external reactions from the corresponding equations of equilibrium. However,

these equations taken together with those appropriate to one of the bars will tum
~i\ t'l out to be sufficient. Writing the equations of.equilibrium for the two-bar system,
i';~
H ~O
(A) + A,J + A.kJ + TeEG + ID,J + D,kl + 100(-11 = 0

(Continued)
199
J
y
> / lOON
Now eEG' the unit vector along the line EG, is
-1.51 +2) - 2k
eEG = ~=======
Ju .51' + 121' + (2)'
-- = -0.4691 + 0.625) - 0.62sk
Thus from the coefficients of I, ., and k, respectively, in:EF = 0,
Ax - 0.469T ~ 0 11)
A, + 0.62sT + D, - 100 ~ 0 (21
A, - 0.62sT + D, ~ 0 (31
Summing moments at A,
~MA = 0
1.51 x TI-0.469I + 0.625) - 0.62sk)

+ 131- kl x 1-100)1 + 131- 2kl x ID,) + D,kl
+ lCD,' + CD,k1 = 0
~, I or
Il.slI0.62sTllkl + Il.slI-0.62sTII-,1 + 31-1001lkl
+ 1-111-10011-11 + 3D,lkl + 3D,I-)1

+ 1-2D,II-Ij + CD,) + CD,k ~ 0
From requiring that the coefficients of I, j, and :k vanish, respectively,
- 100 + 2D, = 0 = D, = 50 N 141

'I
+0.938T - 3D, + CD, = 0 151
0.938T - 300 + 3D, + CD, ~ 0 16)
(Continued)
200
"
Holding Equations (11-161 in reserve, we now turn to the free-body diagram
of bar BD. Note that our six equations of equilibrium will involve only four'new
unknowns, because of the special nature of the connection at B.
The geometry here is so simple that it is relatively easy to write out the
equations of equilibrium directly in component form:
...:t.. I:F", = 0 =:> B;ro = 0 171

+1 ~F, = 0 = B, + D, - 100 = 0
r which, together with 141,yields
B, + SO - 100 = 0 or B, = SO N (81
:1 ;..-- l:Fz = 0 => Dz = a 191
From l:MB = 0, we obtain three equations:
(il (~MBI, = 0
CB, + 2D, - (1111001 = 0
or, using (41
CB, + 21501 - 100 = 0 = CB, = 0 (101
(iii I~MBI, = 0 = CB, + CD, = 0 (III
liiil. I~MBI.= 0 = CD. = 0 (12)
Substituting (41and 021 into 161

0,938T - 300 + 3150) + 0 = 0
T=~= 160N
0,938
This, together with 191,yields for (51
0,938
ISO ) + CD, = 0
( --0,938 - 3(01
CD, = -IS0N. m
(Continued)
201
'.'" ."
J
.;
!
and hence from 1111

CR, ~ 150 N . m
Note that now we have determined the cable tension and the forces and
moments associated with the connections at Band D. We now may return to
Equations I1H31 to obtain the components of reaction at the ball.and.socket
joint. .'
A, - 0.469(1601 ~ 0
A, = 75.0 N
A, + 0.625(1601 + 50 - 100 = 0
A, = -50 N
A, - 0.62511601 + 0 = 0
A, = 100 N
Our final results, displayed on free-body diagrams of the individual bars/are

shown in the figure below.
tlsON.m
1 so N
. ----7
x
SON SON
In the last two examples of this section, we shall have a preview of

what is to come in Chapter 4. In the examples thus far, we have only
removed supports, pins, ropes, and so on, leaving the various constituent
members of the body intact (or whole). We have also made use of the
special features of two.force bodies and pulleys. But there is nothing to
prevent us from actually slicing through a member in order to expose, on >-:~
a free.body diagram of only part of it, the forces and couples it transmits to
the other part. This will be a distinguishing feature of Chapter 4. The
following two examples will introduce the idea, although it is important
to realize that there is nothing really new here in concept. We again are
using the fact that a body in equilibrium has each of its parts in
equilibrium. If we wish to determine a certain force (and/or couple), we
must choose a free.body diagram that exhibits the force as external so that
it will appear in the corresponding equations of equilibrium.
202
,.
)
I
I
E x A M p L E
For the beam of Example 3.6, find the force-couple resultant transmitted at a
cross section 3 feet from the left end.
t=l..r
200
Ib/ft 1600
Ib
I
I
I
. 6ft-+2ft+2ft
SOLUTION
We first separate (cutl the beam at the cross section of interest Ipoint CI and then
sketch the free-body diagram of the material either to the left or to the right of the
cut. Here we choose the material on the left. The free-body diagram is then shown
in the figure, with the dashed 600-lb force representing the resultant of the
'6001b
~
15ft
-+- ~ 15ft~
r~
F
1j
Li
960lb y
L
distributed load over the 3 feet. The 960.1b force at A is the reaction already
determined in Example 3.6. Only a portion (3 feetl of the 200.lb/ft distributed
load is external to the body we have chosen to analyze. The resultant:of that
r distributed loading is 600 pounds as shown on the free-body diagram. For this two-
!, dimensional problem the arrow code indicates that we have chosen to represent
I the force part of the resultant exerted on the material to the left of the cut by the
I material to the right of the cut as .
I FJ + FJ
i The couple part of the resultant is expressed (vectoriallyl as Mk.

Applying the equations of equilibrium in component form,
I
I
et..
so that
:EF, = 0
I
I
! and
+1 ~F, = 0
I (Continued)
203
!
or
F, + 960 - 600 = 0
so that
F, = -360 lb
and
1:Mc = 0
or
M + 1.516001 - 319601 = 0
so that
,
M ~ 1980 Ib-ft
It is instructive to see what would have happened had we chosen instead to I '
apply the equations of equilibrium to the material to the right of the cut. 'the \,
appropriate free-body diagram is shown next. Note the 840-1bright-end reaction
previously found in Example 3.6. Note further that the arrow code and letters
(Fx1 Fy' M) represent automatic satisfaction of the action-reaction principle.
The equilibrium equations yield
las beforel
and
- F, - 600 - 600 + 840 = 0
F, = - 360 Ib las beforel
and
'+) 1:Mc ~ 0
-M - 1.516001 - 516001 + 718401 ~ 0
M ~ 19801b-ft las beforeJ
Thus the answers are independent of which: part of the cut body we use to
obtain them.
204
.....
,
.
r
j'
j j
E x A M p L E
For the boom of Example 3.9, find the force-couple resultant transmitted at a
I,
,. cross section 4 feet from the TIght end of the boom.
,
I,
,.
3ft. D
--,
x
loolb
SOLUTION
Isolating the part of the boom to the right of the cross section in question, we
obtain the free.body diagram shown next. We found in Example 3.9 that the force
exerted by the wire is
~ 'CH
T2e2 = T2--
Irc,,1
= 4721-0.7431 + 0.371j - O.S77k)
~ -3511 + 17Sj - 263k lb
T1 = 472lb
M, I it C 3ft D
100 Ib
Applying the equations of equilibrium,
rF = a
IF) + F,l + FJ, + 1-3511 + 17Sj - 263k) + 1001-ji = 0
(Continued)
205
. :
Thus
1: Fx - 351 ~ 0
F, = 351 Ib
J: Fy + 175 - 100 = 0
F, = -75 Ib
k: F, - 263 ~ 0
F, ~ 2631b
Taking moments about point E will yield the couples at A:
~ME = 0
(M) + My) + M,kl + rEe x T,e, + rED X 1-100)1 = 0
M) + My) + M,k + II x 1-3511 + 175) - 263kl

+ 41 x (-IOOJi = 0
M) + My' + M,k + (175k + 263)1 - 400k = 0
Thus
1: Mx = 0
J: My + 263 ~ 0
My ~ - 263 Ib.ft
k: M, + 175 - 400 = 0
M, = 225 Ib-ft
W ...-!t'~
. l" ,. .
Question 3.13 Why did the force exened by the wireBGon the boom:
appearneither ~n the free~b!Jdydiagram nor~in the equilibrIum equations?
,p ROB L EMS / Section 3.4
3.159 In Figure P3.159 the force of attraction between a 3.161 Find the weight of IJ for equilibrium of the system
pair of particles is 26 lb. What forces would have to be shown in Figure P3.161.
,applied (if any), and where, for the system to be in equi-
librium'?(No other forces att on the particles.) 3.162 Find, by successively drawing the free-body dia-
grams suggested by I, 2, and 3 in Figure P3.162, the
3.160 Using free-body diagrams, find the forces in the force that the man must exert to hold the weight in
ropes R" R" and R,. (See Figure P3.160.1 equilibrium.
'206
.. ,t. ;,
I
, .
Figure P3.160
x y
Figure P3.159
I \
1\
I I
I I
II f-Q)
I
I I
I I
\ /
' .._--//
Figure P3.162
Figure P3.163
IdJI20N
Figure P3.161
3.163 The weight in Figure P3.163 is 1400 N. How much

force P does the man have to exert on the rope to lift the
! ~ weight? How heavy does he have to be to stay on the
i ground?
I
3',164 (al Show that the force F that the man must exert
in order to lift the engine of W lb using the chain hoist is
F= R -
( -- 2R
r)
(bJIf R = 10 in., r = 8.5 in., and W ~ 400 lb, how many
pounds are required? ISee Figure P3.164.J Figure P3.164
L.
" .}
"
"1.',
Man CD
e,
W
Figure P3.165
p
Figure P3.167
Figure P3.166
j'
,
: 1:
.~, ~1
3.165 In the block and tackle shown 'in Figure P3.165, a 3.166 In Figure P3.166 what is the force P needed to
single rope passes back and forth over pulleys that are free hold the weight W in equilibrium? Assume that all rope
to rotate within the blocks about axes II and mm in the segments are vertical.
figure. The particular bloc~ and tackle shown has two sc
pulleys in each block. 3.167 In Figure P3.167 what force must the man exert in ea
order to raise the crate of weight W?
a. If the man in the prec~ding problem uses the block
and tackle as indicated,to raise the engine, how much 3.168 Repeat the preceding problem if the weights of the
force must he exert this time? pulleys -A B, C, and 2J are, respectively, W/2, W/S,.
b. What is the ratio of r toR in the preceding problem for W/16, and W/4.
which the force he mus't exert is the same as it is with Ass
3.169 The two painters iii Figure P3.169 are slowly lifted
the block and tackle'
on scaffolds. The first man lifts himself (case aJ. The second 3.1
Assume all rope segments to be vertical. man is lifted by a colleague on the ground lease bJ. Each POrt
., J
__ --i'i
o o
.I 1
'l"
Figure P3.170Ia) Figure P3.170(b)
CD @
('J
,.
(b)
Figure P3.169
'i . Figure P3.170(c) Figure P3.171
scaffold weighs 40 lb. Each painter weighs 180 lb. For

. each case:
,I
8. Draw free-body diagrams of the painter and the

scaffold. three configurations. Find the tension in the cable over
b. Determine the magnitudes and the directions of all pulley A and the tension in the cable over pulley B for each
forces on'the painter and on the scaffold. configuration. Assume mass center locations so that the
platforms remain horizontal.
Assume that the pulley is small and frictionless.
,. 3.171 The five ropes in Figure P3.171 can each take 1500
3.170 The 900-lb platforms in Figure P3.170 are sup- N without breaking. How heavy can W be without
paned by the light cable and pulley system as shown in the breaking any?
'-~ ..
,.
I
~.172 The uniform har in jfigure P3.172 weighs 100 lh 3.174 Find the relationship between the load Wand the
and the man 140 lb. Find the tension in the cable for equi- force P for equilibrium of the differential winch sha;wn in [
I.
librium.lean the man exert'this much force?) Figure P3.174. The rope is wrapped around the different. !
sized cylinders in opposite directions.

,<,
3.173 The mass of the man'in Figure P3.173 is 70 kg, and
the mass of the scaffold on w,hich he is sitting is 10 kg. The 3.175 Find the force P required. for equilibrium of the,~_..J~
pulleys and ropes are light. :Find the tension in the cable weight and the fout pulleys shown in Figute P3.l75. :~;~. ,"
that the man is holding, and also the force he exerts directly
on the scaffold.
,
i'
,-
r
Figure P3.174
o
~-3ft-1
l.5ft l.5ft
Figure P3.17~
3.176 Two identical pieces of pipe rest against an incline

and a vertical wall as shown in Figure P3.176. Each pipe
has weight W, and all surfaces are smooth.
8. Draw free-body diagrams of the two pipes .
./ b. Determine the magnitude and show the direction of
each force acting on each pipe.
-Scaffold
Figure P3.173 Figure P3.176 ';1

"1:
',. r
22 ft 22 ft---'---- 22h- e
-l
o l 8in
.
A
b.
q
" 1 ",
Figure P3.1 77 Figure P3.178
E:
F
D f
I,
B
A
I,
!' e
II
A e A
Rough surface
iFigure P3.179
a I b.j. a I+.-b_Ta
~ -I, '.
Ij
Figure P3.180
3.177 Two SO.lb traffic lights cause a cable sag of 8 in. as

shown in Figure P3.177. Firid the tensions in the three Figure P3.181
sections of the cable to which they are clamped.
3.180 If b/a is 5, show that the compound lever system in
3~178 The two weights in Figure P3.17B are supported Figure P3.IBO will hold up a weight Wthat is 125 times the
with six light, flexible, inextensible cords. Find the forces magnitude of the force F.
irythe cords.
3.181 The object Bis compressed by the toggle device. If a
3: 179 Name the two-force members (not counting cables) person pulls with 20 lb as shown in Figure P3.1Bl, what is
in the four structures shown in Figure P3.179 (three have the compressive force exerted on B by block Ar Neglect
one and one has three) . friction between A and frame J.
)
Figure P3.182
I-OSm---l
3.182 If the 3000.lb spherical boulder is in equilibrium,

,~and if friction is negligi'ble except at the fulcrum F, find
. the reaction of the wall' on the boulder, and the angle e.
,. [See Figure P3.182.J
3.183 Cylinder.A Imass IS kgl rests on cylinder B Imass
20 kg} as shown in Figur~ P3.183. Find all forces acting on
cylinder B.
3.184 In Figure P3.184 the cord passes over a pulley at
C and supports the block (mass 15 kg), in contact with the
uniform bar AB 1mass 10 kgJ. Find the horizontal and
vertical components of the force at A on AB, and the force
exerted on the bar by the block.
3.185 If the archer's left hand is pushing against the bow

handle with a force P = 50 lb, what is the tension in the
string (as a function of a}? What are the vertical forces
exerted on the ends of the bow by the string? What is the
horizontal component of the resultant force exerted on the
archer's feet by the ground? Figure P3.185
..~.
3.4 ~ Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting Bodies or Parts of a Structure 213
Figure P3.187
, ;)1
:1:0pen position
I
."Figure P3.186 .

3~186 Determine the grippirfg forces on (a)the nail in the
rriost closed position of the pliers if F = 20 lb; (b)the pipe
i~ the most -open position of:the pliers if F = 20 lb. (See
,Figure P3, 186.1 ,.
3.187 The rod AB in Figure P3.187 weighs 30 lb, and the

block weighs 50 lb. Friction is negligible. What force P will
hold the system of two bodie~ in equilibrium?
,
3~188 Find the forces in whichever of 111,112,113, and 114
are two-force members. jSee Rigure P3.188.)
, I
3~189 /al Two marbles, each of radius R and weight W, are

placed inside a hollow tube ,of diameter D as shown in
Figure P3.189. Note that D JI 4R, so that only one marble
touches the floor. Find the minimum weight of the tube
th'e
.
t~e weights or dimensions. Ap
.
s{ichthat it will not turn over.:'(b)Show that if the bottom of
tube is capped, then it will not turn over regardless of
surfac~s are smooth. Figure P3.189
. <,
.,.j
,.. 11 '
214 . Chapter 3 Analysis of Equilibrium Problems
3.190 A counterclockwise couple of 1000 Ib-io. i~ applied

to disk (;, which is free taturn about a pin at 0', as shown in
Figure P3.190. Pin P, attached to 9, bears against the slot in
body...A. If the mass center of ...A is at C and the system is in
equilibrium, find the weight of ..-4. 11.<
3.191 In Figure P3.191, AB, AC, and BC

ar; lighr, slender
t:ol'
!~,
bars, joined at their ends and supported by a hinge at A. ~.';
Find la) the angle 0 for equilibrium and Ibl the force in,each ~,
bu . ~
3.1 ~2 In Figure P3.19i find the reactions of lal roller A :.~(','l.

onto bar 111 and (hI roller B onto bar 152 ! :;-
;.. "
3.193 Find the compressive force in the spreader bar .~'
Figure P3.190 shown in Figure P3.193. . I!;''!'
3.194 In Figure P3.194 the curve AB ~n block ABC isa: ..
parabola whose vertex is at A. lt~ equation is 2 x =~y.
i; '!:.
Plate P and shaft S together wetgh 200 lb. There tS hOi:'
friction at any contacting surfaces. Find the force P acti~g ;~t'
on the right-hand side of the block that will allow the bodl~s ,~
to be in equilibrium. Your answer should be in termsof';x, ~.~:
for x between zero and 8 ft. 1
Figure P3.191
3.195 In Figure P3.195 two identical cylinders C1 and 2, e
each of radius r and weight P, are tied together by a cord.
B p
s
~ IX'~64Y~3
300lb
E,
t-
A
x
. '.'
A E,
8ft
Figure P3.194
4ft
Figure P3.192
C~bles
"".
~i'. ~
) .~'~
1m [, \ 1m ",';, I
,
. ~.
O.8m Figure P3.193 ~
lOON
1m
I, ;; 1m
C<ibles Figure P3.195
__ ..-.1
. "-:;:-r-
. 11 ,.
3.4: Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting Bodies or Parts of a Structure 215
\ ' ,
.,they support a third cylinder C3 of radius R and weight Q. * 3.198 Two small balls .A and B have masses m and 2m,
There is no friction,
,
and the\ tension in the cord is just respectively. (See Figure P3.19S.) They rest on a sniooth
~ufficient to make the contact force between C1 and Cz circular cylinder with a horizontal axis and with radius R.
. zero. Find: They are connected by a thread of length 2R. Find the
a~ The tension in the cord .. angles 01 and 82 between the radii and the vertical line OC
j
b. The force exerted by the groun~ on C1 for equilibrium, as well as the tension in the thread and the
c. The normal force betw~en C1 and C) forces exerted by .A and lIon the cylinder. Assume that
t.he balls are very small and' that the tension is constant.
L~.:(~3.196Five identical smooth: 5-kgcylinders are at rest on a
~,' _,~,
,~.~:/ '300 incline as shown in Fig\ue P3.196. Find the normal
,~;" {~' force exerted by Bon C at A',~ Repeat the problem if there
l':~;~.':"a're100 cylinders instead of five.
t'
.t'.
~\ iii,
-"f." -(:
Figure P3.198
3.199 The two identical sticks shown in' Figure P3.199

are pinned together at A - and placed as shown onto the
smooth block, the width of which is 1/2. What is the angle
4J for equilibrium?
,,'~l ]
~\ :~3.197 Four identicaJ light rods are pinned together to form
'~~;tasquare as shown in Figure :P3.197, and supported by the
~'\four smooth platforms at the corners A, H, C, and D. A
_ . : sQ.loothsphere of radius R (2'R > aJ is then placed on the Figure P3.199
."~:square. Show that the horiz'ontal reaction between two
~'adjacent rods has magnitudeiWa/(Sy2hJ, where h is the
" height of the center of the sphere above the plane of the
square, and W is the weight tif the sphere.
I:)
!
* 3.200 What is the maximum overhang for each identical
c slab shown in Figure P3.2DD so that they are in equilib-
rium? There can be any number of slabs, each of length b.
Hint:' Start at the top instead of the bottom.
'I
\
,y Figure P3.197 Figure P3.200

","
'I' ".j.
3.201 Two quarter-rings, each of mass rn, are pinned pl., 6 in. _3in._
smoothly together at Q and held in place by the two forces
of magnitude P shown in- Figure P3.201. The plane is -
r------- t---------------,
----------------- ' .
smooth. Find the value of P for equilibrium. ,.A
Figure P3:.201
p :L2SJ:., Figure P3.204(a)
3.202 Two cylinders A and IJ are joined as shown by a

stiff, light rod R and rest in
equilibrium on two smooth
planes {Figure P3.202j. What is the angle between Rand
the horizontal?
A (200 N)
p
Figure P3.204(b)
Figure P3.202
i 3.203 Repeat the preceding problem if the cylinders are

I turned around (...4on the right, B on the left).
3.204 Show that .if the dashed membet .A is pinned to B

at A to fotm a simple pair of pliers IFigure P3.204IalJ, the
clamping force is 2P. Then for the actual locking pliers
comprised of members 1],: C, :h, and the link C IFigure
P3.204(bIL find and compare the new clamping force to the
simple-pliers answer.
3.205 In the preceding problem, let the length of (; be

variable, with its upper end allowed to pin to B anywhere
from directly above its fixed-position lower end to the point
of application of P. Find the largest possible clamping force.
B
o
3.206 Find the compressive clamping force on the object
at C in Figure P3.206.(Note
but not en
that the pin at B joins Band:h,
Then rework the Isimplerl problem if member .A
is pinned directly to B as shown in the lower figure. _2jii._ 6.2 in.
o .1
J 1
:,
'~
"
'
Compare the mechanical advantage of these simple snips
with the compound snips. Figure P3.206
.,.
ff: ~
~,3.207 In Figure P3.207, the blocks A and Brespectively
weigh 223 Nand 133 N, and the planes are smooth. The
connecting rod is light.(aJ Find the force Pthat will hold the
'System in equilibrium. IbJ Repeat the problem with P
applied instead horizontally to .block A. Figure P3.209
3.211 In Figure P3.211the cylinders A Iweight 50 NJ and

IJ (weight 150 Nj are assumed to be smooth, and they rest
on smooth planes oriented at right angles as shown. 'iFind
the angle 'P between the horizontal line xx and the: line
joining the centers of the cylinders .
. '
"~.
Figure P3.207
3.208 A block is lifted by the tongs shown in Figure

r3.208. Find the force exerted on member .c. at C, by
member I!.
3.212 The ring gear A is fixed in a reference frame to
which the centers of the sun gear C and spider arm S are
pinned at C.15ee Figure P3.2I2.1 A clockwise couple Mo is
applied to .s. Find the couple that must be applied to ine
order that all bodies be in equilibrium.
501b
I It
Figure P3.208
3.209 The identical wheels in Figure P3.209 each have

mass 80 kg, and the rod has mass 40 kg and is pinned to the
wheels as shown at A and B. The plane is smooth. Using
free-bodydiagrams, show that the three bodies cannot be in Figure P3.212
equilibrium in the given position .
..,3.210 In the preceding problem, compute the moment of a 3.213 In Figure P3.2I3 the pulley weighs 151b, the beam
. couple that, when applied to the wheelan the right in the weighs 60 Ib, the man weighs 160 lb, and the system is in
given position, results in equilibrium. equilibrium. Find the force in one of the two ropes at A,
.. 1.-
assuming the force is the same in each of the two ropes at

an end.
3.214 In Figure P3.214 the excavator is beginning to

remove a section of earth. If the force from the ground is
7600 lb, approximately 'normal to the'line AC as shown,-
find the force in the hydraulic cylinder strut BD,' and the
pin reactions onto the main boom at A. The weight of
the mainboom, dippers tick, bucket, and lift cylinders is
15,000 Ib; assume the horizontal mass center location of
the weight to be halfway between G and C.
3.215 In the pteceding problem, find the force FEF in the

hydraulic cylinder between the mainboom IADK) and the
dipperstick (FHI. Hint: Consider Figure P3.2IS, which is a
free-body diagram of dipperstick plus bucket, which to-
Figure P3.213
gether weigh 6200 lb.
Dipperstick
-----
G
3ft6in.
39 It
Figure P3.214
"'j ,;
p 15 It
Ilft
7600lb
Figure P3.215
'",.
3.216 For the rivet squeezer shown in Figure P3.216, find

the ratio of the clamping force at the point A to the gripping
force H.
3.217 Repeat the preceding problem if the handle is
member BCE instead'of BCD,'IRefer to Figure P3.217.J 'For"'
the same dimensions, does this give a greater or lesser
clamping force?
3.218 The toggle device in Figure P3.218 is being used to

crush rocks. If the pressure inthe chamber, p, is 70 psi and
the radius of the piston is 6 iri., find the force that the rock
Figure P3.216
crusher exerts upon the rock. Members AB, BC, and BD are
pinned at their ends.
H
3.219 For the frame shown in Figure P3.219, find the
magnitude of the force exerted on each of the connecting
B a E pins at B, C, and D.
A

D
J 3.220 The uniform slender bars in Figure P3.220 are
identical and each weighs 20 N. Find the angles a and P for
equilibrium .
.._---~~};:
3.221 In the frame shown in Figure P3.221. lal find the
Figure P3.217
reactions at A and E and (b) find the components- of the
forces at Band C on member ABC.
,.
Figure P3.218
,:J" :1. '
Figure P3.220
'"
,
, 25N
I
1--16 -I:!--16
III Ill-l
A B ;-- ... ,~. ~ -1-
Figure P3.219
25 kN
'~f
i
II
..
I!: E 1 Figure P3.221
," .. 1
8 in .......--.--
t
6em
I
t
25 in.
[' I
r
l
----30 cm----
fI Figure P3.224
75 in.
3.222 In Figure P3.222 compute the force in the cross-

member .L of the lifting tongs. Also find the horizontal
component of the force at A acting on the 200-N block.
3.223 In the preceding 'exercise, let the link of be re-

moved and let the members DA and CB be pinned where 12 in. t H t 12 in.
they cross. Find laJ the force exerted by this pin on DA,
and (b) the horizontal component
on UI.
. '
of the force at A acting
-11'
II in .
3.224 The utility loader (Figure P3.2241 has raised 1600 Ib
of earth and rocks to its highest possible position. Exclu-
sive of the bucket, each df two loader arms weighs ISO lb
[including the dumping s~rut fH) with mass center at C,
while the bucket weighs ,280 lb with the mass center of
it plus its contents at E. Determine the force in one of the
hydra:ulic lifting struts AB, and the pin reactions at D, in D
the given position.
3.225 In the preceding i}Jroblem, find the force in the

hydraulic dumping strut fH and the reactions at pin Ponto
the bueket.(Referto Figure P3.22S.1 Recall that the bucket
plus contents weighs 1880 Ib and that there are two of each
of the struts in the figure. Figure P3.225
.:
.,,*, .
30 50~ 3.226 Find the force exerted on member ABeD by the pin
.. C:., em em [-Cord
.~. _..
j.~ D
at B.
J:_C
3.227 The dumptruck in Figure P3.227 is ready to release
a load of gravel. The total weight being hoisted is 15,000 Ib
with mass center at- C. Treating the cylinder rod AE as a
two-force member, find the force in it at the indicated
position.
3.228 Find the force that the bar CE exerts on the bar AF
at C. (See Figure P3.228.1
3.229 In the frame shown in Figure P3.229, the members

are pin-connected and their' weights can be neglected.
Figure P3.226
a. Find the external reactions on the frame at A and D.
b. Find the forces at Band C on member ABC.
-40in.----
18 in.
F:igureP3.227
I';
i~ 0.2 m
I,
I IB
-1
C .
F
f-i m-i-2m
I ton 20kgr7J
.,.i-
222 Chapter 3 Analysis of Equilibrium Prob!ems
3.230 In the frame show~ in Figure P3.230, the members 3.232 A slender, homogeneous, 20-1t rod weighing 64.41b
are pin-connected and their weights can be neglected. The is supported as shown in Figure P3.232. The bars AB and
42 kN force is applied to the pin at C. Find: DE arc of negligible mass. In terms of 0, find the force Pthat
a. The reactions on the frame at A and E must be applied to the right end for equilibrium.
b. The components of th~ forces exerted by the pins at. 3.233 The crane in Figure P3.233 consists of two,trusses,
Band C on member ABC. two cables, and two winches. Cable 1, let out by winch 1 to
3.231 In Figure P3.23} find the reaction onto the frame at lower truss 2, passes over the small pulley at D and is
point F, and the force exerted on the pin at D by the attached to truss 2 at the center of the small pulley at C.
Cable 2, let out by winch 2 attached to truss 2, lowers th'e
member CF.
2000.1b antenna reflecto~ after passing over the pulley at C.
The lengths BD and BC ,are equal, and'the weights of the
4m trusses are to be neglected.
a. Find the tension in cable DC as a function of 8.
b. Find the force exerted by pin B on truss 21 and note
that it is independent of O.
~
f_I
3.234 In Figure P3.234 find the force exerted on ABCD
by the pin at C,
3m
D Cable 1
I
Figure P3.230
~-.
Figure P3.231 Winch
Figure P3.233
F
50 N
-~--3.2m
r-5ft-r-sft-l-IO ft-I
;hi ~ __ .'. -i'".
c
~
,,' .,.
I
3.235 Find the force exerted by the pin at G onto member 3.239 A worker in a "cherry picker" is installing cable
BEG.ISeeFigure P3.235.1 Neglect the weights of the bats, TV equipment. (See Figure P3.239.) If the man plus
.but consider rhe weight of the 200-lb drum ::D. bucket weigh 400 lb and the extendable member CE
weighs 800 lb, find the force in the hydraulic cylinder BD
"3:236 Find the force exerted ~y the pin at C onto member and the pin reactions at C :onto the extendable member
ABC. ISeeFigure P3.236.1 CEo Neglect the weight of BD.
3.237 Repeat the preceding problem if the connections at
A arid B are changed to those s~own in Figure P3.237 -Pin B
is attached to BD and bears against a smooth slot cut in
j; ABC.
:3.238 Repeat Problem 3.236 if the connections at A and B Figure P3.237
are changed to those shown in Figure P3.238. Pin B is
attached to ABC and bears against a smooth slot cut-in BD. A
!--120cm-l.
~Ic D E
90cm '~i
~ 60 em
60 em
'Z A
Figure P3.236
Figure P3.238
IOOOlb 4
3
Figure P3.23S
Figure P3.239
.,,~
~rt':I'r'\'~----------"""-_.=-=.-.-----------------------------------------""
1
1.3m
G I
-1
1.3m
2kNj
3.240 A carpenter has built a form for making concrete

patio slabs. A little girl of weight W walks on the inside 3.241 A frame is loaded as shown in Figure P3.24 1. Find
boards of the form as shown in Figure P3.240. Assuming no the forces exerted on member DC at D ,and at B.
moments are exerted at the eight connections A, 8, ... ,H,
. I . 3.242 In Figure P3.242 find the force exerted on member
find the largest force ever exerted by any connectIon, and
AB at E.
note that it is larger than the weight of the child. Hint: You
need only consider all positions (use xJ on board EAR, by
symmetry.
A [~ __ m ~ _ il:!=ft
Figure P3.244
i-1-3ft-1
~4ft
4001b
n
15001b
Figure P3.242
3.243 In the preceding problem, find the reactions exerted

on member AB at A if the distance AE is 6 ft.
3.244 Find: lal the force that AB exerts on CD at Band

(hi the force that the wall exerts on AB at A. ISee Fig-
Figure P3.245 ure P3.244.1
3.245 In Figure P3.245 find the vertical component of.the

reaction at C. Can the horizontal component be found by
separating the members of the frame? If S0, find it; if riot,
why not?
I ... 1
..
3.248 Shown in Figure P3.248 is a sketch of a dir,ector's

3.246 Find the reactions beneath each wheel, assuming
chair. If the director is well-fed at 260 Ib and if he sits with.
symmetry I and the reaction on the ball {attached to the
each of 4 legs supporting 20% of his weight, find:
t truckl of the ball-and-socket joint. ISee Figure P3.246.1
a. The force exerted by the floor onto a leg, neglecting
friction. there
b. The force in the link member of
c. The force exerted by the pin at E onto member BED.
~I
:
.f
I
J , .
" .. ~.~
Figure P3.246
* 3e247 In the preceding problem the answers for the forces

under the front tires are 753 Ib leach of two), and under
, ,the back tires, 891 lb (each of two). A "load-leveler," or
"equalizer," hitch can be us'ed ta more evenly distribute
Back legs not shown
these farces. Each af two angle bars A fits and "bottoms"
Figure P3.248
1.; into a socket an the trailer side {see Figure P3.24 71, and its
chain is pretensianed to 400 lb. Assume the ball and socket
to be in the same position rel~tive to truck and trailer as in
the preceding problem. Find'the distances a and b in the
figure (which add to 2 Itl for which the reactions of the road
3.249 [n Figure P3.249 the sleeve is pinned to bar Band
on the four truck tires will be equal. For these values, show
can slide smoothly on the rod R. Find the force in the cord
that the force between ball and socket lwhich was 'previ.
if.,the system is in equilib~ium. Then repeat the problem
ously 289 lbl is greatly. increased._whereas. the ,reactions of
the road on the trailer tires '(which were 506 lb each) are.' . if the sleeve is pinned ta R and free to slide on 11
slightly increased. .
-2ft-I
-a-I- b-
T ~
S
~ciB f2~
Truck
Figure P3.247
H
;: -
,
,A
/
Chain
I
~-lm---lm-
Figure P3.249
/[ l'
.
S20N
3..250 When running, the clothes dryer drum 2>is turned 7 in, 8 in.
2 in.--- -------~
by means of a belt that passe$ around a motor pulley mas
indicated in Figure P3.2SD., The belt also passes under an rc-., 11 A B
. 'l:.t.,
~11
idler pulley .!J that is pinned tQ the bracket 8. The bracket is
I ~
supported by the floor 'J of t~e dryer, which bears against
6 in.
in.; ..
~.~...'
extensions of I] that fit through 'slots in :J. If the force at A is 9 '!...
vertical, and if that at B has both x and y components, find
"thesereaction forces when the dryer is turned off, if the belt
tension then is I lb. Neglect the weights of Band .!J, and 81n(:I
I
I
7;n~1 rn
t ... _~.~~_
note that this means you are actually finding the dif-
ferences between the reactions with and without the belt. c
Figure P3.251 800 lb 1 --

5 in. 6 in.
Cable I
q~---~
~ !
.;> I
I
2~
Figure P3.252
Figure P3.250
3.251 The suspension shown in Figure P3.2SI supports

one-half of the front of a car. find the force in the spring and
the force exerted on the frame by the members AB and CD.
The wheel and-its b"rakes'andsu'ppori wei-gh 100'lb with Figure P3.253
mass center at G.
3.252 In Figure P3.252 winch I is used to raise and lower r = 30 em

the boom of the derrick. After the desired angle f) is
reached, winch 2 is then used to raise and lower the load.
If 0 = 50, find the forces in cables 1 and 2, and the
compressive force in the boom.
i
~~I i
3.253 In Figure P3.2S3 find the fotee P that will hold the
system of two 200-N cylindE:rs and two light bars in equi-
librium. (The other bar is behind the one shown.)
3.254 Determine the components of the pin forces onto

B
n
9600 N
the bars at A, B, and C. ISee Figure P3.2S4.) Figure P3.254
",.'
I
I
I
I
I
3.4 Applicationsof the Equations of Equilibriumto InteractingBodies or Parts of a Structure 227
..
.j'
~' "
Find the magnitude of the force of interaction
-'f:~1'3'.255 which they rest weighs 800 N with mass center at C3, and
is supported by two pairs'of crossbars (one pair shownJ ..
""between the two bars of Figure P3.255.
Neglecting the weights of the crossbars, find the mag-
nitude of the force transmitted by the pin that connects
these two members at F. Assume that half the load is
carried by each pair of crossbars.
3.258 Draw the free-body diagrams of all members in
T
Figure P3.258 and compute:
a. The force exerted by the pin at C on member ACD
6 It
b. The reactions at A and B.
Figure P3.255
!- :
'"
.~ ~ 30
cm
.. 3.256 Find the pin reactions at B on member AB.
Pin
Figure P3.258
Figure P3.256
3001b
8ft
3.259 For the frame shown in Figure P3.259 find:
" 3.257 The blocks in Figure P3,257 each weigh 1250 N, a. The reactions onto the frame members atA and E
..,l. with
centers of mass at C1 and:Cz. The (shaded) platform on b. The force exerted on BDF at D by the pin that joins
the two members BDF and CDE to the pulley there.
5m
3m
"
Cable
5
/'
12
2,15 m F
I 2001b
t 2.25 m 21t-1
_I E
J
3.260 Find the reactions atA and B in Figure P3.260 when 3.263 In Figure P3.263 determine the components of the
the horizontal force P is applied to the three-hinged arch. pin force at Can memberA. A ; I'!,.
Neglect the weight of the arch. '1
'~
1,1
:!
- Pin "1
"
p c /
1'10
I
I
~
Figure P3.26~
3.261 In Figure P3.261, the pin at D is a part of member

EB. Find:
Figure P3.263
8. The reactions at A and B on the frame members .
b. The force exerted by yD on EB at D.
3.264 Find the reactions exerted on the bent bar AB at A
and B. (See Figure P3.264.J
1m
Figure P3.261
Figure P3.264

I kN
.;
, , 3.265 In Figure P3.265 :what is the compressive force
3.262 The length of the connecting rod Ie of the steam exerted by the nutcracker ,on the pecan? What is the force
engine is 5 ft and its crank (, to which it is pinned at B, has
l in the link AB?
length 10 in. ISee Figure 1>3.262.) The front and back
pressures on either side of the piston are.indicated. Find the .~
A B
force in. member R, neglec'ting friction and assuming all " ----r
bodies to be in equilibrium. Hint: Note that C carries a
t
moment and is not a two-force member!
1 B
"
Piston
p. J 5 in.
p,-
100 psi
__
1 is;;
20lb 201b
'oj "
I
~
x----
d
F
5m~25m4
w '.'''''''0
. ~;.
',";
;,
i'

'-1' 200N
~:i:I'gure P3.266 Figure P3.267
{~.i
.>~.
Figure P3.268
3.266 In Figure P3.266 find the force F needed for equi-

librium of the system Icalled "Roberval's Balance"!, and
show that the value of F is independent of its position
(i.e., doesn't depend on xl. Neglect the weights of the
,.',' 200 Ib.ft
members.
Figure P3.270
3.267 The linear spring exerts a force at each of its ends
that is proportional to the amount of stretch it undergoes.
In Figure P3.267, the spring modulus (proportionality
constant) is 2 N/cro and its natural lunstretchedl length is
1.5 m. Find the normal.and friction forces (a) between
cylinders A and B and(bl between B and the ground,
if the weight of A is 500 N and that of each of Band C
is 200 N.
3.268 The weight (500 NJ is suspended from point E by a

cord, Find the force exerted at point D onto the shaded
member BDCby the pin.ISee Figure P3.268.1
3.269 Repeat the preceding problem if the slot 'is cu.t in

BDC and the pin that slides in this slot is fixed to ACE.
3.270 Find the torque (twisting moment) carried by the

sections SI S2 and S3 of the stepped shaft shown in Fig-
J J
Figure P3.271 ure P3.270.
3.2'71 A cylinder weighing 2000 N is symmetrically

lodged between two pairs of cross pieces of negligible
weight. (See Figure P3.27l.1 Find the tension in the rope
AB. (AD and BC are each continuous bars.)
3.272 Tbe 100-lb bar in Figure P3.2 72 rests in equilibrium

against the 200-lb cubical block. The contact is smooth
~------~---------- (frictionlessl between the two bodies, Find the reaction cif
Figure P3.272 the plane onto the block.
~~.I,. ..,.1- J
3.273 The two rods 1]1 and 1]2 are pinned as shown, and 1]2 vertical around the azimuth-bearing and (b) turning around
is fit (with friction) through a sleeve in body 1]31 which is a horizontal (elevation) axis 'normal to the page throu'gh a
pinned smoothly to the grou:~d. The 12N . em couple is about 'two elevation bearings. This is called an elev'ation
applied to lJ1 as shown in FigureP3.2 73. Find the resultant over azimuth positioner. Sometimes there is yet another
of the force system exerted by 1S3 on 82 expressed at Q as
I azimuth rotation (for polarizationj at the top.) If the tooth
a normal force, friction force, and a couple. force F from the pinion onto one of two elevation sector
gears is as shown, find the magnitude of F. Neglect the
weight of the elevation assembly, which is in equilibrium,
and assume just one tooth on each side is in contact.
3.275 The slender rod AC in Figure P3.275 is pinned to

the small block at C. Friction prevents the block from
sliding within the slotted body IJ. Find the reactions onto
the bar at A and onto f] at B.
Figure P3.273
_---2 ft---~ I
3.274 In Figure P3.274, the positioner supports a large
Figure P3.275
paraboloidal antenna that is not shown. The antenna
exerts the forces and couple (caused by wind and weight) 3.276 Repeat the preceding problem if the 60 angle is
shown at Q onto the positioner. (For infonnation's sake, changed to 90.
the ;antenna is "positioned" by la) turning about the
3.277 Figure P3.277 illustrates a jib crane. Its beam
weighs 600 lb and is 10 It in length. The weight of the
suspended object is 400 lb. Plot the tension in the upper
cable as a function of distance d, and find the pin reaction
at Bwhen d = 6 ft.
Figure P3.277
Elevation
sector gear
Azimuth
bearing -- 3.278 On a ten-speed bicycle, measure the following
lengths (shown in Figure P3.278J:
R I, R2 = large gear radii jmeasure to the middle of the

teeth);
R = wheel radiusj
Figure P3.274 R J = radius to the middle of the pedal.
..../-
3A , Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting BOdi~'Sor Parts of a Structure 231
Let the bike and rider be traveling at constant speed, so that or

the force I is balanced by air resistance and we may consider
FfRfr.
\
the problem to be one of statics. Let Ff be a foot force, taken I = friction force that = __ J
\.. here to be constant for all gear combinations, with the moves the bike RRj
!I pedal in the same position (s.hown)for each. Show, using
Thus the driving force I is largest when i~";Riis largest, i,e.,
, ,I appropriate free-body diagrams, that:
the "easiest" gear ratio iSIs/RI. Make a table ordering the
f.
,
I 1. TR; = FfRf (where Rj is RI or R2, depending on ratios from the easiest to the "hardest," II / R2 Then re-do
the gear being used); the chan by using ratios of numbers of teeth and compare.
loeally, ,he answers should be ,he same. Why should ,hey?
and
2. TIj = fR(whereIjisII1I2,I3,I40rIS' depending

on the gear being usedl;
iiill so that
Figure P3.278
* 3.279 Three identical spheres that each weigh 10 N rest

on a horizontal plane touching each other. They are tied
GeometriCdl hints:
together by a cord wrapped around their equatorial planes.
A founh lO-N sphere 2 is placed atop the others as shown
in Figure P3,279iill, Negle'ding fric'ion, find ',he' smalles'
cord tension needed to hold the spheres together. [Refer
also '0
Figure P3.279(bl.j
.c_ r 0
In vertical plane through centers of .A and 2J,
Q is in the plane of the three centers, equidistant from each.

Figure P3.279(a) Figure P3.279{b)
~'-."~
! 1
Top view
p Side view
Figure P3.280
* 3.280 Four identical marbles are stacked as shown in

Figure P3.280, with the three horizontal forces Pmaintain-
ing equilibrium. There is no friction to be considered
anywhere. Find the reactive forces between upper and
B lower marbles and give the minimum vaiue of P for which
I equilibrium can exist.
3.2Bf The three rods AB, DB, and CB (Figure P3.281J are
pinned together at B, and are also joined by the three
horizontal bracing members that are pinned to thein at F,
G, and E. Find the forces in the bracing members if a weight
of 1200 Ib is hung from B. Treat the pins as ball-and-socket
connections. The floor is smooth.
3.282 A steel bracket is bolted to a wall at A, and supports

a 1Q.lbmotor at B. The motor is delivering torque, with the
forces in the belt shown in Figure P3.282. The bracket
Figure P3.281 weighs 5 lb. Find:
a. The torque exerted by the two belt forces about the
centerline of the motor shaft
b. The force exened on the bracket by the wall at A
c. The moment exened on the bracket by the wall at A.
2001b
Motor shaft
~lb
2oo1b
Bracket 100 Ib
\ Belt
Figure P3.282
.. -.~..
1
."r"'. _-'ii'
! 3.4 Applications of the Equations of Equilibrium to Interacting Bodies or Parts of a Structure 233
lx, y, z) are
fixed in 83
Q
Figure P3.283
3.283 So as not to interfere with other bodies, an antenna If the reflector is modeled as indicated by a simple disk,
was designed and built with an offset axis as shown in determine the reactions onto /56 at E, and onto /55 at 0, if
Figure P3.283. The antenna is composed of a 12-ft, 1200-1h the system is in equilibrium in the given position. Neglect
p:arabolic reflector 1.11, a counterweight B2, a reflector sup- the weights of B3 and 85,
port structure 8) and a positioner. The positioner con-
sists of III a pedestal 11, that is fixed to the ground; 12)an * 3.284 In Figure P3.284 a quarter-ring is formed by two
azimuth bearing at a and ring gear by means of which the sections lAB and BCI of a circular bar heing connected by a
housing B5 is made to rotate about the venicalj and 13)an ball joint at B. The other ends are fixed to the reference
elevation torque motor at "E that rotates the support frame, also hy hall joints, at A and C. The three cahles then
structure 1]3 with respect Ito 85, The purpose of the hold the bar in the xz plane as shown. The radius R = 2 m,
counterweight is to place the center of gravity of the and the ring weighs ION/in. Find the cable tensions.
combined body 86(B1 + 82 + 03! on its elevation axis (x).
Figure P3.284
i". ., J
COMPUTER PRO B L. EMS / Chapter 3
3.285 There is a range of values of L/R for which the

uniform stick in Figure P3.285 can rest in equilibrium
in the smooth hemispherical bowl. Show, using the equa.
2 L
tions of equilibrium, that this range is :316 Ii.
< < 4.
Then write a computer program that will divide this
range into 101 equally spaced values of LI R and, for
~ach such value, to calculate and print the value of (J for
"equilibrium.
Figure P3.285
3.286 The uniform stick oJ mass m and length L rests in
equilibrium between two smooth walls as shown in Fig-
ure P3.286. Write a computer program to help you con-
struct a plot of the equilibrium angle e
of the rod versus
the angle. of the right-hand plane. .
4
3.287 The distributed load shown in Figure P3.287 has
a resultant of 300 ! lb acti;'g 4 ft from the left end. The
roller reaction is 200 lib. Note that two concentrated
Figure P3.286
loads increasing proportionately and adding to 300 ! lb
result in a roller reaction of 250 lIb; three loads in
233 i lb; four loads in 225 i Ib; etc. Write a computer pro-
,gram that will compute the value of this reaction for any
number of concentrated loads. Use the program to com-
pute the smallest number of concentrated loads needed to
make the roller reaction w:ithin 1% of the continuously
distributed limiting case.
3.288 Clearly, when the b.oom angle e in Figure P3.288

..
is either a or IT, no force in the winch cable is needed for
equilibrium. Somewhere between these values, the winch
cable .tension T is a maximum. We wish to find the value 2001b
of () at which this occurs. First, use the free-body diagram

ReviewQuestions 235
;,1
.:1elow of the pin at A, sum moments about B, and obtain Use the computer to generate data for a plot of T /Wversus
'/ an equilibrium equation, free of the boom compression C. o for the range a < 0 < 7L
Solve the equation for the ratio T/W as a function only of
, the angles 0, </>, and IjJ in the figure. Prove that </> ~ 012 and
that
5[1 - 2 cos 01
sin IjJ and
.J125 - 100 cos 0
IO sin 0
cos IjJ
.J125 - 100 cos O'
Answers to Text Questions I Chapter 3

Q3.1 The body is the composite of the diver and board. This force is not external to
that body; it is an internal force (interaction between parts of the body'.
03.2 Itis only the line of action of the force that is important.
Q3.3 The arrow code on the upper free-body diagram communicates the decision to
express the force exerted by the lower part on the upper part as RJ + RyJ. Simi-
larly the arrow code on the lower free-body diagram communicates thJlt the force
exerted by the upper part on the lower part is Rxl - il + Ryl- n
= -(RJ + RyJl .
Q3.4 Inertial frames of reference.
Q3.5 The new equation will be a linear combination of the equations we already havej
that is, we do not get another independent eqtiation. Recall that I:F =:0 and
I:Mc = 0 guarantees LMp = 0 for any point P.
Q3.6 Its line of action passes through A.
Q3.7 Yes, there is still enough constraint to prohibit rigid-body motion. Yes, the six
.,
; scalar equations from I:F = 0 and 'I:MA = 0 can now be solved for the six
unknowns FI, Fz, F3, Mz, M3, and T.
Q3.8 The center of Pz moves upward.
Q3.9 IWz - Wdl2
I!,
Q3.10 Y~s.
F Q3.11 LME = 0 = F ~ O}
N LFx = 0 = Ex ~ 0 See the figure at the left.
LF, = 0 = N = Ey
Q3.12 It is loaded at more than two points.
Q3.13 That force is not acting on the material that has been isolated here (free-body
diagram) for analysis.
Review Questions I Chapter 3

True or False?
1 Free-body diagrams help us considerably in writing correct equations of equilib.

rium in statics.
236 Chapter 3 Analysis of Equilibrium Problems .. :.
"' ,
'; ;!
2 If a free-body diagram of body Bis to be useful, then Bmust be in equilibrium. !},
3 On a two-force member, the two forces are equal in magnitude, opposite in ' I'i
direction, and each acts along the line joining their two points 'of application. tt'
4 If a body is in equilibrium under the action ofthree forces, and tWo of these ;i'~'
Intersect at a POInt P, then the. hne of action of -the thud also passes through'P. ,_ .. '7":~
5 If a body is in equili?rium under the action of three forces, and two of these are~'
parallel, then the thud need not be parallel to the first two. :i-;'~
6 If a body is in equilibrium under four forces-two

the other two also form a couple.
of which form a couple-then "i.
7 If a body is in equilibrium under the action of three forces, the forces need not be
coplanar.
8 A body acted on only by a single couple cannot be in equilibrium.
9 Let the external forces on a body be such that:EF = 0 and:EM = 0; then the body
must be at rest.
10 On a three-force member in equilibrium, the forces are either (a) coplanar and
concurrent or (b)coplanar and parallel.
11 The tensions in a cable passing over a pulley in equilibrium are always equal.
12 It is possible for a body Bto be in equilibrium with two separate parts comprising
B not being in equilibrium separately.
13 One of the most important things to keep in mind when drawing free-body
diagrams of various parts of a body is the action-reaction principle.
Answers: 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F 6. T 7. F 8. T 9. F 10. T 11. F 12. F 13. T
II,
I
i
I
Structural Applications
I TRUSSES
4.1 Introduction
4.2 The Method of Joints lor Pins)
4.3 Shortcuts and Rigidity/Determinacy Results
4.4 The Method of Sections
4.S Space Trusses
II SYSTEMS CONTAINING MULTIFORC.E MEMBERS
4.6 Axial and Shear Forces and Bending Moments

4.7 Beams/Shear and Moment Distributions
4.8 Differential Relationships Between qlx)' Vlxl, and Mlxl in a Beam/
Shear and Bending Moment Diagrams
III CABLES
4.9 Parabolic and Catenary Cables

4.10 Cables Under Concentrated Loads
237
2'38 Chap'ter4 Structural Applications
This chapter is divided into three parts. In the first part, we shall study
the truss, in which the internal force system for each member is
representable as a simple axial force. In the second, we shall examine the
internal force system for more complicated structures (beams and frames) t
in wJlich the internal system contains shear force and bending moment in "i'
addition to axial force. We shall then end the chapter with a study of
cables. The distinguishing feature of this chapter is that sections will now
be routinely cut through the members in order to examine the forces
within them. In Chapter 3, while we often separated parts of a multi-
membered structure, we did not often have to slice through the
individual members to form free-body diagrams, but rather just removed
the pins in most cases. Therefore the key word in this chapter is internal.
II Trusses
.......
4. 1 Introduction
We define a tmss to be an idealized structure consisting of straight and
.
'I.
1#,
i ~1
slender bars, each of which is pinned to the rest of the structure and/or
to the ground at its two endpoints by frictionless pins (or, in three-
dimensional trusses, by ball-and-socket joints). In addition, the structure
is loaded only by forces at such pins. Thus trusses are composed entirely
of two-force members. See the examples in Figure 4. I .
.,. ...
(:1) Plane truss. (b) Space truss.

Figure 4.1
We hasten to mention that the above idealization is a "mathemat-

icaltmss," and the connections are, in reality, rarely smooth pins or ball
joints. However, this idealization of a physical truss gives good results if
the centerlines of the members at each connection all intersect at a single
point; more will be said about this later. For now, the reader is invited to
note in the following set of photographs just a few of the many uses of
trusses.
. ,
I
4.1 Introduction 239
Lighting. Backing and mounting

Water towers.
structures for 'antenna&.
'f.
Crane supports in steel mills. Roof structures.
lr:
I- '.
Temporary support for new highways.
"
Conveyors.
I,
~
240 Chapter 4 Structur~1Applications
,
,I ~
: .~
Electric power transmission towers. Construction cranes.
Radio and TV towers. Supports for amusement park rides.

(Courtesy of Six Flags Over Georgia)
1
f,
Derricks. Bridges.
. 4.1 Introduction 241
The photographs have indicated that there are many practical

applications of the truss. Furthermore, even within a given application, "'
there are often a large number of different types of trusses. For exam-
ple, Figure 4.2 shows a number of common roof truss configurations. It
~~-
,4 .. King Post ~
~
~. Howe ~
~h~' MonO-Pile
~.
KK, Double Howe
~
......-~~
Multi.Panet W. ~
~~
f;W
.
Boston Hip, Hip Louver
~
~ ~ Cambered
Invened
Umbrella
,jZSZI ISZS1
~.
Cathedral
;;;--I~hd'1 "
Plte e F at
%
Floor Truss
' %
Figure 4.2 Roof truss configurations.

~
(Col!rtesy Southeastern Truss ~
Manufacturers Association) ,4 Duo Pitch ~ Mansard
242 Chapter 4 Structural Applications
should be mentioned that the names of the trusses may vary from one
manufacturer to another. Each type has its own special use and span ,I
capability.
_ ..
~: } -,~
... ..
.Questio;i 4;1 Three"f the entries'in Figure 4:2,if'Iililde only of '. '
tp
tWb-forcemeinbers; would not be able maintain their shapes if'~
detached from their supports. Which or.es are they?' .. ' .
If the members of the truss all lie in a plane las in Figure 4.llall, then
we have a "plane truss" i if not IFigure 4.11b1Lthe truss is called a "space.
truss." We' shall introduce the methods of truss analysis with plane
trusses, then consider the more complex space trusses later in the section.
By its definition, a truss is made up only of two-force members, and
the force distribution across any cross section of a'member has a very.
simple resultant. To determine it, we note, recalling the discussion of
two-force members in Chapter 3, that a truss member carries only a pair
of equal magnitude, oppositely directed, forces along its length Isee
Figure 4.3).
Therefore, if we cut a section through the respective members
shown in Figure 4.3, we obtain the free-body diagrams shown in
Figure 4.4.
or
(3) T~nsion member o.f a truss. (b) Compression member of a truss.
Figure 4.3
(,j (b)
Figure 4.4
4.1 Introduction 243
In both parts of Figure 4.4, the resultant is simply an axial force.

This is because, if we were to assume the more general d'istribution of.,
internal forces across the lower section of Figure 4.4lal to be as shown in
Figure 4.5, equilibrium would immediately require that the shear force
IV) and,the bending moment 1M)vanish and .that.the axial force IA,Ibe.~
.,.
Figure 4.5 equal to P'
A truss member in the condition of Figure 4.4lal is being stretched
and is said to be in tension; the member of Figure 4.4lb), however, is being
compressed and is said to be in compression. (If P = 0, of course, the
member is not 10aded.1 These are the only possibilities for truss member
forces, and thus the answers are easy to present. For example, if we say
that theforce "in" a member extending from A to B Imember ABI is 647 N
CD, we mean that a free~body diagram of ABlooks like Figure 4.3(a) with
P = 647 N. Similarly, if we say the force in a member DE is 212 Ib @,
[, we mean that a free-body diagram of DE looks like Figure 4.31bj with
P=212Ib.
For example, the truss shown in Figure 4.6 has seven members that,
if the truss is solved, t carry the forces indicated in Figure 4.7 lall in kips,
or "kilo-pounds"; I kip = I k = 1000 lb}. The forces exerted on the
various pins are also shown.
We. shall return to that truss in Example 4.1 and actually compute
the indicated member forces after more preliminary discussion.
Though truss members are always assumed to be pinned at their
ends, in reality this is seldom the case. The members of toof trusses and
bridges, for example, are normally connected by means of a plate to which
the members are joined by nails, rivets, pins, welds, or bolts at a number
of points, as suggested in Figure 4.8.
Although it may seem like a bad assumption to replace a plate
and a large number of bolts with a single pin, this is not the case. If the
"'Figure 4.5 refers to a member of a plane truss. If the member is from a space truss,
then equilibrium would require that two shear forces vanish, that two bending moments
and a twisting couple also vanish, and that, again, A = P.
t Meaning all the forces in its members have been found.
199/ \
~~164
0.74
'1.64
A
3.03
2
3.03
"
.. -_._~,
:~7-':>---
182
0.74 3.03
199/ ~03
2~3.19
LS8
3.19+182 182 - l'
2.42
Figure 4.7 (All forces in kips}
(a) Roof truss connection. (b) Gusset plate connection.

Figure 4.8
center-lines of the members intersect approximately at a point as shown

in Figure 4.8, then the structure turns out to behave very much as though
..
.... " -~ ..... itwere an ideal truss; that is, the transverse Ishear) forces and the bending
.moments in the members will be small. S~ch structures are thus usually
analyzed as ideal trusses.
There are two main methods commonly used in truss analysis: the
method of joints and the method of sections. We shall begin our study
with the method of joints (or pinsl.
~4.2 The Method of Joints (or Pins)

In this section, we will be studying the usenf the method of joints in truss ',.
analysis. This method is simply to isolate one pin at a time Iwith a free- .,
body diagram) and to write the equilibrium equations for it. Oftentimes, .,
,";
I
1
4.2 The Method of Joints (or Pins) 245
r we can at the outset find at least one pin on which only two unknown
I
I member forces act; when this is the case, * both these forces may be found.
from LFx = 0 and LF,. = O. After doing so, we repeat the procedure at
another joint and thus work our way into and through the truss.
F"
B
Fu
~
3k 2.42 k
(a) (b)
Figure 4.9
I Before moving into some examples, we wish to first discuss the

I directions of unknown member forces acting on pins. Consider the
I ,Pin C
free-body diagram above [Figure 4.9(bll of the pin at point B of Fig-
ure 4.9Ial, where the 2.42-kip force is an already determined roller reac-
tion. Now, when we sketch a force such as FeB! pushing on the pin of
Fc~ a joint, we are assuming the member which is doing the pushing (CB
in this case) to be in compression (<<]1. This is because if the member
pushes on the pin, then by action and reaction, the pin pushes back,
compressing the member. Thus the four forces associated with mem-
ber CB (the two it exerts, and the two exerted on itl are in the direc-
tions shown in Figure 4. 10 if member CB turns out to be in compression.
lIn this particular case, we are actually sure that CB is in compression
because in the free-body diagram of joint B, only member CB can have
a Ivertical) component to balance the upward roller reaction of 2.42 kips,
FC~. pinB and the vertical component of FCB onto the pin at B can be downward
Figure 4.10 only if CB is in compression.)
On the other hand, if we draw a force such as FEB pulling on a pin;as in
Figure 4.9(b), then we are assuming the member IEB here) to be in tension
IQJ). Again the reason is action and reaction. If the member pulls on the
pin, the pin likewise pulls back on the member. (See Figure 4. I I.) We are
also sure here that EB is in tension, once we have seen that CB pushes
down and to the right onto pin B. In the free-body diagram of pin B
pin E pin B
- -4!'iIil iiIii lilmll::;~--
FEll FEB Ft8 FEB
Figure 4.11
*This always happens with "simple plane trusses," as we shall see later.
fWe attach no meaning to the order of the subscripts on the force; thus FCB = FBC'
1
'246 Chapter4 StructuralApplications
IFigure 4.9(bJl, only FE. can balance the horizontal component of Fe.,
which is to the right.
Sometimes, however, we are not certain of the direction of a force.
(For example, does it push, or pull, on a pin 11In such a case, we simply,.
guess one or the other, andjf the solutionJor the force_F_turns out in the _ .::
algebraic solution to be negative, this means the bar is in tension if we ~
"assumed" compression, and vice.versa.* For example, suppose we .'
assumed that member AB was in compression and later found FA. ~
- 300 lb. It is common to then communicate that the force in AB is
tensile by writing FA. ~ 300 Ib CD. This second use of the symbol FA. is
not an algebraic statement, but merely a shorthand means of reporting
that the force in AB has been found to be tensile with magnitude 300 lb.
We are now ready for our first example, in which we shall solve (for
all the forces in the members of) the truss of Figure 4.9Ial. ~;.
-I 1
4ft 4ft
lA _I A
F" t FA,.
Figure 1
I
.$O.LU.TI.ON
We begin by finding the reactions at A and B, which are the forces exert~d on the
truss by its supports. Using the free-body diagram of the overall structure, ~e
(Continued)
*Usually in an engineering analysis, if we make an assumption and then find it to be

false, we must revise our assumption and repeat the analysis. That is not the~casehere
because the "assumption" isn't really an assumption in the usual sense. Rather, it is
nothing more than a statement of the physical significance of a positive value of the scalar
used (together with a unit vector) to represent a certain force vector. There is actually 'no
prejudgment about the sign of the scalar since the laws of mechanics and mathematics vi'ill
dictate its sign. Because the practice is widespread, however, and because it provides such a
concise means of communication, we use this weak form of the word "assume."
obtain
LMA = 0 = (12 ftJFB - (6 ftll3 kl - (3 ftlll kJ - (4 ftll2kl
Thus the reaction at the roller is

29 .
FB = -=.2.42 kips ._ ~ II"
12
Then,
F: e' 2.42k
I , ~
, I,
~-
+1 LF, ~ 0 ~ FA, + Fie - I k - 3k
I
, so that the vertical component of' the pin reaction is
t FA, = 1.58 k
t (The reader is encouraged to check this value of

Continuing,
FAy by using I,MB = 0.)
i
t, ~, ct... LFx=0=2k-FAx=FAx=2k
t
!
r
F" t 2.42 k
We are now ready to use the method of joints. We use the free-body diagram
[Figure 4.9(bll discussed earlier and repeated in Figure 2. We obtain the forces FCB
I.
(
. Figure 2
and FEB by satisfying the equilibrium equations of the pin:
r
, 5
;;.
FCB = -(2.421 = 3.03 k lor FCB = 3.03 k ~I
4
~, Because FCB came out positive, the bar CB is in compression as assumed. Then,
3
~ LFx = 0 = - FCB - FEB
5
FEB = 0.6(3.031 ~.1.82 k (or FEB = 1.82 k (VI.

Again the answer came out positive; this time we had assumed FB to be in
tension, so it actually is.
As we have mentioned, letters ~ "and <J) beside the force in a truss
. ~.< ;(l.. ... _
respectively indicate to us whether the member is in compression or tension. In

the case of a truss member, these letters tell much more than a direction arrow or
even than a vector representation. For example, if we were to say
FCB = 3.03 4~ k or
then this is OK if what is meant is the force exerted by CB onto the pin at B, and if
such is stated clearly. But if this force vector was used as the force exerted by the
pin onto CB at B, or as the force exerted onto the pin at C by CB, then the result
would be 1800 away from the correct direction. Thereforel a ~ beside the
answer "FCB = 3.03 kips/! removes all this uncertainty.
(Continued)
247
FeD C Next we analyze the pin at C. Its free-body diagram is shown in Figure 3.
2k
Enforcing the equilibrium of joint C,
~k +t };P, = 0 = -PeEm + 303m
Figure 3 Fef. = 3.03 k . lor Fef. = 3.03 k (DJ _.-

and
-7c m
3.03 k
-"- };Fx ~ 0 ~ 2 - FeD - 303m E
FeD = - 1.64 k lor FeD = 1.64 k ~I
, :Question 4~2 Why dO.'~~~p.se'pin :C'prior to E ,at this~Stage"qf the

'.'~.-'.
solution?
'.S"
',& .' ',_ ,'" ',' .' < ."', :', " }':;"; ':.,'"'", _ ,if "'.'~", . "~>{-, /" , .' .:.: .:
'~ .estiori 4;3 . Whyisthe'.3.03kip force asting upwardj'fidtotheleft ..
:'~onpi:nci~Figure3! '. ' /"" :... ," ,~:,' "'-' ,;',. ",
,i,
(, , ,~
;
Question 4.4 Why is the ~itectio: ass~ci1ted with FCE in the dia~:m:.-:,
j
.bqun"dto be,correc't here, and not "just a gues's? '. .
:. ' 11, : I
This time, we have encountered an incorrect guess for the first time, By "
the way we drew the force FCD in Figure 3, we had "assumed" member CD to
1.64 be in tension. We see now that it is in compression, as evidenced by the solution
FeD = - 1.64 k. Thus, the force in CD is expressed as 1.64 k <g.
We next examine pin D. Assuming members DA and DE to be in com-
pression yields the free-body diagram in Figure 4.
Figure 4
(Cominued)
248
Writing the equilibrium equations,
-L. ~Fx = a = FDAm - FDEm - 164
+1. H, = a = FDAm + FDEm - 1,
or
5
FDA + FDE = -111 = 125 k
4
Adding, we eliminate FDE and find FDA.:
2FDA = +3.98 = FDA ~ 199 k
Subtracting,
2FDE = -1,48 = FDE = -0.74 k

Thus we have guessed .the wrong direction for the force in DE. Because we
assumed compression, it is actually in tension:
FDE = 0.74 k QJ
At the pin at A in Figure 5 there is now but one unknown, which is the force
Z
.99k4~
in AE. Checking the equilibrium in the vertical direction, we see that
3
2k~, __ A +1 ~F, = 158 - 199(~) = -0.01 ~ a
FA'
t 1.58 k
the difference being due to numerical roundoff. ]0 the x direction,
Figure 5
-L. Hx = a = FA' - 2 - 199(~)
FAE = 3.19 kips (or FAE = 3.19 kips QJJ

Finally, we may use pin E as a check on the results. We come into it with
0.74k4 B.03k
calculated forces from five different directions jsee Figure 61.
3 3 The four bar forces in the free-body diagram were all computed to be in
.,'" . In :'""
tension; thus, they each pull on the pin at E. Checking the equilibrium of the pin,
we see that.
-L. Hx = 1.82 + 3.03(~) - 0.74(~) - 3.19 = 0.00

Figure 6
and
Thus we have successfully solved the truss.
249
;250 Chapter 4 Structural Applications
In the preceding example, the first free-body diagram was of the pin
.!\t
F" '
. 2.42 kiP~"
at B. ISeeFigure 4.12.) It could equally well have been drawn as shown in'
Figure 4.13, which is a free-body diagram of the connection, plusshon,
cut lengths of members CB and EB. With this approach, one sees more
clearly the tension or compression in the bars. '. _.-. _.
Figure 4.12
- F"
2.42 kips In Example 4. I the reader may have noticed that no member weights
Figure 4.13 were considered. If a structure is to be' analyzed as a truss, then, ,by
definition, its members can be loaded only by forces at their pinned ends.
Weights of tniss members will be neglected in the truss analyses in this
book.
In our second example, we shall not explain each step in quite as
much detaiL
",
E x A M p L E
,
Find the forces in the members of the truss in the figure.
SOLUTION
B We calculate the reactions, but only for use at tlte end in checking our solution.
We use the overall free-body diagram:
(the roller reaction)
(Continued)
....:!:.... LFx = a = FD...
+1 :l:F,. = 0 = FD, + FA + 300

FD, ~ -300 - 200 ~ -500 Ib
Thus the pin reaction is 500 lb l. We now use the method of -joints-to determine ._. _.
the forces in the members. From a free-body diagram of pin C, we have
LFy = O'= 300 - FCD(~): FCD = SOOlb lor 500 Ib (DI'

F
~c 130o'b
LF, = 0 = F.c - FCD(~) ~ F.e - IsOO{~)

F~
F.c ~ 400 Ib lor F.c ~ 400 Ib ~I
(Note that in finding FeD or FBC' we did not need the reactions. J Next, from a free-
body diagram of pin B,
2
B LF, ~ 0 = FA' .j5 - 400 = FA' = 200.j5lb lor 200.j51b ~)
F" /O_4001b
~ll
2 * FaD
or
F'D = 2001b lor 200 Ib (Di
200{5lb And from a free-body diagram of A,
A L .
2
FAD
. :l:F, = 0 =
2
-200.j5 .j5 + FAD = FAD = 400 Ib
lor FAD.= 400 Ib (DI
200 Ib t and for a check, using the precalculated 200-1b roller reaction,
I
LF,~ 200 - 200.j5 -::rs = 0 ,/ ,.
This completes the solution of the truss. As in our other example, though, we can
check our results at the remaining joint D. Applying the now-known member
forces and reactions to the pin, we get the free-body diagram and the following
equations:
5001b
LF, = sOo(~) - 400 ~ 0 ,/

D
400lb
:l:F, = 200 + soo(D - 500 ~ 0 J
5001b
251
~<
Because of the way its members are loaded, a truss is an extremely. -,l
efficient, lightweight structure. To emphasize this idea; we encourage
you to thInk about the dIfference between the weIghts WI and W2 that
could be safely supported by a yardstick In the two manners shown in ,"
:1 ;:'i~_
'. .FlgureA.14. In the diagram at the left, the membefIs loaded as It would be .1",.
In a truss i at the nght, the member IS a beam and 18 not a two-force
member because the reaction at the wall Includes a couple. .
~
i
We shall work through one more plane truss example with the ;~.
method of joints in the next section, after first discussing some shortcuts !Ii
that sometimes make truss analysis easier. ~
IFigure 4.14 :1.~:l

.,,~ :1
1
PRO B L ,E M S I Section 4.2

,-r...1;~
"I,r r,,'
FiJ?dthe forces in each meniber of the trusses in Problems

4,1-4.9.
4.5 C 800N ,ll-1~
4.4
2m fJ'~Ii
..~ ',~',,',:',h
D
;. H
A A
6 It Hen
,,- ,
,{t f,~
500lb
100Ib
Figure P4.4
200lb 300lb
,1~i'f
Figure P4.1
Figure P4.5 I +,l~,:, j

'1.','+ I
D
4.6
4.2 B B
i~~~
,,' :1. '1'
fi~ "
t!
!~
:1:~I ,:'
..
.11 \
4.7. D -j~'- '\
,;
200 Ib
I kip I kip :~;3~
.,,;. ii
Figure P4.2 3 It
, (. 1
Figure P4.6
E
3ft
750lb
.
~I >. I'
;\
;i:: t
,
4.3 B 'C D
F
B .--SOOlb
A
~
21b 31b "iFigure P4.7
F,igure P4.3
4,2 The Method of Joinls (or Pins) 253
4.8 E Pulley,
radius 1 ft
String
A
100 Ib
I
I
"
200 Ib/ft
Figure P4.8
r
!I
D
*.4.9 3m c
: 125N
1
Cables (unloaded when
tr~ss is free of force)
B 8('
calmot support compression.
I, 8 It
Figure P4.11
C 1
Figure P4.9
-I
'. 4,10 In Figure P4, 10 the hexagon ABCDEF of six uniform 8ft
pinned rods AB, BC, CD, DE, EF, and FA of equal lengths
ahd weights W, is stiffened by light rods AC, CE, and EA
ahd suspended by the string ~t A. Find the tension in AC,
_I
a'hd then the upward force that must be applied at D to -6ft-
"
reduce the force in AC to ze~o.
4.11 Members AE and EQ are pinned together as shown in Figure P4.12. Note that the external reactions are indeter-
Figure P4.11 to form a billboJrd. It is subjected to the given minate and cannot be found by statics alone.
distributed wind load. Find the forces in each of the two-
4.13 Find the forces in truss membets AB, BR, and OR '
QTce members. shown in Figure P4.13. Note that the exteI?al reactions are
4.12 Find the force in me~ber BD of the truss shown in indeterminate and cannot be found by statics alone.
7000 lb
8ft
5000lb .'
8ft
:1
1S ft
1500 It! I 3 it l
T
'8 ft
6 ft 1 3000 Ib
E1 3ftl
'20001b
FigureP4.12 Figure P4.13
* Asterisks identify the more difficult problems.

4.14 The truss in Figure P4.14 is pin.connected and is 200lb 400lb 300lb
supponed by the pin at A, and by the cable attached at B
and C. The cable passes over a pulley that is connected to D
the reference frame by a ~mooth pin. Neglecting the
Weights of the truss member~, find the force in RD.
F
F E ~
Figure P4.17
. '~cablc
D
1
51t
3001b 4.1" Find the force in member CG of the truss.
. j
CI~2.5 It
E
1000lb
Figure P4.14
4.15 In Figure P4.15 find the forces in all the members of

the truss, in terms of W.
C
w
C
I
9S in.
I B
T
lIn A
..
Figure P4.15
........
_ 15"
4.16 Determine the force i'n -each member of the tross

1- ~150in.
Figure P4.18
shown in Figure P4.16 if a ~ 4 ft, b = 8 ft, and c =
d =3 ft.
4.19 Find the forces in members AB, AF, AG, and CD of
p the truss shown in Figure P4.19.
9kN 6kN 3kN

3m 3m
"r,-eL.I
D
I 3m
Figure P4.16 L
F
4.17 Find the forces in all members of the truss shown in
Figure P4.17. Figure P4.19
4.3 Shortcuts and Rigidity jDeterminacy Results 255
~4.3 Shortcuts and Rigidity/Determinacy Results

There are several common shortcuts to watch for in analyzing a truss.
The first involves what are called "zero-force members." Sometimes in
!, a truss we will find at a joint I that only"ane member 'could cairy ',t'-
,
component of force in a certain direction and that there are no external
r
I, loads at I in that direction. For example, at joint A in Figure 4.15, only
!
!~
member AE can have a force component normal to line CAD. If we call
t , this normal direction u, then from the free-body diagram of pin A
\ II! (Figure 4.161, it is seen that FAE must be zero.
I h.
~"
I;
D
I~. 20001b-
!'
; I
!
I
3000lb
Figure 4.15
'{ LF. = 0= FAE COS e

and
(note e <f 90"1
u
Thus AE is a "zero-force member" of the truss. In general, this only
Figure 4.16 happens when there is no external loading at the pin with a component.
along the direction of the bar (such as AEI that is being examined for a
possible zero value. For example, at B (Figure 4.171 we have only BE able
to carry a force normal to DBF. This time, however, this normal
component balances the component of the 200.1b external force in that
"".. ~. ,!" .... - . , ..
200lb
Figure 4.17
I
F" direction: '~
v
LF. = 0 = 200(~) - FBEcos 30.5'
FBE = 186lb -~" -,

tt!
,~i~i\!
; ',t
Even though FBE if' 0 in this case, its value is nonetheless determined
ftom a single equation, which is still a helP,; ,,',,',' , ' ~J;1
~/~, "',!
Figure 4.18 . Question 4.7 Give reasons why a zero-force member like AE In ,,\l}, "I
Figure 4.16 i~ still an impoitanipart ofihe truss even ifit isn't i1 '.
carrying any load. ':" , ", .' "rq;
c ',. ~
~~
A second shortcut in truss analysis arises in a situation where four ill
,'!
members that are lined up in pairs as indicated in Figure 4.18 meet at a
pin. If there are no other members or external forces at that joint, then ~cf'
we see from Figure 4.18 that the forces FA, and FA, are equal, from
the equation LF. = 0 applied to the ftee body shown. In the same way,
LF. = 0 gives FB, = FB,.
A third shortcut arises when two non-collinear members are joined
~I
'h:, ,(
"
at a pin where no other bar or external force appears Isee Figure 4.191. At :~l.1:.:
~,
pin B the equilibrium equations, written with the help of the free-body
n~
u diagram, show that both FBA and FBC are zero:
LF. = 0 = -FBc cos (} :If Ii
FBC = 0 l~
.,
Figure 4.19
LF. = 0 = -FBA cos fJ
I
!~
E x A M p L E
Find the forces in the 'members of the truss.
'II '~ I!
~ ,~
t~
3000 N 5000 N 6000 N t~
~; .;:,
"", 'j~
A B
?
(Continued)
SOLUTION
We shall retain four digits in this example fornumerical checking purposes. Two
of the answers are known by inspection:
j:
'j
1. FBF = a, by considering ~Fy = a at joint F. .
2. Fn; = 5000 N cg, by considering 'f.Fy := a ~t joint ~.
In a simple truss such as this one, as we shall see later in general, we can
always find a joint where only two unknown bar forces act. Here, it is joint D
shown in the illustration.
6000 N 6000 N
_FCD~D or D
I
7 x
~Fy = 0 ~ FED (%) - 6000 = FED ~ ]0,000 N I[)
~Fx ~ 0 ~ FED(~) - FCD = 1O,000(~) - FCD
or
FCD = 8000 N lor FCD ~ 8000 N GJI
Next, we isolate joint C:
~Fx ~ 0 = 8000 - FBc
FBC ~ 8000 N lor 8000 N GJI
5000 N
"
c
I 8000N (note pulls on node
C since tensile)
5000 N """'to. FeE = 5000 N@,alreadyobtained

10,000 N
by inspection
,~
We then use joint E because at present B has three unknown forces acting
on it.
E (Contj~ued)
2S7
.' ." . .... . .' . , .'
,..; Questi~n 4.8 In ,th~s'ease/ we kno~ahea~ of,:ti.me thaf FBE is"'@-',and .,.
FFE is@. Why? ; . ,
+1" n, =0 ~ FBE(D - 1O,000(~) - 5000
FBE = IB,330 N (or FBE = IB,330 N <:VI
i,. LFx = 0 = FFE - FBE(~) - 1O,000(~)
FFE = IB,33010.BI + BOOO
FFE = 22,660 N (or FFE = 22,660 N @I
3OO0N By inspection of joint F, the force in GF is the same as FE. This is because no
other horizontal forces act on the pin at F, so that GF and FE have to equilibrate
each other there. Thus,
BODO N
FGF = 22,660 N lor FGF ~ 22,660 N @J
At B, the pin has the forces acting as shown in the diagram.

lB,330 N
zero
+1 LF, = 0 ~ FGB(~) - IB,330(~) - 3000
FGB ~ 23,330 N lor FGB = 23,330 N @I .'i
i,. LF~ = 0 ~ FGB(~) + IB,330(~) + BOOO - FAB
FAB ~ 41,330 N lor FAB = 41,330 N <:VI

A, In practice, truss members such as AB that carry much more load than others
for typical expected loadings will be made larger in cross section.
Finally, free-body diagrams of the pins at A and G (see the diagramsJ allow us
-.~-L41,33bN
A, 1 .'" to compute the reactions there (onto the pins from the clevis attached to the walll.
..' \ .
zero
+t LFy = 0 ::::> Ay = 0
i,. LFx ~ 0 = Ax ~ 41,330 N

zero 23330 N
--_..t1Lt22
i,. LFx ~ 0 = Gx - 22,660 - 23,330(~)
660 N Gx = 41,320N
G, G, ' ,
+1 LF, = 0 ~ Gy - 23,330G)
G, ~ 14,000 N
(Continued)
258
I
)
tr
Note that the pin at G actually feels the vector sum of Gx and G}. in shear;
that is, the clevis exerts on it the force
G = 41,3201 + 14,000,N lor 43,630 ~o N)
Back-checking with the overall free-body diagram shown next, we see that
our calculations look correct.. -... .-.... .._.'.
3000 N 5000 N 6000 N
A
41,320 N
;,/
,/
//1
,
I
1
"
,
..

,, .
,,
I
-t
41,320 N
G /
14,000 N
It is obvious by inspection that r.Fx and ~F)' each vanish. Checking

moments,
'+) EMG = 141,320 NJll.5 mJ

- (3000 NJl2 mJ - (5000 NJl4 mJ - (6000 NJl6 ml
=-20N'm
(differing from zero due to rounding to four digits)
Note from the final figure that when considering the entire "overall" truss as a
free-body diagram, one need not take time to draw in all the dashed internal
members; the outside profile is sufficient unless there are forces applied at
"internal" joints. We must, of course, remember that all the elements of the
truss are actually being included.
In Example 4,1 we recall that there were three equations used as

checks lone at A and two at EJ because they involved no new unknowns.
These three redundant .equations resulted because there are obviously
2 x (number of pinsJ = 2p independent equilibrium equations, and we
used up three independent equations in finding the external reactions
lusing the overall free-body diagram). If a plane truss with three statically
determinate reactions has more than m = 2p - 3 members, then we
cannot solve for the forces in them all, and the truss is then appropriately
deemed statically indeterminate. Though we may find the reactions, we
cannot solve the truss if m > 2p - 3. On the other hand, if there are
fewer than 2p - 3 members with three statically determinate reactions,
we then do not have enough member forces to satisfy all the equilibrium
equations at the pins. In this case, the truss is not rigid. Figures 4.20 and
Figure 4.20 4.21 illustrate these two ideas,.In Figure 4.20 adding member AS to the
;
259
-------------------------------------------------------., ,
!
truss of Figure 4.6 makes the truss statically indeterminate; p still = 5,

butmnow = 8and2p - 3 ~ 7,whichisnow <m.lnFigure4.2!,on
the other hand, removing member DC gives m = 6 while p still = 5, so
that 2p - 3 = 7, which is now >m. This leaves a non-rigid structure,
which is unstable and will collapse as thereader may visualize. ."'_
Of course, the word rigid does not mean that a truss will not deform
Figure 4.21
at all under loading. It will undergo very small deformations, very nearly
retaining its original shape.
We have seen that in a two-dimensional lor planej truss, the pin
connections are called joints lor nodesj. They are the points where the
members, or bars, that constitute the truss are joined together. If, for
example, we begin with a single triangle, it has three pins (pj (or jointsj
and-three members Imj. Thus p = 3 and m = 3. If we add, from two
distinct joints A and Bof this triangle, two new members and pin them at
a new, common joint not on line AB, then we have
A
D
p=3+!
m=3+2
-----~
A
B
C
Repeating this procedure once more, we obtain a truss similar to that of
Figure 4.6:
+ +
Li
./, p = 3 ! I 5
I
,,
I m=3+2+2=7
B
For a plane truss constructed in this way (and they often arej, the number
of pins (jointsl and the number of members are related by
m = 3 + 2(p- 3j = 2p - 3
a relation we have seen before. For the last truss, m 2(5j - 3 = 7. A
plane truss constructed in the above manner is called a simple truss. If a
simple truss is supported with a pin and roller (ortheir equivalent),so as to
satisfy overall equilibrium for any loading, it will be a rigid, staple,
I
determinate structure. Note in the bottom figure at the left that the sim-
ple plane truss need not be made up of a series of connected triangles
(though it often is). Note also that in a simple plane truss, we can always
find at least one joint where there are only two unknown member forces.
As we have already seen, this is a natural starting place for solving such a
truss by the method of joints.
It is important to note that the condition m = 2p - 3 is not i
generally either sufficient or necessary for a non-simple plane truss to be
rigid and statically determinate. For example, the (silly) truss shown in
4.3 Shortcutsand Rigidity/Determinacy Results 261
Figure 4.23 p = 7;m = 10:F 2p- 3
Figure 4.22 P = 5; ill = 7

~ 2p - 3
Figure 4.22 has m = 2p - 3 but is not rigid. The truss shown in Fig-
ure 4.23, however, has m # 2p - 3 but is, while not rigid, both stable
and statically determinate. (Note the two support pins!)
There are also well-known and commonly used plane trusses that
with rhree determinate support reactions are both rigid and statically
determinate but not simple (buildable from, a triangle by successively
adding two new members and one new pin at a timel. One such truss is
shown in Figure 4.24. Note again that the equation m = 2p - 3 does
not guarantee a truss to be simple.
',i Figure 4.24 A Fink truss. p = 15i

. :1
"
m =
27 ~ 2p - 3
The truss of Figure 4.24 is called a compound truss, which is a truss

comprised of two or more simple trusses connected together so as to leave
a rigid, determinate truss as the result. If the connection is made as in
Figure 4.24-that is, by joining the simple trusses ABC and BED at Band
adding one member (CDj-then, in general, if there are PABC pins and
mABC members inABe, and PBDE pins and IDBDE members in BDE, we have
and
and we see that for the combined truss,
2p - 3 = 2(PABC + PBDE - II - 3
= 13 + mABel + (3 + mBDE) - 2 - 3
or
2p - 3 = m
J
, flo
262 Chapter 4 Structural' Applications
Thus m = 2p - 3 even though las the reader may wish to show) the
compound truss is itself not simple. With proper SUPPOTtreactions such as
a pin and a roller, a compound truss, like the simple trusses of which it is
made, will be rigid (non-collapsible upon release from its SUPPOTts!and
- statically determinate ..
4.20 Find the forces in members GB and DF of the truss

shown in Figure P4.20.
E
20 kips 20 kips 20 kips 20 kips
Six panels at 8.h
spans
1000 Ib Figure P4.23
Figure P4.20
'4.21 Find the forces in all' membe-rsof the truss shown in 4.24 Find the forces in members AB, BH, Be, and DF of
FigureP4.21. the truss shown in Figure P4.24.
1000 Ib/ft
B
A I
1--8h--.sh--8ft-
5 kips
Figure P4.21
Figure P4.24
4.22 By inspection, identify six zero.force members in

Figure P4.22 and explain why each vanishes. 4.25 Find the forces in members AG, BG, and CG of the
truss shown in Figure P4,25.
I kip
3 kips 0.5 kip
2 kips H -1-
1.5m
Q
I
A
E G p
s
~ C K M R
Figure P4.25
F,igure P4.22
4:.23 Find the forces in members I, 2, 3, 4, and 5 of the 4.26 Find the force in each of the members of.the truss in
truss shown in Figure P4.23. Figure P4.26.
, .
Figure P4.27 K-truss.

,
~
p ;; 16;' m ~
,-
29 ~ 2p - 3
.,
12 ft----
Figure P4.26 Figure P4.28 Baltimore truss. p = 24;

m ~ 45 ~ 2p ~ 3
4.27 Show with a series ofsketches that the K.truss shown B B'
:\ in Figure P4.27 is a simple truss.
PI pins
4.28 Show that the Baltimore truss in Figure P4.28 is not a
i, mt members
simple truss, even though m= 2p - 3.
C
.... _-- C'
~ 4.29 Show that if two simple trusses are joined to form a
Figure P4.29
compound truss by simply bringing two joints together as
I:
shown in Figure P4.29 and orhitting bar B'C', the resulting
I, truss will have m = 2p - 3. PI pins
,I 4.30 Two simple trusses are connected by the dashed bars

in Figure P4.30 to form a compound truss. Prove that
ml members
i,,.
II'
I
~ = 2p - 3 "forthis compound truss. Figure P4.30
,I
'.
il
"
-AIllIIIIIIIII4.4 The Method of Sections
'., Another' method commonly used to determine the forces in the

.,. members'of a truss 'is called the'method of sections. This name comes
from the fact that in using this method, the truss is divided into two
sections, which are both in equilibrium. IIf a body is in equilibrium, any
and aII parts of it are.1
The advantage in using the method of sections is that member forces
of interest may be found very quickly without solving the entire truss. For
example, suppose we wished to know only the force in member GH of the'
(symmetrical I truss shown in Figure 4.25. By the method of joints, we
would probably arrive at FGIl by:
f' 1. Finding the roller reaction at F by LMA = 0 on the overall truss.
! 2. Finding FEF and FGF by enforcing equilibrium of pin F.
3. Finding FGE by enforcing equilibrium of pin E.
4. Finding FGIl by enforcing equilibrium of pin G.
15m 1.5m
1-1~3m-I~1 D
I BI
4m
I t
/3 m
I JA
IkN 1.5 kN 3kN
Figure 4.25
.,
A much quicker way to determine FGH is to-use the method 01
sections, which will be described in the example to follow. In this
method we cut the truss into two separate sections. One of the cut
1
members is the one whose force we seek. This force thus appears as an
external force on each of the two "halves" of the cut ~ss. If only three
members have been cut and the external reactions are(known, then the
three equilibrium equations for either "half" will yield the desired
member force. Sometimes we can find it by just summing moments about
the point of intersection lif there is onel of the other unknown forces; this
is the case in the following example. .
E x A M p L E 4.4~.
Determine the force in member GH of the truss shown in Figure 1.
1.5m 1.5m
- 3 ffi_--.....
C D 2kN
.:I~L B
C D
I \F D,
3m Foe
j A F
~t A, I kN
H
1.5 kN
G
tR -r.-t
A
H
FCH FCIl
1~3m-1--3m_1 3kN
A,
IkN 1.5 kN 3kN
iFigure 1 Figure 2
SOL UTI 0 N:
. II~
...,i'.
Is
In the previous two figures, we have divided the truss into two sections. In each ;i
section one of the unknown forces exposed by the cut is the desired FGH. :il',..
(Continued) i ~.
\. 1 ;\1.'
As we mentioned (following Example 4.1), we can think of the forces of the
cut members in either of the ways shown in .the twO sketches:
or
The three bars DE, DG, and GH have been removed and The bars are still there, but they are each cut in two. Thus
replaced by the forces they exert on their respective pins. their internal (axiall forces become exposed and are
external to the separate sections, each of which is in
equilibrium alone.
Summing moments about A, we find the roller reaction on the overall

(uncut!) free-body diagram.
"+) 1:MA = 0 = (12 mJR - (I kNI(3 ml - (1.5 kNII6 ml
- (3 kNII9 ml - (2 kNII4 ml
47
R = - = 3.92 kN
12
r
We are ready to use one of the cut sections of.Figure 2 to find FGH We see
that if we use the section at the right and simply equate the sum of the moments
about D to zero, we shall find the desired force in a single step. This is because
r the other two unknown forces FDa and FDE both pass through point D, and thus the
only unknown appearing in the moment equation will be the desired FGH:
I
! L 3 kN
3m
~J
R ~ 3.92 kN
"+) 1:MD =
FGH
0 = -FGH(4
= 3.29 kN
ml - (3 kNII1.5 ml + (3.92 kN1I4.5 ml
(The force is tensile because it was drawn that way and the scalar FGII turned out
to be positive in the solution.l
1.5m
!----c3m~l- .~. Note that if we were looking for FDEi the same cut section could be used, and
the summation of moments about G would give that force, again in one step,(Le.,
one equation in the single desired unknownj*:
D~JiO "+) 1:MG = 0 = 13.92 kNII3ml - (FOE ~}3 mJ - (FOE ~} 1.5 ml

,'-T----.. E
FOE ~ 3.54 kN
(Continued)
*We could, once FGH has been found, solve for FDE,andFOG by 'LF;< = 0 together with
'LF,. =
O. But 'LMG = 0 gives FDE in one equation, even if FGH has not been previously
determined. Thus errors we may have made in FGn will not propagate into our solution for
FDE
i~
265
(The force is compressive because it was drawn that way and the scalar FDE turned
out positive in the solution.)
In the LMG = 0 equation, note that the force in DE was resolved into its tv{o :/
components at E. The horizontal component, FOE(3/.jlOL has a moment arm (or t
perpendicular distance) from G of 3 ffi. The vertical component, FOE! I/ .jlO), has
a moment arm of 1.5 m. The reader should note that if the point Q in the sketch_at.,.....
the left is used, then the vertical component of FOE has no moment about G and
the computation is shortened to
FOE = 3.54 kN lor 3.54 kN (9), again
Im-l
I
T FCH G
F
p ...
3kN 3.92 kN
x
,
.1
IfwewantedFDG,wecould now solve for it from I:.Fx = OOTI:.Fy = O.But,to

further emphasize the idea of summing moments about the point of intersection P
of other unknown forces, we find the intersection of FDE and FGH as shown in the /
diagram above. By similar triangles, I
1 4
or x ~ 12m
3 x
~......... . ~...... Therefore,
'+) :EM, = 0 ~ (3 kNIlIO.5 mJ -.,-(3.92 kN1I7.5 ml + F (4.:7 }1O.5ml

OG
FOG ~ -0.214 kN or 0.214 kN d)

Let us now check our three results by using the force equilibrium equations
on the cut section.
3 1.5
I:.Fx = FOE r;;:; + FOG -- - F~H
'oj 10 4.27
= 3.54(0.9491 + (-0.214110.3511 - 3.29
~ - 0.006 '" 0 [roundoff!!

(Continued)
266
-,...... '~.
.J
r
~I
and
1:F, ~ 3.92 - 3 - FDE

I
r.;; -
-J 10
4
FDG -27
4.
~ 0.92 - 3.54(0.316) + 0.214(0.9371

~ 0.002 ~ 0
The reader is encouraged to find the three forces FDE1 FDG1 and FGlI using the
left section of Figure 2, after determining Ax and Ay from the equilibrium
equations on the overall free-body diagram. The answers for the three forces
should, of course, agree with those found above.
t
." _ ,. '_'" . . '. .J ... -..~-J,.:.. ',"_:" ',_,_" /1
Questioll"'.1!l Why would'a seGtionalGut that onli'wentpartly~'
,I thtougha'russ iLe., didn't dl;ideibntp two part:sj".6e1iselessl,
" ...,:_. ," ".--,;<~: .. ~:- .. ,' .. ' .,~"J;-',_:',
1
I:
!!
E F
10k
E x A M p L E 4.5 ......
Find the force in member HI of the truss shown 'in the figure.
10It
D G SOLUTION
We make a horizontal cut through the truss that exposes the force in the member
10It HI, as suggested by the free-body diagram of Figure I. In this problem, we use the
10k
C
E F
10ft 10k
B
D
G
10ft
A 10 k
Fvc I / FHc
./
C
Figure 1
"upper half" of the truss because by so doing we may avoid finding the reactions.
We see that summing moments at point Cwill eliminate the unknown forces Fvc
and FHc and allow an immediate solution for Fill:
'i) 1:Mc = 0 = -(10 kll20 It I - 110 kll20 hi - FH/IIO Itl

FH/=-40k
Because the force in member HI was drawn as if the member were in tension, and
Fill turned out negative, the force in HI is 40 kips tb).
267
l. - ~- - -~------
-~-,.,- -_.
E x A M p L E 4.6~
Find the forces in members EF, RF, RN, and ON of the K-truss shown in the figure.
,,'
-
1800lb
C F G H 1
I3ft
B
't3 It
A
-.l
--I ,
p
1000lb
0 N
1200lb
Six panels @ 4 ft
M
2000lb
L
SOLUTION
In this truss we will not be able to .cut sections and find all the desired forces one
by one. For instance, a mental vertical cut through the four bars of interest shows
that on each resulting part we will have three equations and four unknowns.
Furthermore, there is no point where three of the four bars intersect. However, we
shall use another section to find two of the four member forces, then employ"force
equilibrium on a second section to complete the solution.
-
IBOOlb
Bit Bit
Tl
4ft
R
A,
lOOOlb 1200lb 2000lb
First, though, we find the reactions": ,r' ~
'+) I:MA = 0 = R(24 Itl - 11000 Ibll4 It) - (1200 Ibll12 It)
- 12000 Ibll16 It I - (1806 Ibll6 Itl '
R = 2550 Ib
+1 Hy = 0 = Ay + 2550 - 1000 - 1200 - 2000
A, = 16501b
-i:- I:Fx = 0 = Ax + 1800
Ax ~ -1800 Ib
(Continued)
,Ii"
:)1
268
Next, we consider the sectioning of the truss shown in the figure.
C D E F G H
1800lb
"' ...~" ..
B
A
" "- "-
\
I~ 1000ib :
Six panels @ 4 ft
1200lb _2_0~00_lb J- --
-
1800 E Using the left section, we can determine two of the desired member forces:
Fo ~M = 0 will give us FON; lFx = 0 will then give us FEE' Thus,
F" '<) I:ME = 0 = FoNI6 Itl + 11000 lbll4ftl - 11650 Ibll8.1tl

F,o - 11800 Ibll6 Itl
1800 FaN FON = 3330 lb lor FON = 3330 Ib iXlJ

0
and
1650 1000
-I.. I:Fx = 0 = FE' + FON + 1800 - 1800
FEF = - FON = - 3330 Ib lor FEF = 3330 Ib ~I

, Now we examine the previously mentioned vertical cut shown in the figure.
By inspection, the forces FRF and FNR have equal magnitudes. This is becau'se all
the other external forces with x components are balance; thus the horizontal in
components of FRF and FNR must canceL Because these bars make the same angle
ICOS-I(~Jl with the horizontal through R, then FRF must be equal to FNR" As to
whether they are
1650lb 1000Ib
or.. ~ we can again. answer by inspection that pan lal i~
~
(a) (b)
the figure is the only possibility. This is because the vertical components of these
two forces must add to 1650 - 1000 = 650 lb downward. Therefore,
+1 I:Fy = 0 = 1650 - 1000 - FRF(~)2
or
FRF = 5421b lor 5421b ~I

(Continued)
269
so that
F." = 542 Ib lor 542 Ib CD!
It is unnecessary (as we have seen a number of times) to try to detennin~ in

advance whether an unknown load is CD or ~ as we are drawing the free-body
diagram. However, it is very instructive and improves the student's feel for the~"'"
equilibrium analysis.
The other section can always be used asa check on our solutions for the
bar forces:
(by inspectionl
+1 1:F, = 542(~)2 - 1200 - 2000 + 2550
= 0.401b '" 0
'+) ~MN = -(3330 Ibll6 It I - (542Ib{~}6 Itl
1200lb 2000lb 25501b

-(2000 Ibll4 It! + (2550 Ibll12 It!
~ 18.4 Ib-It
These values differ from zero due to roundoff error. (If four digits are retained
instead of three, then ~MN becomes less than 0.5 Ib-It.!
E x A M p L E 4. 7 ......
Find the force in member EL, the only member of the truss in Figure I that hasa
length other than I m.
- . ~.-." .,.. - .....'-.
-, ,
"
.'
IkN 1.2 kN 1.4 kN 1.6 kN 0.5 kN

Figure 1
(Continued)
270
\j
I
SOLUTION
Except for isolating joint E where there are three unknown bar forces acting, any
complete section through ELwill have to cut at least three other members that are
not all concurrent. Thus the solution cannot be obtained with just one moment
i equation using the method of sections; nor could we obtain it by a combination of
I equilibrium equations from one sectioning. We shall have to use a combination of ._.
the methods of sections and joints before arriving at FJ:l,'
First, we find the roller reaction from equilibrium of the overall truss s~own
in Figure 2.
A,
A, IkN 1.2 kN 1.4 kN 1.6kN 0.5 kN

Figure 2
~MA ~ 0 ~ R(6 mJ + (0.5 kNlIs ml + (1.6 kNII4 mJ
- (1.4 kNII3 mJ - (1.2 kNII2 ml - il kNllI mJ

} - (2.4 + 2.2J kN( 1 sin 60 0
mJ
I
- (3 kNII2 sin 60 0
mJ
R = 1.31 kN
Next we cut a section that will allow us to find FOE (see Figure 3). Then we
can isolate pin E and find FEL.
3kN
1.4 kN 1.6 kN 0.5 kN

t
1.31 kN
Figure 3
(Continued)
271
"+) LML = 0 ~ 11.6 kNIlI ml + (0.5 kNJl2 mJ + 11.31 kNJl3ml
-12.4 kNJlI sin 60 ml
-13 kNJl2 sin 60 m) + (FDE sin 30 Jl2 sin 60 mJ

0
FDE = 0.860 kN lor 0.860 kN QJI

'. Now we shift our attention to the pin at E shown in Figure 4, using the method of
E 3kN
joints to find FEL.
0.860 kN FH
.i... LFx = 0 = 3 - 0.860 sin 30 - FE' sin 30
30 30
~
F" FEF ~ 5.14 kN lor5.14kN ~I
Figure 4
5.14
+t I:F).= a = -0.860 cos 30 + F~F' cos 30 - FEL
FEL ~ 3.71 kN lor 3.71 kN QJJ
As a check consider the following free-body diagram. shown in Figure 5.

l
,",E
-2.2kN
"'1
7.6 kN
...
,~;
,
I!
,
1
0.19 kN IkN 1.2 kN
1
1.4 kN 1.6 kN 0.5 kN 1.31 kN
1"0 .\
Figure 5
-=!:.... LFx = 12.2 + 2.4 - 7.6 + 5.14 cos 60 + 0.860 cos 601 kN
=0
+1 LF, = (0.19 - I - 1.2 - 1.4 + 1.6 + 0.5 + 1.31 + 3.71

+ 0.860 sin ~oo- 5.14 sin 601 kN
= 0.003 kN ~ 0 ,f
"+) LME = (2.2 + 2.41 kN(1 sin 60 mJ + 11.31 kNII3 mJ
- (0.19 kNII3 ml - (7.6 kNII2 sin 60 ml
+ (1.6 + 1.21kN(I mJ + (0.5 + II kNI2 mJ
= -0.02 kN ' m ~ 0 ,f
(Continued)
*Wherc, as the reader may wish to show from Figure 1 with R = 1.31 kN, Ax = 4.:l
-7.6 kN and A, = 0.19 kN. sho
'272
.II'
,. We note that these checks will usually ind)cate an error. However, they are
OJ
only necessary conditions for equilibrium and are no guarantee that an error has
not been made. For instance, if the 0.860 kN <:D force FDE had been incorrectly
drawn as compressive on Figure 4, erroneous results would have resulted for FEF
., and FE/.. Applying these {with FDE = 0.860 kN ~'onto the free-body diagram
of Figure 5 would interestingly and erroneously ~have given the same three "0 "
"checks" in this case!
~:
!P !R 0 B L EMS {Section 4.4
4.31 Each truss member in Figure P4.31 has length 2 m.

'What is the force in CD?
. 1
4kN
~3m
f\lVSJv\
3m--ll3kN
I
T
4m
t
~
Fi,gure P4.31 1 13 kN
4.32 Find the force in members BD and CD of the truss 4m

13kN
G
t
4m
F C
13kN 1
I
E
360lbs
4m
Figure P4.32
B~
4.33 Determine the force in member GH of the truss ~ ~
shown in Figure P4.33. Figure P4.33
273
L
J:',
Find the forces in the darkened members of the trusses in 4.37 <DON
r
A
Problems 4.34-4.38.
4.34 4.35
Sm
3ft-r-6ft-1D
-I -C-
3ft
t~
3 It
D
Sm
1- G 3 kips
IkN IkN IkN

I ,6ft --:::::'1""
200N
Figure P4.35
Figure P4.34 H
4.36
3kN
Figure P4.36
200
G
:"t
4.38 ~
a E
F
Figure P4.37
j
3 kip :
J..
.~
~
~
,,
Figure P4.39 ~.~,
1.
Figure P4.38
4.39 Find tbe force in members FH, JH, and

JK of the truss 1.~~ 100Ib
-------Six
200 Ib 400 Ib
panels @ 12 ft--------
4.40 For the pin connected truss shown in Figure P4.40: 4.43 In Figure P4.43 find the forces in members AD, ED,
and AB. Can the forces in all members of this truss be found
, ,8. Using the method of joints, find the force in member
"
from statics equations alone?

I Be.
b. Using the method of sections, find the force in 4.44 Find the forces in members IE, Ie, Ke, and DE of the
member CEo truss of Problem 4.41, shown again in"Figure P4.44~~"1'".
4.41 Find the forces in members IE, ID, KI, and CJ of the
4.45 An antenna on a testing range, tOgether with its
pin-connected truss shown in Figure P4.41.
supporting structure, weighs 300 lb with mass center at C.
4.42 Find the forces in members CF and AF shown in Assume that -! of the weight IS supported by each of the pins
Figure P4.42. atA and B that connect the structure to the truss tOwer. See
SOlb 801b
3fl~3ft-1-3ft-l
E ~D C
B 100lb
A
Figure P4.43
CD length is ? ft
Figure P4.40
200lb 200lb 200lb

.....~
,
.. Figure" P4:41
SOOlb ~
SOOlb L K 1/ H"
E
F 2m , I
3kN ~2m--l 300lb 800lb
Figure P4.45. (The other half is carried by the pins on an

identical truss behind the one in the figure.)
a. Compute the horizo0tal components of the pin
reactions at A and B on the truss.
b. Find the forces in m~mbers DF, DC, AH, and AB.~.
Which of these four forces is dependent on the
assumption about "i
of the weight"?
,4.46 For the truss in Figure P4.46 calculate the forces in

~members BF and Be.
Figure P4.46
A
4.47 Given: GK = KE =EB ~ BF = FL = LH ~ 10 ft.

-Find the force in member AB for the plane truss shown ih
Figure P4.47.
H
5OO1b 500 Ib
Figure P4.47
4.48 Find the forces in members CH, CH, and Be of the

roof truss shown in Figure P4.48.
2oo01b
,."
Figure P4.45(b)
3 ft each
~ ~.
Figure P4.45(a) Figure P4.48

I
.~.
~'I
6 ft _. ">J.
~----Four @'8ft
5 kips
Figure P4.S0
3000lb
A
IiiOOiiiiiiIII
Figure P4.49
c tv
Figure P4.51
"
4.49 Find the forces in members CT, BL, FI, and HG shown 4.51 Find the forces in members DE, CD, and CH of the
in Figure P4.49. All members have length 12 ft or 12/j2 truss in Figure P4.5 I.
'ft, and all angles between members are 0,45,90, 135 or
180'. 4.52 Find the force in member EF of the truss shown in
,, Figure P4.52.
4.50 Find the force in member BH of the truss in Figure 4.53 Demonstrate with a series of sketches that the truss
P4.50. Identify three zero-force members. in Figure P4".53is simple. Find the force in BE.
I
1-'" 31t-----j
I
~IA
1.5 It
c
-H
,
'.
w
*~-
2 It
L
I It 1ft
2 It
Figure P4.52 Figure P4.S3
"..--"._----~---~.------
'278 Chapter 4 Structural Applications
4.54 Find the forces in members DC, DC, and DF of the
r
truss in F.igure P4.54.
4.55 Find the force in member BD of the truss in Figure
--=3
6ft
P4.55 if the weight of Wis 1000 newtons.
4.56 Find the forces. in members CD; DH, and CH

truss in Figure P4.56.
cif th'e->r
,,
L:
LA . E 4.57 Find the forces in members AB and Be of the truss in
-!- -L -L
b;;;" _ """"' ...-ij Figure P4,57,
:r
!=-6ft 6ft,. 6ft . 6ft-=!
Figure P4.54
IJft
~
F I L3ft
j-
1,2 ft
I I
G I I 105ft
f---2ft-~.-2ft--.I.-2ft--l r
Figure P4.S7
4.58 Find the forces in members DC and DE of the truss in

Figu~e P4.58,
Figure P4.55
r-L2miLsm-r--2 m
A --- I -
----;--- I __
B D
12 kN
~4m~2~m-~.l:--4m
I ~, ~
O.6m
1 C D E I ~
0.3m C
tt1
gOON
1
~B
Figure P4.58
3m
L
Figure P4.56
4.59 Find the force in member CF of the truss in Fig- 10 kip

5k 5k
ure P4.59.
3ft 3ft
4.60 Find the forces in members CD, KI, and LI of the
truss in Figure P4.60.
4.61 Find the forces in FE, EE, and Be of the truss shown
in Figure P4_61.
4.62 Find the forces in members CD and DJ of the truss

shown in Figure P4.62."
4.63 Find the forces in members DE, QE, and OP of the

tIUSSof Example 4.6 shown in Figure P4.63. Use the
reactions from that example.
c E
r
~t
15 It
G~ Figure P4.59
Figure P4.60
Figure P4.62
rJ
H
. 0l Four paneIS@
. I kN
3m
I kN I kN
~ ... G E "-
300lb
~:,m -
IBOOlb
c D E F G H I
!
3 It
Figure P4.61
B
't
3 It
-.l
IOOOlb 1200lb 2000 Ib
Figure P4.63 Six panels @ 4 ft
,
L
280 Chapter 4 Structural,Applications
1i
,
, ...
~" I
Each member, except EL, has length 1 m

3 kN 5 kN
Figure P4.64
Figure P4.65
4.64 Find the forces in members EL and GH of the truss of
Example 4. 7 under the new loading shown in Figure P4.64.
IDo no~ use the reactions of that example!1 a. Show that three members of the truss are zero-force
members.
4.65 Determine the force"in member HE for the truss in
b. Find the forces in members FC, FD, FE, and CD.
Figure P4.65. All member~! are of length 0.8 m except GR.
Hint:
4.66 In Figure P4.66IaJ, the two pulleys at A are indepen- 1 + 0.9 cos 0
dently mounted. tan O =------ ISee Figure P4.66(b1.] ,
;
I
6- 0.9 sin 8 i
which can be solved by trial-and-error for e.
4.67 The cable in Figure P4.67 extends from a winch at A
around twO pulleys PI and P2 to the weight W. Find the
forces in truss members Cl and If. The pulleys each have a
radius of 0.2 m.
, ~
E 3m F "
Figure P4.66(a)
.
w~ 700llN
9
E
6m
Figure P4.66{b) Figure P4.67
Space Trusses 281
~4.5 Space Trusses

A nonplanar truss is called a "space truss." Its analysis is complicated by
the fact that at each joint there are not two, but three nontrivial equa, ..,,_.
tions of equilibrium.
The basic space truss is a tetrahedron, formed by six members
pinned at their ends as shown in Figure 4.26. By adding three members at
a time and connecting them to create a new joint, a gradually larger
structure is formed, called las in the plane easel a simple space truss. This
time, instead of 2p - 3 members as in the plane case, the space truss has
3p - 6 members, as the reader may wish to show. Instead of the three
constraint reactions required in the plane case, in three dimensions we
need six to completely constrain the body.
D D
A A
c c
Figure 4.26
The methods of joints and sections apply as well to space trusses as

they did to plane trusses. The problem with the space truss, however, is
the much larger number of unknown member forces. In a simple space
truss, a joint (the last one added in the above procedure) with only three
4- ~..~ . ,.. member forces acting on it can always be found. This joint is a good place
to start if the truss is to be completely solved. On the other hand, the
method of sections, as in the plane case can sometimes be used to great
l
advantage in finding an isolated member force somewhere in the middle

of a space truss. This time, if we are to find this force with a single
equation, we have to look for a line (instead of a point) through which all
the undesired unknown forces pass. If we can find one, then equating the
moments about the line to zero will yield the desired member force. We
now examine some examples of space trusses.
,'.
' ',' _01.-
.,
E x A M p L E 4.8~
Find the forces in the three members AB, AC, and AD of the space truss shown in
the figure.
SOLUTION
Just as in a plane truss, the bars of a space truss are all two-force members.
Therefore, isolating pin A, we have the free-body diagram showl! in the :figure.
The three bar forces are expressible as:
The applied force can be written as

_. _ .. w.o_ _
F = 2100 (
61 + 3,? + 2k)" ~ 1800i_ + 900j
_+ 600k
- :~~
'1
)
,
Equilibrium of joint A requires that '1
l
II
LF lor F,I = FAB + FAC + FAD + F
Therefore, equating the coefficients of 1, ;, and
= 0
k to zero,
,,
I,
i-coefficienlS =0+0+ 0.46IFAD + 1800 = 0
'I , )
1I ~i
';1
from which ~
FAD = -3900 Ib it
j
,~
(Continued)
J
'282
1
Therefore, member AD is in compression (because we assumed tension and

obtained a negative answer), and it carries 3900 Ib of compressive force.
I-coefficients = -0.287FAB + 0.287FAC + 900 = 0
k-coefficients = -0.958FAB - 0.958FAc - 0.887(-39001 + 600 = 0
The solution to these two equations is
FAB = 36901b
FAc = 5541b
Both these members are in tension, because we assumed, they were and
positive answers were then obtained for PltB and F,K'
E x A M p L E 4.9~
The space truss shown in the figure supports a parabolic antenna. The antenna is
positioned in azimuth* by altering the lengths of AQ and BO, and in elevation by
the screwjack member OR. The wind and gravity loads for a certain orientation of
the antenna are equipollent to the forces at P, Q, and R given in the followi~g
equations. The locations of Q and R are also indicated. Find the force in the
screwjack.
~I
\
Coordinates 01 Q: 1- 1.5, 2, 61It
,I CoordinatesolR: (-2.75, -c0.25,3Ift
.,, "'.' ..'.... .. -'... , .~ Fp :,2~001 + 500, - 800k Ib

! FQ = -14001 - 300) - 800k lb
FR = 7001 + 500, - 400k lb
(Continued)
* "Azimuth" is the rotation around the z axis (local verticall.
283
SOLUTION
The free-body diagram of the antenna dish is shown in the figure.
F,
A moment summation about the line PQ will yield the screwjack force ,FOR:
The only forces contributing to this equation are FOR and FR' Therefore,
JpR X IFR + FORI' UpQ = 0
[1-2.75 - Oli + 1-0.25 - Oil + 13 - 61k)

. "
x [1700i + 5001 _ 400kl + FOR ( -275i ~.~~251 + 3k)J
1- 15 - Oli + 12 - Oil + 16 - 61k

. ----------- ~ 0
2.50
,"",.~I. ,<. '" The scalar triple product can be expressed as a determinant:
UpQ components --+ -0.6 0.8 o

JpR" components - -2.75 -0.25 -3 = 0
,FR + FRO components --+ 1700 - 0.674FoRI 1500 - 0.0613FoRI 1-400 + 0.735FoRJ
Adding ~ times the first column to the second column will simplify the evalua-
tion of the determinant:
-0.6 o o
~
-275 -3.92 -3 = 0 i
1700 - 0.674FoRI 1J430 - 0.960FoRI 1-400 + 0.735FoRI
(Continued)
284
Thus,
-0.61-3.92(-400 + 0.735FoRJ + 3(1430 - o.96oFoRIi ~ 0
1570 - 2.88FoR + 4290 - 2.88FoR = 0
5860
F ---- = 10201b (compressive as assumed)
OR 5.76
~".~',
Question 4.12 At the .outset of the pre~ed;ng example, ;s'(here aj
., line. ab"utwh;eh thembmertts, summe~ and equated to zero,~illl
I 'YieXiI,j,ytllissingleeqtl:ition the for~ehLBE? ON AP?AQ?BQ? .~
;'! . <'~,'~\'"_" .-: :~,',::;P:<L
".' ;:""">:.,'<fG,'C,'-~:,- ,~,.,~: :j:";\,';l-.. '.:"~':;>" it ':'~:4'>< ""tl:
E x A M p L E 4.10~
The space truss in the figure was recently used to support a large "cross log
periodic antenna" jwhich is shown in Figure P6.93(al of Chapter 61. A certain
loading under heavy wind, self-weight, and ice weight is transmitted to the truss
as indicated in the figure. Find the forces in the truss members. *
I,.
(Continued) .
*The actual truss had a seventh member from point B to D. Because this makes the
truss statically indeterminate, we omit it for this example.
L.
285
SOLUTION
We consider first a free-body diagram of joint B {see the sketch). Writing the
9001b~ equilibrium equations,
Fe.
7501b __ B
LF, ~ 0 ~ 1400 - Fcs "" Fcs ~ 1400 lb ~
,. OJ
1400
Ib~\ F" 27.5) (27.5) (II
LF, = 0 ~ 750 - FSA( 69.7 - FFS 69.7
697A~OA \~ LF, ~ 0 ~ -900 - FSA(6~47) + FFS(6~47) 12)
M27.5
64 69.7
Solving Equations II) and 12),
27.5
FFS = 1440 lb ~ and FSA = 460 Ib CD
We note that FFB could have been found without the need to solve two.
equations simultaneously:
MAD = 0 ~ -(F HF ~)155

69.7
in.! + 1750 IbJl64 in.)
+1900 IbJl27.5 in.!
FSF ~ + 1440 Ib ~
Then FBA. would follow from either force equation.
300lb 1200lb Moving next to a free-body diagram of joint C, we see that we can avoid three
equations in three unknowns jwhich we would get from :I:F = OJby summing
moments about line FE:
~ 0 = 1750 IbJl64 in.! - 1300 IbJl27.5 in.!
- FCD(~)155
69.7
in.1
FCD = 787 Ib CD
E Similarly, moments about line DE will yield FCF:
MDE ~ 111400 + 1200!lb1l64 in.)

+ FcF( 75 ' )164 in.) = 0
..)64' + 27.5' + 75'
FCF = 3550 Ib CD
Note that the force FCF was broken up into components at joint C. If we had'
broken it up at F, the last term in Equation (3) would have been .
FCF(-.,,===6=4====)175 in.) I ~"

.,)64' + 27.5' + 75' ;
;
(Continued)
'J";.
r
286
which is the same result but with a different lever arm. Finally,
~F = 0 ~ FeE 27.5)
-- - 787 (27.5)
-- + 3550 (27.5)
-- + 750
, ( 69.7 69.7 102
FeE ~ - 3540 lb lor 3540 Ib ~I

As checks,
~F, ~ 1200 + 1400 - 3550(~)

102
= 2600 - 2610 = -10 Ib ./
-300 + 3540 (64)

- - 3550'(64)
- - 787 (64)
-
69.7 102 69.7
-300 + 3250 - 2230 - 720' ~ 0 ./
The - lO-lbresult for :EF, differs from zero due to rounding to three digits. Had we
, kept more digits, :EF, would have been smaller, as the reader may wish to show,
I but we must always remember that an answer is no more accura~e than the least
.1
accurate number in the data.
*To three digits, 787{64/69.7} is 723; however, the units digit in the second and
third terms (3250 and - 2230) is insignificant.
4.68 A set of three forces in coordinate directions is 4.69 Two uniform light bars BD and DC are pinned
applied at point C in Figure ;P4.68. Find the forces in the together at D, where a cable is also attached as shown in'
three bars, which are pinned' together at C and rest on ball Figure P4.69. The bars are connected to the reference
joints at A, 0, and B. frame at Band C by smooth ball joints. The system
zt F~-300ilb
8 kips
1~2V21t-1
c
15 kips
( B
12V21t
Figure P4.68
c I )
y
Figure P4.69
287
supports the 300-1b force pulling at D in the negative x 4.72 The light tripod in Figure P4. 72 supports a weight of
direction. Find the force in the cable, and the reactions at B 144 lb. If the legs -A C, and :b are pinned at B and if the"
and C. The bars are in the yz plane. ground is rough, find the force in leg C.
4.70 The portable jack stand in Figure P4.70 carries a z .

downward load of 600 lb. How much compressive force is
there in each of the four symmetrical legs OA, OBI OC, and B
OD~Assume that all connections are ball joints, and that
the only reactions from the ground are equal vertical forces
losing symmetryl at A, B, C, and o. Also, neglect the
dimensions of the top plate.
600lb
Figure P4.72
j. :-
1>~
\t'
:,~~
OB~ 12ft
f.:..~
~, ",'\~
"~ '
,:" ,
4.73 For the space truss shown in Figure P4.73: ,-

a. Find the reactions at A, B, and C. "
b. Using the method of sections;,with a section cut by a
FigureP4.70
4.71 Consider all connections of the weightless struts in

Figure P4. 71as being ball-and-socket. The points A, C, and
plane parallel to XZ, find the force in members AD and
co.
c. Find the forces in members AB, BC, and BD using the
method of joints.
ijp
o all lie in the xz plane. A vertical load of 960 Ib is applied d. Find the force in AC by inspection.
downward at B. Determine the force in member AB. ~
A
z
II It Figure P4.73
B
x
9601b y
Figure P4.71 x
J
j
Space Trusses 2&9
and FB .. represent
(FA_", FAy' the only nonzero reaction Figures P4.77-P4.81
components at A and B.J
* 4.74 In Example 4.9 find ,the forces in the adjustable legs

AQand BQ.
4.75 In Figure P4. 75 the rtine members all have the same
length I. Find the forces in the members, noting that, by
symmetry, ial the forces in AB, AC, AD, EB, EC, and ED are
equal; and lbl the forces in Be, CD, and DB are equal.
v . Problems 4.77-4.81 are based upon the above sketch and

the following text: Bars BI, B2/ and B3 are pinned at A to
B
form a space truss. They are likewise pinned (ball-jointed)
to the ground at 1, 2, and
3, respectively. Find the
forces in the three members if the force F applied at A is as
given.
E
4.77 F = -]QOOk N
p 4.78 F ~ ]Qooi N
Figure P4.7S
4.79 F ~ ]Qooj N
4.80 F = 707i + 707j N

4.76 The '2000.N force i~ in the negative x directionj the
2400-N force is in the yz' plane, and the 21 OO.N force has 4.81 F ~ 577i + 577j+ 577k N
direction cosines 1-1, -t, -~J.Find all the members' forces
4.82 The space truss in Figure P4.82 carries the loads
that are not indeterminate in the space truss shown in
Figure P4. 76. F, ~ - Ioooi + 1200j + 2000k Ib
Figure P4.82
Y B,E x
S ft S{2ft
Sft x
Figure P4.76 A,V C,P
i
I
f
L
.~
and a. Show that the structure is a simple space truss.

b. Find the force in member EF.
F, ~ sooi - 1000, + ISaak Ib
4.84 For the space truss in Figure P4.84, find:
a. By inspection, find a zero-force member.
b. Find the force in member AD. a. The reactions at A, B, C, and D
b. The force in member BE using the method of sections
4.83 In Figure P4.83 line AB of the space truss is verti- with the section shown and a single equation
cal, and the 2000-1b force is parallel to the x axis. c. The force in member BE by the method of joints.
A 2000lb
Note: The support ~ __ transmits force only"
. ,.," 2
e,
normal to the plane defined by the two perpendicular lines
I) and 12,
z
F ~ 101 - 61 - t2k Ib
c y
Hint, Section to lise for method of sections

x
Figure P4.84
x
Figure P4.83
II / Systems Containing Multiforce Members
~4.6 Axial and Shear Forces and Bending Moments

]0 this section we extend the work we have done on trusses to structures
containing "multiforce members." Such a member is not a straight:two'
force bar, as were all the members of a truss. Consequently, on cross-
sectional cuts, a member will be subjected to more than just an axia~
force.
II
Consider Figure 4.27. The half-ring is pulled at the'ends by forces P I
as shown. Though the half-ring is a two-force member, it is not a straight I
two-force member. Hence its various cross sections are subjected to more .j'
Figure 4.27 than just the now-familiar axial forces of a truss. Consider the free-body
t~
1
~~
-
-
p
p
M Figure 4.28
p p
diagrams shown in Figure 4.28. For equilibrium, we need ,equal-

magnitude, oppositely directed forces P as shown, together with the
indicated moments M. Considering the shaded section, equilibrium
requires
'+) 1:MA = 0 = M - P(R sin 81

or
M = PR sin 8
This moment (called a bending moment because it tends to bend the ringl
is seen to vanish at 8 = 0 and 180.
)
t'
Question 4.13 Looking at Figure 4.28, why is it clear thatM .
1i 'must vanish at 0 = 0 and 1801
,', .'
",
..
. '.'
'
'1
I
1
Our member above thus differs from a truss member in that it carries
! a bending moment. But also, the force acting on the cross sections has
beco!?e complicated.
N=PsinO
Figure 4.29
We see in Figure 4.29 that if we resolve the force at the cut into its
two components lal tangent to the center line of the curved ring, and
(b) normal to the center line, we obtain, respectively, in addition to the
familiar axial force INI studied in trusses, a shear force IVI. Note from the
figure that N and V, as was the case with M, vary with 8. This is another
distinct difference from a truss, in which the (axial) member forces were
constant from end to end.
The body need not be curved for V and M to be present. Consider a
second example, in which we seek N, V, and M at isolated points.
E x A M p L E 4. 11......
Find the axial force, shear force, and bending moment at points P and Q of the
frame.
A D
..l,'.'... 40 cm-.:j''''''''
300N SOLUTION
The free-body diagram of the complete frame is shown in Figure 1. Note that BD is
a two-force member, which will allow us to determine A", and AY1 and also the
force Dy in BD, from this single free-body diagram:
LMA ~ 0 ~ D,140 cml - 1300 NII50 cml ~' .
A,
D, = 375 N
A _40cm
Thus
A, D,
Figure 1
+1 LF, = 0 = D, - A, = 375 - A,
,
375 N A, = 375 N
~,
:.375 N
B
Also,
B -ct.. LFx = 0 = 300 - Ax = Ax ~ 300 N

Q
The force at Q is therefore 375 N (9, as shown on both the upper and lower cut
375 N sections of ED IFigure 21.
Q
Sectioning member ABC at P will expose the forces N, V, and M that we seek ,.,
375 N
Isee the free-body diagram of AP):
Q
LFx = 0 ~ N - 0.8(3001 - 0.6(3751

f
.
D N ~ 465 N
D
D,.~ 375 N ~ LF, =0 ~ V + 0.613001- 0.813751
Figure 2 375 N
V = 120N
N
LMp ~ 0 ~ M + 0.81375125 - 0.6(300)25
M = -3000 N. m
d~ 4~25cm
Therefore the forces are in the directions sketched in Figure 3, while the bending
JOON moment is in the opposite lor clockwise) direction to that shown on the free-body
-g-~A diagram.
' '~"'"
Figure 3
292
"
)
The next example is similar to the last one, but it is a bit longer and
requires more free-body diagrams.
-
C 250lb E x A M p L E
In the frame of Example 3.19, find the axial 'force, shear force, and bending
moment at the points P, Q, and R in the figure.
320lb
c c
-I 1671b
2.2 ft
I P
T
2ft 751b
751b 751b
t B B Q 4171b
3ft-
5It~-~ 41 Ib 4171b D
3201b 2.8 ft 15 Ib
c 1671b
20lb
I A
Member BD E
2451b t3951b
2.2 ft
Member ABC Member CDE
qr
M, P.
V, SOLUTION
N, We had found the results in Example 3.19 by dismantling the frame, as shown in
3201b the three figures above. Making a cut at P in member ABC, we have, with the help
of the resulting free-body diagram just below the main figure:
1671b
_ .x.... . LF._~ 0 = Vp- 167. = Vp '" 167.1b
'.1367Ib~lt- P
2ft
+1 LF, ~ 0 = 320 - Np = Np = 320lb
I
r
2.8 It
B
751b
4171b
(:' LMp ~ 0 = Mp + 1167.lbJl2.2 11=
Note that if we had chosen to use the lower section of ABC, shown at the left,
we would have had more forces to deal with but we would have obtained
Mp = -367.1b.ft
L 250lb
A
consistent results-the opposites* of those oil the upper section, in agreement
with action and reaction. Either set of answers [shown on the proper section) is
correct.
2451b (Continued)
*The moment is off by I Ib-ft due to rounding to three digits in the original example.
i
I ~_
~.
For the internal force system at 0, we cut the bar BDthere. We can use either
side of the cut:
Using the left section, Alternatively, using the right section, (
V 751b
o
B D
N 417lb
417lb I 1501b,
C 1.5 It I It
cL LFx ~ 0 ~ NQ ~ 417 = NQ = 417 lb cL LFx ~ 0 ~ 41 7 ~ NQ = NQ = 417 lb
+1 LF, = 0 = 75 ~ 150 + VQ = VQ = 75lb +1 LF, = 0 = 75 - VQ = VQ = 75 lb
(t' LMQ = 0 = MQ + 1150 IbJlI Itl - 1751bJl2.5 Itl (t' LMQ = 0 = -MQ + 175 IbJlO.5 ftl
MQ = 37.5 lb-It MQ ~ 37.5 Ib.1t
The results agree, as they must, for each of the axial force INQI. shear force (VQI,
afi"dbending moment (MQl. Note that we took care of "Newton's Third Law"
when we assigned the directions on the free-body diagrams.
-f(t,
For the internal force system at R, we use a cut section of eDE. From similar
2.8 7
triangles, - = - => (j = 2 ft. We can avoid having to solve two equations in VR
J 5
and NR by summing forces in the slanted coordinate directions x and y in the
-I figure.
2.8 It
"\ LFx = 0 = N. + 320(~) + 417(~)
I v,
N. ~ -5031b
LF, = 0 = V. - 320(~) + 4l7(~)

x
VR=-1531b

LMR ~ 0 = MR + 1320 IbJl2 ftl - 1417 IbJl2.8 Itl
MR = 528 Ib-It
(Note that for the moment calculation we have used the original horizontal and
vertical force and moment arm components.l
The reader is encouraged to check the above results using the lower cut
section of member eDE.
In the last example in this section, we take a detailed look at the

variation in the internal force system elements IN, V, and MI along the
axial direction of a member. This example is -in preparation for aUf study
of beams, to follow in the next section.
294
I;
.'
1
181b E x A M p L E 4.13 .......
Determine the distribution of internal forces in the bent member ABC.
, V
A B
,... 3 ft -----:1=-2 I,-e-I '

SOLUTION
Ii
.,-
In contrast to the first two examples, we are looking for N, V, and M at all points
~
, instead of just two or three. In other words, we wish to know how N, \1,and'M
,.I, vary along the member.
'I
i: The three reactions are found first. Using the free-body diagram at the left,
181b~C
1.5 I, '<) l:M. = 0 ~ D(3 It I - 118 Ibll1.5 Itl
3ft
tv 2 It
D ~ 91b
-"... l:Fx = 0 ~ 18 Ib - Ax = Ax = 18 Ib
+1 l:Fy ~ 0 ~ Ay +D = Ay + 9
or Ay ~ -91b
91b Next we consider a free-body diagram of a .portion of the horizontal section "
AB of the bar, extending from the left end A to a cut section with x <,-3 ft (see
181b IA Q Figure 11.
For equilibrium, we see that not only do we need the normal force NH1 las
[J~X~ with trussesl, but also a shear force VHI and bending moment MJIl:
Figure 1
l:Fx = 0 ~ Nil, - 18 lb = Nil, = 18 lb
.l:Fy = 0 = -91b +'VIl,'= VIII = 9lb
l:MQ = 0 = Mill + 19 lbllx Itl = Mil, = -9x Ib.ft
After x becomes greater than 3 ft, the free-body diagram changes. At a cut section
91b Q M",
such that 3 ft < x < 5 ft, we now have (see Figure -2 at the left):
..
N",
18Ibt-3ft t9lb[
l:Fx = 0 = NIl2 - 181b = NIl2 = 18lb Istill the sameJ
X
but
Figure 2 l:Fy ~ 0 = 91b - 9 lb + VIl2 = VIl2 = 0
and
'<) l:MQ = 0 = MIl2 + 19Ibllx ft) - (9 Ibllx - 3) It
Note that this equals the constant

27 lb-ft, the strength of the couple
formed by the 9.1b forces!
MIl2 = - 27 lb-It
(Continued)
L 295
.I..
L'"
Note that NUl and MHl are continuous across the cut at x = 3 t, but that there
has occurred a jump (or discontinuity) in the shear force VH2 caused by the
concentrated reaction at the roller.
c The above expressions for NUl' VH2 rand MHl are valid until x = 5 t when
181b the bend occurs. On a cut past the bend at P, we may use the upper section from P
I
1.5 ft
'.' to C to most easily determine what is' happening,:in the vertical.part-jBGj of the ,.it~
bar. (See Figure 3.1 Enforcing equilibrium gives
:i:F, ~ 0 = ISlb + V" "" V" = -ISlb

.. .1
,
,I,i'"
:i:Mp = 0 = M" -
-' I

IISlblll.S - y) ft
Figure 3 M" = 127 - ISyJ Ib-It

!
~I
]f we now look at a free-body diagram of the bend alone, we see that it, too, is
of course in equilibrium. ISee Figure 4.1We note that the discontinuity of V~and~
in "rounding the bend" is somewhat artificial. It is due to their exchange of roles
caused by the discontinuity at the corner in the orientation of the center line.
Normal N = 0 27Ib,!t}
These are the negatives of the forces
and moment actmg on Figure 3 at y = o.
181b
These dimensions are very small.
181b
271b-ft
~--~v----
These are the negatives of the forces
and moment acting on Figure 2 at x = 5 ft.
Figure 4
We mention again that when we wish to know the internal force resultant
IN, V, and Ml at a point, we may use either of the two free-body diagrams formed
by the cut section. For example, in the preceding example, if the section to the ,
"
f
right of the first cut is used instead of the section in Figure 1, then equilibrium
requires:
I
I
181b :i:F, ~ 0 = IS - NH1 "" NH1 = IS Ib las before) ,I
>
:i:Fy = 0 ~ - VH I + 9 "" VH 1 = 9 Ib las beforeJ !
:i:MQ = 0 ~ -MH1 - IISlblll.S Itl + 191bJl3 - x) ft
I
St
[~.
'K
MH1 ~ -9x Ib-It las beforeJ !i
~
t
Thus all three results are in agreement with those we obtained using the material
on the other side of the cut. ..;
296
_.
p 'R 0 B L EMS I Section 4.6
4.85 Find the internal forces at section Q-Q on bar B shown

~' in Figure P4.85,
I 4.86 Find the internal forces at section a~aon bar BCD

.
Figure P4.85
4.81 In Figure P4.87 a weight of 3000 N is suspended from
beam B at point C. The beam is connected to a vertical wall
hya frictionless pin and a cable as shown. If the:beam (of
negligible weightl has length 3 m and the length AC is 1 m,
Bnd the internal forces and moment transmitted at section
E.E,
8
15m _3mI 3m_
D
4.88 In Figure P4.88:
8. Find the force exerted on the shaded member in
Figure P4,88 by pin A.
b. Find the internal forces laxial, shear, and bending B
moment) at the midpoint M of the horizontal part of
the shaded member.
4.89 The two boards in Figure P4.89 have been glued

together and are being held 'as they dry by a Celamp. If the
compressive force holding the boards together is 20 lb, find
the internal force system at sections A-A, ~B, and C-C.
4.90 In Figure P4.90 a beam of length L is fastened into a

wall at angle a. with respect to the horizontal. An oil drum
of weight W is slung under the beam using a cable as shown Figure P4.86
fastened at L/4 and 3L/4 to the beam. If a. = 30 and Figure P4.87
, fJ = 30, find the axial force, shearing force, and bending
moment at the midpoint bf the beam. Assume that the
beam is weightless.
Figure P4.90
Figure P4.88
Figure P4.89
l
I
4.91 Find the internal force resultants laxial, shear, and In Problems 4.93-4.98 find the shear force and bending
bending momentJ at sections A-A, B-B, and e-c in Fig- moment in the beam at point P. Show the result on a free-
ure P4.91. body diagram of the part of the beam between P and B.
4.92 In Figure P4.92 a weight of 1000 Ib is suspended from 4.94

the beam at point C. The heam is connected to a vertical
300lb
wall by a frictionless pin at A and by a cable between Band p
D. NeglEfctirtg the weight" of the beam, determine the
internal fdtces and moment transmitted across section E.E.
1.2ft-1---1.2 ft---l
Figure P4.94
Figure P4.91
4.95
20N. m
"
1
--~
.'1''''. p
1--120cm
Figure P4.95
4.96
--_""'I""'" I It
~--------20 ft- --I B
-2ft .-.: 2 ft
D
Each of the nine forces has magnitude 2S lb.
Figure P4.96
A 4.97
B
Figure P4.92
Ijl'"
~,
6ocm'F 60cm 250N
1000Ib
25N -m
4ft Figure P4.97
4ft 2ft 2ft
'I
.~
4.93 4.98
3ft
,!
I 06 in I 100 Ib-ft
!SO Ib I I
B
~-
A
.. "'-- B I
"-~
P
i
2 m~.~--~I'" 3ft
j
4.7 Beams/Shear and Moment Distributions 299
A
4.99 Find the shear force and bending moment on section
A-A of the beam in Figure P4.99. 20lb
4.100 In Figure P4.IOO find the values of the shear and

~xial forces and the bending moment at point E midway
between C and D. Show your results on a sketch of the cut
, I
section at E.
I f--10 ft--_i
I Figure P4.99
1800 N/m
4.101 Find the internal forces and moments at points E
D and F of the light frame shown in Figure P4.1 0 1.
, 13m
-1
2m
A
___ 3m __ ~
I F
~i~Llft-1
2.5 ft.-----
500 Ibs
~4.7 Beams/Shear and Moment Distributions'

In the preceding section, we studied the internal force system IN, V, M}
acting within a cross section of a planar structure. More precisely, N, V;
:1
I
[
I, and M represent a force and couple system equipollent to the infinitely
many differential forces exerted on the material on one side of the cut by
the material on the other side.
I \ To describe the resultant internal force system under a more general
loading than the planar case, we need not just three, but six components
at a selected point in the section: three of force and three of moment. To
see this, let us slice a plane section through a body B, producing two parts.
8, and 8, as shown in Figure 4.30.
The forces exerted upon 8, by 8, are equipollent to a force and a
couple at any selected point (such as A), as we have seen in Chapter 2.
In general, these vectors each have three components, as shown in Fig-
ure 4.31 at the point A in the plane of the cut.
\.
" 1
"
300 Chapter 4 Str6ctural Applications
C
Figure 4.30
F,
F,
(a) (b)
Figure 4.31
The two force components lying in the plane of the cut, F, and F, in
this case (see Figure 4.31), are called shear forces. The force perpendicular
to the plane of the cut (here, F,I is known as a normal force. When B, is a .
slender member, as shown in Figure 4.31(bl, the two moment compo-
nents whose vector directions (thumb of right handllie in the plane of the I
cut are called bending moments (MA" MA, -herel, while the other one, I,
MA" with vector normal to the plane of the cut and turning effect in the
plane,js called a twisting moment . The same six components acting at
A on B2\vould each be respectively opposite in direction, by the principle
of action and reaction.
When B is a slender member that carries shear force(sl, bending
moment(sl, and/or a twisting moment, in addition to the axial force of a
truss member, it is called a beam.
A beam can be loaded in two planes such that it carries a perpen-
dicular pair of shearing force and bending moment components. It may
also be loaded so that the twisting moment component is present. In this
elementary look at beams, we shall, however, restrict our attention to
the case in which the beam is loaded in just one Ixyl plane. That is, all
*The student can readily appreciate this by successively applying moment compo-
nents to a slender body such as a yardstick.
;j'
4.7 Beams/Shear and. Moment Distributions 301
~l/
I
,.
I' ..
I
I
V ,,
I
, V
t
"
~N
(b)
(3)
Figure 4.32
(c)
the forces will lie in a plane and all the unit vectors of the couples will
be normal to that plane lin the :t z direction),
Thus, only one shear force IF" which we shall call VI and one
bending moment IMA., which we shall call MI will be produced, in
addition to the axial load IF" called N). The twisting moment MAx will
necessarily be absent, as will the othe,'>component of shear force IF,) and
i of bending moment IJW~,I. In Figure 4.32 we illustrate these ideas. With '
~: all the forces in the plane of the paper, and with the couples normal to this
plane, the only resultant of all the internal forces at a cut section at x is
expressible as the shear force V, axial force N, and bending moment M.
Outward normals We next set down our sign conventions for N, V, and M . Suppose a
ti:"';it:k'J!~ '> (;.~ beam has been cut, or "sectioned," into two parts. If we are considering
the section on the left, then the exposed face is called a "right-hand face"
Right-hand face Left-hand face Iwith outward normal t9 the rightl. If we are considering the section on
Figure 4.33 the right, then the exposed face is on the left loutward norma.!to the leftl,
and is called a "left-hand face" Isee Figure 4_331.
We are now in a position to define our sign conventions for N, V, and
M Isee Figure 4.341.
-.
.. V
M M
x
Right.hand face V Lefl-hand face
Figure 4.34 Sign convention for axial force, shear force, and bending moment in beams.
As seen in Figure 4.34, the normal lor axial 1 force N is defined as

positive on either type of face if it is in the direction of the outward
*Unfonunately; these conventions vary from book to book, and one must be aware of
this when referring to other texts.
I. "
~ .. -.,
il
., I
,302 Chapter4 StructuralApplications
(a) Positive N (b) Positive V (c) Positive M
Figure 4.35
normal-that is, to the right for a right-hand face and70 the left for a left-
hand face. In other words, in both cases N is positive if it tends to produce
. tension in lor to stretch) the axial fibers aligned""jth x. Saying that "N is
in the direction of the outward normal" is shorthand for saying that the
scalar N multiplies a unit vector in the direction of the outward normal to
form the axial force.
As for the shear force V, it is defined to'be positive if directed upward
on a right-hand face and positive if downward on a\left-hand face. The
bending moment is positive if counterclocKwise on a " right-hand face and
if clockwise on a left-hand face. Thus M is positive in both instances if it
bends the section upward (i.e., toward a concave upward configuration).
Perhaps the summary sketches shown in Figure 4.35 will be helpful.
1501b/ft
Figure 4.36
Consider next the typical beam shown in Figure 4.36. Such a beam,
supported on one end by a pin and on the other by a roller, is said to be
"simply supported."
In presenting beam problems, the piT\is usually drawn as either
"
or ~.~"-'~ while the roller appears

~
,I,
as either ~~-~~~._~
~
or l"... ".. ,~::::ft-
~
As we have already seen in Chapter 3, the pin is able to exert two

components of force Ifor example, horizontally and vertically I on the
beam, while the roller exerts only a component normal to its contact
plane with the beam. (This is a vertical force for the roller in Figure 4.36.)
The purpose of the roller is to allow the beam to slightly move so as to
f1
,I

Statics McGill King PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Statics McGill King PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

II

David J. McGill and Wilton W. King

Editor: I. Donald Childress, IT.

@ 1989 by PWS.KENT Publishing Company; @ 1985 by PWS Publishers. All rights

PW5-KENT Publishing Company is a division of Wadsworth, Inc.

Library of Congt:ess Cataloging.in-Publication Data

McGill, David I., 1939- .

Printed in the United States of America

Statics is the first book in a two-volume set on basic mechanics. It is a text

1.1 Engineering Mechanics 2

1.2 The Primitives 3

Forces and Moments 11

2.2 Moment of a Force About a Point 27

2.4 The Couple 47

2.6 Equipollence of Force Systems 57

2.8 The Simplest Resultant of a Force System 73

2.9 Distributed Force Systems 95

~3 AnalY,sis of Equilibrium Problems 116

~4 Structural APplications 237

4.1 Ir;troduction 238

4.4 The Method of Sections 263

II SYSTEMS CONTAINING MULTIFORCE MEMBERS 290

4.6 Axial and Shear Forces and Bending Moments 290

III CABLES 330

4.9 Parabolic and Catenary Cables 330

5.1 Laws, Coefficients, and Basic Applications of Coulomb Friction 357

~6 Centroids and Mass Centers 420

6.1 Centroids of Lines, Areas, and Volumes/The Recurring Integral 421

6.2 The Method of Composite Parts 436

6.3 Center of Mass 450

~7 Inertia Properties of Plane Areas

8.1 The Principle of Virtual Work 517

Appendix A Vectors 570

A.1 Vectors: Addition, Subtraction, and Multiplication by a Scalar 570

Appendix B Tables Relating to Units 584

Appendix C Moments and Products of Inertia of Areas 587

Appendix D Examples of Numerical Analysis/The Newton-Raphson

1.2 The Primitives

1.5 Problem Solving and Accuracy of Solutions

--.IlIIIIIII1.1 Engineering Mechanics

~1.2 The Primitives

~1.3 Basic Laws

ena: the. second is defined by the period of a radiation occurring in

I kg = I oN. s' ( I Ib )( Lm- )

To aid in verification of dimensional consistency, we assign some

This solution may be in error, but at least it satisfies the requirement of

which cannot be true since the denominator is dimensionally inconsis-

1,5 ProblemSolvingand Accuracyof Solutions 9

PRO B L EMS / Chapter 1

*For instance, if go =. 32.2 ft/sec2 or 9.81 m/s2 is used in a calculation, it is ridiculous

where m = mass, g = gravitational acceleration, N =

change in volume if it is done by calculating a numerical

1.11 Determine the units of the universal gravitation.

2.1 Forces and Lines of Action

2.2 Moment of a Force About a Point

2.4 The Couple

2.5 Laws of Equilibrium: Relationship of Sums of Moments

2.7 The Force-and-Couple Resultant of a System of Forces

2.8 The Simplest Resultant of a Force System

2.9 Distributed Force Systems

~2.1 Forces and Lines of Action

.See Appendix A for a more formal treatment of vector algebra.

over a surface or volume. The details of this point of view will be